US20210052669A1 - Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using lachnospiraceae bacteria - Google Patents

Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using lachnospiraceae bacteria Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20210052669A1
US20210052669A1 US16/965,836 US201916965836A US2021052669A1 US 20210052669 A1 US20210052669 A1 US 20210052669A1 US 201916965836 A US201916965836 A US 201916965836A US 2021052669 A1 US2021052669 A1 US 2021052669A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
bacteria
pharmaceutical composition
lachnospiraceae
bacterial
canceled
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US16/965,836
Inventor
Maria Sizova
Carolina Baez-Giangreco
Brian Goodman
Holly Ponichtera
Peter Sandy
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Evelo Biosciences Inc
Original Assignee
Evelo Biosciences Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Evelo Biosciences Inc filed Critical Evelo Biosciences Inc
Priority to US16/965,836 priority Critical patent/US20210052669A1/en
Publication of US20210052669A1 publication Critical patent/US20210052669A1/en
Assigned to EVELO BIOSCIENCES, INC. reassignment EVELO BIOSCIENCES, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BAEZ-GIANGRECO, Carolina, SIZOVA, MARIA, GOODMAN, BRIAN
Assigned to EVELO BIOSCIENCES, INC. reassignment EVELO BIOSCIENCES, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: PONICHTERA, Holly, SANDY, Peter
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K35/00—Medicinal preparations containing materials or reaction products thereof with undetermined constitution
    • A61K35/66—Microorganisms or materials therefrom
    • A61K35/74—Bacteria
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/395—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum
    • A61K39/39533—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum against materials from animals
    • A61K39/3955—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum against materials from animals against proteinaceous materials, e.g. enzymes, hormones, lymphokines
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0012—Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
    • A61K9/0019—Injectable compositions; Intramuscular, intravenous, arterial, subcutaneous administration; Compositions to be administered through the skin in an invasive manner
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0012—Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
    • A61K9/0053—Mouth and digestive tract, i.e. intraoral and peroral administration
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/28—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • C07K16/2803—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants against the immunoglobulin superfamily
    • C07K16/2818—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants against the immunoglobulin superfamily against CD28 or CD152
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/505—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising antibodies
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/70—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by effect upon binding to a cell or to an antigen
    • C07K2317/76—Antagonist effect on antigen, e.g. neutralization or inhibition of binding

Definitions

  • compositions e.g., bacterial composition, pharmaceutical compositions
  • diseases e.g., cancer, autoimmune disease, inflammatory disease, metabolic disease
  • a subject e.g., a human subject
  • administering a bacterial composition comprising Lachnospiraceae bacteria, and/or a product of such bacteria (e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)), as well as methods of making and/or identifying such a bacterium.
  • EVs extracellular vesicles
  • PhABs pharmaceutically active biomasses
  • bioreactors comprising such bacteria.
  • the bacteria is a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1.
  • the bacteria is a strain comprising at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the nucleotide sequence (e.g., genomic sequence, 16S sequence, CRISPR sequence) of the bacterial strains listed in Table 1.
  • the administration of the bacterial composition treats the immune disorder in the subject.
  • the immune disorder is an autoimmune disease.
  • the immune disorder is an inflammatory disease.
  • the immune disorder is an allergy.
  • extracellular vesicles produced by and/or generated by and/or isolated from Lachnospiraceae bacteria provided herein.
  • the bacterial compositions comprise both Lachnospiraceae EVs and whole Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., live bacteria, killed bacteria, attenuated bacteria).
  • provided herein are bacterial compositions comprising Lachnospiraceae bacteria in the absence of Lachnospiraceae EVs.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions comprise Lachnospiraceae EVs in the absence of Lachnospiraceae bacteria.
  • provided herein are methods of treating a subject who has an immune disorder (e.g., an autoimmune disease, an inflammatory disease, an allergy), comprising administering to the subject a bacterial composition comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacterium (e.g., a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium).
  • a bacterial composition comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacterium (e.g., a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium).
  • a bacterial composition comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacterium (e.g., a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium).
  • a bacterial composition comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacterium (e.g., a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium).
  • a metabolic disease compris
  • the bacterium is a strain comprising at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., genomic sequence identity, 16S sequence identity, CRISPR sequence identity) (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the corresponding nucleotide sequence of the bacterial strains listed in Table 1.
  • sequence identity e.g., genomic sequence identity, 16S sequence identity, CRISPR sequence identity
  • sequence identity e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity
  • the bacterial formulation comprises at least 1 ⁇ 10 5 , 5 ⁇ 10 5 , 1 ⁇ 10 6 , 2 ⁇ 10 6 , 3 ⁇ 10 6 , 4 ⁇ 10 6 , 5 ⁇ 10 6 , 6 ⁇ 10 6 , 7 ⁇ 10 6 , 8 ⁇ 10 6 , 9 ⁇ 10 6 , 1 ⁇ 10 7 , 2 ⁇ 10 7 , 3 ⁇ 10 7 , 4 ⁇ 10 7 , 5 ⁇ 10 7 , 6 ⁇ 10 7 , 7 ⁇ 10 7 , 8 ⁇ 10 7 , 9 ⁇ 10 7 , 1 ⁇ 10 8 , 2 ⁇ 10 8 , 3 ⁇ 10 8 , 4 ⁇ 10 8 , 5 ⁇ 10 8 , 6 ⁇ 10 8 , 7 ⁇ 10 8 , 8 ⁇ 10 8 , 9 ⁇ 10 8 or 1 ⁇ 10 9 colony forming units of Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1).
  • provided herein are methods of treating a subject who has cancer comprising administering to the subject a bacterial composition described herein.
  • the method further comprises administering to the subject an antibiotic.
  • the method further comprises administering to the subject one or more other cancer therapies (e.g., surgical removal of a tumor, the administration of a chemotherapeutic agent, the administration of radiation therapy, and/or the administration of a cancer immunotherapy, such as an immune checkpoint inhibitor, a cancer-specific antibody, a cancer vaccine, a primed antigen presenting cell, a cancer-specific T cell, a cancer-specific chimeric antigen receptor (CAR) T cell, an immune activating protein, and/or an adjuvant).
  • the method further comprises the administration of another therapeutic bacterium and/or EV.
  • the method further comprises the administration of an immune suppressant and/or an anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the method further comprises the administration of a metabolic disease therapeutic agent.
  • bacterial compositions comprising a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 (e.g., a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium) and/or a product of such bacteria (e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)).
  • a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 e.g., a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium
  • a product of such bacteria e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)
  • EVs extracellular vesicles
  • PhABs pharmaceutically active biomasses
  • at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the bacterial composition are a strain of bacteria listed in
  • the bacteria is a strain comprising at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., genomic sequence identity, 16S sequence identity, CRISPR sequence identity) (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the nucleotide sequence of the strain of bacteria listed in Table 1.
  • sequence identity e.g., genomic sequence identity, 16S sequence identity, CRISPR sequence identity
  • all or substantially all of the bacteria in the bacterial formulation are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
  • the bacterial formulation comprises at least 1 ⁇ 10 5 , 5 ⁇ 10 5 , 1 ⁇ 10 6 , 2 ⁇ 10 6 , 3 ⁇ 10 6 , 4 ⁇ 10 6 , 5 ⁇ 10 6 , 6 ⁇ 10 6 , 7 ⁇ 10 6 , 8 ⁇ 10 6 , 9 ⁇ 10 6 , 1 ⁇ 10 7 , 2 ⁇ 10 7 , 3 ⁇ 10 7 , 4 ⁇ 10 7 , 5 ⁇ 10 7 , 6 ⁇ 10 7 , 7 ⁇ 10 7 , 8 ⁇ 10 7 , 9 ⁇ 10 7 , 1 ⁇ 10 8 , 2 ⁇ 10 8 , 3 ⁇ 10 8 , 4 ⁇ 10 8 , 5 ⁇ 10 8 , 6 ⁇ 10 8 , 7 ⁇ 10 8 , 8 ⁇ 10 8 , 9 ⁇ 10 8 or 1 ⁇ 10 9 colony forming units of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
  • the bacterial composition comprises EVs and/or PhABs (e.g., whole cells, fractions of cells, supernatant from fermentation, fractions of supernatant and/or extracellular vesicles) made from a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
  • EVs and/or PhABs e.g., whole cells, fractions of cells, supernatant from fermentation, fractions of supernatant and/or extracellular vesicles
  • the bacterial composition is administered orally, intravenously, intratumorally, or subcutaneously. In some embodiments, the bacterial composition is administered in 2 or more (e.g., 3 or more, 4 or more or 5 or more doses). In some embodiments, the administration to the subject of the two or more doses are separated by at least 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 7 hours, 8 hours, 9 hours, 10 hours, 11 hours, 12 hours, 13 hours, 14 hours, 15 hours, 16 hours, 17 hours, 18 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 7 days, 8 days, 9 days, 10 days, 11 days, 12 days, 13 days, 14 days, 15 days, 16 days, 17 days, 18 days, 19 days, 20 days or 21 days. In some embodiments, a second bacterium is administered as part of an ecological consortium.
  • the composition comprises a specific ratio of Lachnospiraceae bacteria to Lachnospiraceae EV particles.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises no more than 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.8, 9.5
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises no more than 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.
  • PhABs made from and/or comprising a Lachnospiraceae strain provided herein.
  • the PhABs comprise whole cells, fractions of cells, supernatant from fermentation, fractions of supernatant and/or extracellular vesicles made from bacteria described herein.
  • the bacterial compositions provided herein comprise a Lachnospiraceae strain PhAB provided herein.
  • the bacterial composition suppresses the immune response in delayed-type hypersensitivity (DTH). In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition induces a regulatory T cell or an anti-inflammatory response. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition inhibits antigen-specific immune responses. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats allergic contact dermatitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats autoimmune myocarditis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats diabetes mellitus type 1. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats granulomas. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats peripheral neuropathies. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats Hashimoto's thyroiditis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats multiple sclerosis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats rheumatoid arthritis.
  • DTH delayed-type hypersensitivity
  • the bacterial composition treats inflammation of the colon. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats colitis. Colitis may be acute and self-limited or long-term. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats ulcerative colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats digestive diseases. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats Crohn's disease. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats inflammatory bowel disease (IBD). In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats microscopic colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats collagenous colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats diversion colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats chemical colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats ischemic colitis.
  • Colitis may be acute and self-limited or long-term. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats ulcerative colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats digestive diseases. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats Crohn's disease. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats inflammatory bowel disease (IBD
  • the bacterial composition treats indeterminate colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats atypical colitis. In some embodiments, the method further comprises administering to the subject an additional therapeutic (e.g., an antibiotic an immune suppressant, an anti-inflammatory agent). In some embodiments, the method further comprises administering to the subject is a second therapeutic bacterium.
  • an additional therapeutic e.g., an antibiotic an immune suppressant, an anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the methods and compositions described herein may be used to treat metabolic disorders and metabolic syndromes.
  • Such conditions include, but are not limited to, Type II Diabetes, Encephalopathy, Tay-Sachs disease, Krabbe disease, Galactosemia, Phenylketonuria (PKU), and Maple syrup urine disease.
  • the methods and compositions described herein may be used to treat neurodegenerative and neurological diseases.
  • Such conditions include, but are not limited to, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease, prion disease, Huntington's disease, motor neurone diseases (MND), spinocerebellar ataxia, spinal muscular atrophy, dystonia, idiopathicintracranial hypertension, epilepsy, nervous system disease, central nervous system disease, movement disorders, multiple sclerosis, encephalopathy, peripheral neuropathy and post-operative cognitive dysfunction.
  • the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the subject is a human. In some embodiments, the subject is a non-human mammal (e.g., a dog, a cat, a cow, a horse, a pig, a donkey, a goat, a camel, a mouse, a rat, a guinea pig, a sheep, a llama, a monkey, a gorilla or a chimpanzee).
  • a non-human mammal e.g., a dog, a cat, a cow, a horse, a pig, a donkey, a goat, a camel, a mouse, a rat, a guinea pig, a sheep, a llama, a monkey, a gorilla or a chimpanzee.
  • the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using a method that leaves the disease modulating activity of the bacteria intact and the resulting bacterial components are used in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using an antibiotic (e.g., using an antibiotic described herein).
  • the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using UV irradiation.
  • FIG. 1 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model.
  • FIG. 2 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 7.
  • FIG. 3 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 9.
  • FIG. 4 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 11.
  • FIG. 5 shows the efficacy of the combination of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain and anti-PD-1 compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 alone or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model.
  • FIG. 6 shows the efficacy of the combination of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain and anti-PD-1 compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 alone or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 21.
  • FIG. 7 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Tyzzerella nexilis strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 11.
  • an immune disorder e.g., an autoimmune disease, an inflammatory disease, an allergy
  • a bacterial composition comprising Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1).
  • adjuvant or “Adjuvant therapy” broadly refers to an agent that affects an immunological or physiological response in a patient or subject.
  • an adjuvant might increase the presence of an antigen over time or to an area of interest like a tumor, help absorb an antigen presenting cell antigen, activate macrophages and lymphocytes and support the production of cytokines.
  • an adjuvant might permit a smaller dose of an immune interacting agent to increase the effectiveness or safety of a particular dose of the immune interacting agent.
  • an adjuvant might prevent T cell exhaustion
  • administering broadly refers to a route of administration of a composition to a subject.
  • routes of administration include oral administration, rectal administration, topical administration, inhalation (nasal) or injection.
  • Administration by injection includes intravenous (IV), intramuscular (IM), intratumoral (IT) and subcutaneous (SC) administration.
  • compositions described herein can be administered in any form by any effective route, including but not limited to intratumoral, oral, parenteral, enteral, intravenous, intraperitoneal, topical, transdermal (e.g., using any standard patch), intradermal, ophthalmic, (intra)nasally, local, non-oral, such as aerosol, inhalation, subcutaneous, intramuscular, buccal, sublingual, (trans)rectal, vaginal, intra-arterial, and intrathecal, transmucosal (e.g., sublingual, lingual, (trans)buccal, (trans)urethral, vaginal (e.g., trans- and perivaginally), intravesical, intrapulmonary, intraduodenal, intragastrical, and intrabronchial.
  • transdermal e.g., using any standard patch
  • intradermal e.g., using any standard patch
  • intradermal e.g., using any standard patch
  • intradermal e.g
  • compositions described herein are administered orally, rectally, intratumorally, topically, intravesically, by injection into or adjacent to a draining lymph node, intravenously, by inhalation or aerosol, or subcutaneously.
  • antibody may refer to both an intact antibody and an antigen binding fragment thereof.
  • Intact antibodies are glycoproteins that include at least two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains inter-connected by disulfide bonds.
  • Each heavy chain includes a heavy chain variable region (abbreviated herein as V H ) and a heavy chain constant region.
  • Each light chain includes a light chain variable region (abbreviated herein as V L ) and a light chain constant region.
  • the V H and V L regions can be further subdivided into regions of hypervariability, termed complementarity determining regions (CDR), interspersed with regions that are more conserved, termed framework regions (FR).
  • CDR complementarity determining regions
  • Each V H and V L is composed of three CDRs and four FRs, arranged from amino-terminus to carboxy-terminus in the following order: FR1, CDR1, FR2, CDR2, FR3, CDR3, FR4.
  • the variable regions of the heavy and light chains contain a binding domain that interacts with an antigen.
  • the term “antibody” includes, for example, monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, chimeric antibodies, humanized antibodies, human antibodies, multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies), single-chain antibodies and antigen-binding antibody fragments.
  • antigen binding fragment and “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody, as used herein, refers to one or more fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to bind to an antigen.
  • binding fragments encompassed within the term “antigen-binding fragment” of an antibody include Fab, Fab′, F(ab′) 2 , Fv, scFv, disulfide linked Fv, Fd, diabodies, single-chain antibodies, NANOBODIES®, isolated CDRH3, and other antibody fragments that retain at least a portion of the variable region of an intact antibody. These antibody fragments can be obtained using conventional recombinant and/or enzymatic techniques and can be screened for antigen binding in the same manner as intact antibodies.
  • carcinomas which are cancers of the epithelial tissue (e.g., skin, squamous cells); sarcomas which are cancers of the connective tissue (e.g., bone, cartilage, fat, muscle, blood vessels, etc.); leukemias which are cancers of blood forming tissue (e.g., bone marrow tissue); lymphomas and myelomas which are cancers of immune cells; and central nervous system cancers which include cancers from brain and spinal tissue.
  • carcinomas which are cancers of the epithelial tissue (e.g., skin, squamous cells)
  • sarcomas which are cancers of the connective tissue (e.g., bone, cartilage, fat, muscle, blood vessels, etc.)
  • leukemias which are cancers of blood forming tissue (e.g., bone marrow tissue)
  • lymphomas and myelomas which are cancers of immune cells
  • central nervous system cancers which include cancers from brain and spinal tissue.
  • cancer(s),” “neoplasm(s),” and “tumor(s)” are used herein interchangeably.
  • cancer refers to all types of cancer or neoplasm or malignant tumors including leukemias, carcinomas and sarcomas, whether new or recurring. Specific examples of cancers are: carcinomas, sarcomas, myelomas, leukemias, lymphomas and mixed type tumors.
  • Non-limiting examples of cancers are new or recurring cancers of the brain, melanoma, bladder, breast, cervix, colon, head and neck, kidney, lung, non-small cell lung, mesothelioma, ovary, prostate, sarcoma, stomach, uterus and medulloblastoma.
  • Cellular augmentation broadly refers to the influx of cells or expansion of cells in an environment that are not substantially present in the environment prior to administration of a composition and not present in the composition itself.
  • Cells that augment the environment include immune cells, stromal cells, bacterial and fungal cells. Environments of particular interest are the microenvironments where cancer cells reside or locate.
  • the microenvironment is a tumor microenvironment or a tumor draining lymph node.
  • the microenvironment is a pre-cancerous tissue site or the site of local administration of a composition or a site where the composition will accumulate after remote administration.
  • “Clade” refers to the OTUs or members of a phylogenetic tree that are downstream of a statistically valid node in a phylogenetic tree.
  • the clade comprises a set of terminal leaves in the phylogenetic tree that is a distinct monophyletic evolutionary unit and that share some extent of sequence similarity.
  • “Operational taxonomic units,” “OTU” (or plural, “OTUs”) refer to a terminal leaf in a phylogenetic tree and is defined by a nucleic acid sequence, e.g., the entire genome, or a specific genetic sequence, and all sequences that share sequence identity to this nucleic acid sequence at the level of species.
  • the specific genetic sequence may be the 16S sequence or a portion of the 16S sequence.
  • the entire genomes of two entities are sequenced and compared.
  • select regions such as multilocus sequence tags (MLST), specific genes, or sets of genes may be genetically compared.
  • MMT multilocus sequence tags
  • OTUs that share ⁇ 97% average nucleotide identity across the entire 16S or some variable region of the 16S are considered the same OTU (see e.g. Claesson M J, Wang Q, O'Sullivan O, Greene-Diniz R, Cole J R, Ros R P, and O'Toole P W. 2010.
  • OTUs are frequently defined by comparing sequences between organisms. Generally, sequences with less than 95% sequence identity are not considered to form part of the same OTU.
  • OTUs may also be characterized by any combination of nucleotide markers or genes, in particular highly conserved genes (e.g., “house-keeping” genes), or a combination thereof. Such characterization employs, e.g., WGS data or a whole genome sequence.
  • a “combination” of two or more monoclonal microbial strains includes the physical co-existence of the two monoclonal microbial strains, either in the same material or product or in physically connected products, as well as the temporal co-administration or co-localization of the monoclonal microbial strains.
  • decrease or “deplete” means a change, such that the difference is, depending on circumstances, at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 1/100, 1/1000, 1/10,000, 1/100,000, 1/1,000,000 or undetectable after treatment when compared to a pre-treatment state.
  • ecological consortium is a group of bacteria which trades metabolites and positively co-regulates one another, in contrast to two bacteria which induce host synergy through activating complementary host pathways for improved efficacy.
  • epitope means a protein determinant capable of specific binding to an antibody.
  • Epitopes usually consist of chemically active surface groupings of molecules such as amino acids or sugar side chains. Certain epitopes can be defined by a particular sequence of amino acids to which an antibody is capable of binding.
  • engineered bacteria are any bacteria that have been genetically altered from their natural state by human intervention and the progeny of any such bacteria.
  • Engineered bacteria include, for example, the products of targeted genetic modification, the products of random mutagenesis screens and the products of directed evolution.
  • gene is used broadly to refer to any nucleic acid associated with a biological function.
  • the term “gene” applies to a specific genomic sequence, as well as to a cDNA or an mRNA encoded by that genomic sequence.
  • “Identity” as between nucleic acid sequences of two nucleic acid molecules can be determined as a percentage of identity using known computer algorithms such as the “FASTA” program, using for example, the default parameters as in Pearson et al. (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (other programs include the GCG program package (Devereux, J., et al., Nucleic Acids Research 12(I):387 (1984)), BLASTP, BLASTN, FASTA Atschul, S. F., et al., J Molec Biol 215:403 (1990); Guide to Huge Computers, Mrtin J. Bishop, ed., Academic Press, San Diego, 1994, and Carillo et al.
  • immune disorder refers to any disease, disorder or disease symptom caused by an activity of the immune system, including autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases and allergies
  • Immune disorders include, but are not limited to, autoimmune diseases (e.g., Lupus, Scleroderma, hemolytic anemia, vasculitis, type one diabetes, Grave's disease, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, Goodpasture's syndrome, pernicious anemia and/or myopathy), inflammatory diseases (e.g., acne vulgaris, asthma, celiac disease, chronic prostatitis, glomerulonephritis, inflammatory bowel disease, pelvic inflammatory disease, reperfusion injury, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, transplant rejection, vasculitis and/or interstitial cystitis), and/or an allergies (e.g., food allergies, drug allergies and/or environmental allergies).
  • autoimmune diseases e.g., Lupus, Scleroderma, hemolytic anemia, vasculitis, type
  • the term “increase” means a change, such that the difference is, depending on circumstances, at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 2-fold, 4-fold, 10-fold, 100-fold, 10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ 3 fold, 10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ 4 fold, 10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ 5 fold, 10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ 6 fold, and/or 10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ 7 fold greater after treatment when compared to a pre-treatment state.
  • Properties that may be increased include immune cells, bacterial cells, stromal cells, myeloid derived suppressor cells, fibroblasts, metabolites, and cytokines.
  • ITS is a piece of non-functional RNA located between structural ribosomal RNAs (rRNA) on a common precursor transcript often used for identification of eukaryotic species in particular fungi.
  • rRNA structural ribosomal RNAs
  • the rRNA of fungi that forms the core of the ribosome is transcribed as a signal gene and consists of the 8S, 5.8S and 28S regions with ITS4 and 5 between the 8S and 5.8S and 5.8S and 28S regions, respectively.
  • isolated or “enriched” encompasses a microbe, bacteria or other entity or substance that has been (1) separated from at least some of the components with which it was associated when initially produced (whether in nature or in an experimental setting), and/or (2) produced, prepared, purified, and/or manufactured by the hand of man. Isolated microbes may be separated from at least about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, or more of the other components with which they were initially associated.
  • isolated microbes are more than about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about 99%, or more than about 99% pure.
  • a substance is “pure” if it is substantially free of other components.
  • the terms “purify,” “purifying” and “purified” refer to a microbe or other material that has been separated from at least some of the components with which it was associated either when initially produced or generated (e.g., whether in nature or in an experimental setting), or during any time after its initial production.
  • a microbe or a microbial population may be considered purified if it is isolated at or after production, such as from a material or environment containing the microbe or microbial population, and a purified microbe or microbial population may contain other materials up to about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, or above about 90% and still be considered “isolated.”
  • purified microbes or microbial population are more than about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about 99%, or more than about 99% pure.
  • the one or more microbial types present in the composition can be independently purified from one or more other microbes produced and/or present in the material or environment containing the microbial type.
  • Microbial compositions and the microbial components thereof are generally purified from residual habitat products.
  • Metal refers to any and all molecular compounds, compositions, molecules, ions, co-factors, catalysts or nutrients used as substrates in any cellular or microbial metabolic reaction or resulting as product compounds, compositions, molecules, ions, co-factors, catalysts or nutrients from any cellular or microbial metabolic reaction.
  • Merobe refers to any natural or engineered organism characterized as a bacterium, fungus, microscopic alga, protozoan, and the stages of development or life cycle stages (e.g., vegetative, spore (including sporulation, dormancy, and germination), latent, biofilm) associated with the organism.
  • gut microbes examples include: Actinomyces graevenitzii, Actinomyces odontolyticus, Akkermansia muciniphila, Bacteroides caccae, Bacteroides fragilis, Bacteroides putredinis, Bacteroides thetaiotaomicron, Bacteroides vultagus, Bifidobacterium adolescentis, Bifidobacterium bifidum, Bilophila wadsworthia, Lactococcus lactis, Butyrivibrio, Campylobacter gracilis, Clostridia cluster III, Clostridia cluster IV, Clostridia cluster IX ( Acidaminococcaceae group), Clostridia cluster XI, Clostridia cluster XIII ( Peptostreptococcus group), Clostridia cluster XIV, Clostridia cluster XV, Collinsella aerofaciens, Coprococcus, Cor
  • Microbiome broadly refers to the microbes residing on or in body site of a subject or patient.
  • Microbes in a microbiome may include bacteria, viruses, eukaryotic microorganisms, and/or viruses.
  • Individual microbes in a microbiome may be metabolically active, dormant, latent, or exist as spores, may exist planktonically or in biofilms, or may be present in the microbiome in sustainable or transient manner.
  • the microbiome may be a commensal or healthy-state microbiome or a disease-state microbiome.
  • the microbiome may be native to the subject or patient, or components of the microbiome may be modulated, introduced, or depleted due to changes in health state (e.g., precancerous or cancerous state) or treatment conditions (e.g., antibiotic treatment, exposure to different microbes).
  • the microbiome occurs at a mucosal surface.
  • the microbiome is a gut microbiome.
  • the microbiome is a tumor microbiome.
  • a “microbiome profile” or a “microbiome signature” of a tissue or sample refers to an at least partial characterization of the bacterial makeup of a microbiome.
  • a microbiome profile indicates whether at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or more bacterial strains are present or absent in a microbiome.
  • Modified in reference to a bacteria broadly refers to a bacteria that has undergone a change from its wild-type form.
  • bacterial modifications include genetic modification, gene expression, phenotype modification, formulation, chemical modification, and dose or concentration. Examples of improved properties are described throughout this specification and include, e.g., attenuation, auxotrophy, homing, or antigenicity.
  • Phenotype modification might include, by way of example, bacteria growth in media that modify the phenotype of a bacterium that increase or decrease virulence.
  • a gene is “overexpressed” in a bacteria if it is expressed at a higher level in an engineered bacteria under at least some conditions than it is expressed by a wild-type bacteria of the same species under the same conditions.
  • a gene is “underexpressed” in a bacteria if it is expressed at a lower level in an engineered bacteria under at least some conditions than it is expressed by a wild-type bacteria of the same species under the same conditions.
  • polynucleotide and “nucleic acid” are used interchangeably. They refer to a polymeric form of nucleotides of any length, either deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof. Polynucleotides may have any three-dimensional structure, and may perform any function.
  • polynucleotides coding or non-coding regions of a gene or gene fragment, loci (locus) defined from linkage analysis, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers.
  • a polynucleotide may comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs.
  • nucleotide structure may be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer.
  • a polynucleotide may be further modified, such as by conjugation with a labeling component.
  • U nucleotides are interchangeable with T nucleotides.
  • “Operational taxonomic units” and “OTU(s)” refer to a terminal leaf in a phylogenetic tree and is defined by a nucleic acid sequence, e.g., the entire genome, or a specific genetic sequence, and all sequences that share sequence identity to this nucleic acid sequence at the level of species.
  • the specific genetic sequence may be the 16S sequence or a portion of the 16S sequence.
  • the entire genomes of two entities are sequenced and compared.
  • select regions such as multilocus sequence tags (MLST), specific genes, or sets of genes may be genetically compared.
  • OTUs that share ⁇ 97% average nucleotide identity across the entire 16S or some variable region of the 16S are considered the same OTU. See e.g. Claesson M J, Wang Q, O'Sullivan O, Greene-Diniz R, Cole J R, Ross R P, and O'Toole P W. 2010. Comparison of two next-generation sequencing technologies for resolving highly complex microbiota composition using tandem variable 16S rRNA gene regions. Nucleic Acids Res 38: e200. Konstantinidis K T, Ramette A, and Tiedje J M. 2006. The bacterial species definition in the genomic era. Philos Trans R Soc Lond B Biol Sci 361: 1929-1940.
  • MLSTs For complete genomes, MLSTs, specific genes, other than 16S, or sets of genes OTUs that share ⁇ 95% average nucleotide identity are considered the same OTU. See e.g., Achtman M, and Wagner M. 2008. Microbial diversity and the genetic nature of microbial species. Nat. Rev. Microbiol. 6: 431-440. Konstantinidis K T, Ramette A, and Tiedje J M. 2006. The bacterial species definition in the genomic era. Philos Trans R Soc Lond B Biol Sci 361: 1929-1940. OTUs are frequently defined by comparing sequences between organisms. Generally, sequences with less than 95% sequence identity are not considered to form part of the same OTU.
  • OTUs may also be characterized by any combination of nucleotide markers or genes, in particular highly conserved genes (e.g., “house-keeping” genes), or a combination thereof.
  • Operational Taxonomic Units (OTUs) with taxonomic assignments made to, e.g., genus, species, and phylogenetic clade are provided herein.
  • a substance is “pure” if it is substantially free of other components.
  • the terms “purify,” “purifying” and “purified” refer to a EV or other material that has been separated from at least some of the components with which it was associated either when initially produced or generated (e.g., whether in nature or in an experimental setting), or during any time after its initial production.
  • An EV may be considered purified if it is isolated at or after production, such as from one or more other bacterial components, and a purified microbe or microbial population may contain other materials up to about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, or above about 90% and still be considered “purified.”
  • purified EVs are more than about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about 99%, or more than about 99% pure.
  • EV compositions and the microbial components thereof are, e.g., purified from residual habitat products.
  • the term “purified EV composition” or “EV composition” refer to a preparation that includes EVs that have been separated from at least one associated substance found in a source material (e.g. separated from at least one other bacterial component) or any material associated with the EVs in any process used to produce the preparation. It also refers to a composition that has been significantly enriched or concentrated. In some embodiments the EVs are concentrated by 2 fold, 3-fold, 4-fold, 5-fold, 10-fold, 100-fold, 1000-fold, 10,000-fold or more than 10,000 fold.
  • specific binding refers to the ability of an antibody to bind to a predetermined antigen or the ability of a polypeptide to bind to its predetermined binding partner.
  • an antibody or polypeptide specifically binds to its predetermined antigen or binding partner with an affinity corresponding to a K D of about 10 ⁇ 7 M or less, and binds to the predetermined antigen/binding partner with an affinity (as expressed by K D ) that is at least 10 fold less, at least 100 fold less or at least 1000 fold less than its affinity for binding to a non-specific and unrelated antigen/binding partner (e.g., BSA, casein).
  • specific binding applies more broadly to a two component system where one component is a protein, lipid, or carbohydrate or combination thereof and engages with the second component which is a protein, lipid, carbohydrate or combination thereof in a specific way.
  • subject refers to any animal.
  • a subject or a patient described as “in need thereof” refers to one in need of a treatment for a disease.
  • Mammals i.e., mammalian animals
  • mammals include humans, laboratory animals (e.g., primates, rats, mice), livestock (e.g., cows, sheep, goats, pigs), and household pets (e.g., dogs, cats, rodents).
  • the subject may be a non-human mammal including but not limited to of a dog, a cat, a cow, a horse, a pig, a donkey, a goat, a camel, a mouse, a rat, a guinea pig, a sheep, a llama, a monkey, a gorilla or a chimpanzee.
  • the subject or patient may be healthy, or may be suffering from an immune disorder at any developmental stage.
  • “Strain” refers to a member of a bacterial species with a genetic signature such that it may be differentiated from closely-related members of the same bacterial species.
  • the genetic signature may be the absence of all or part of at least one gene, the absence of all or part of at least on regulatory region (e.g., a promoter, a terminator, a riboswitch, a ribosome binding site), the absence (“curing”) of at least one native plasmid, the presence of at least one recombinant gene, the presence of at least one mutated gene, the presence of at least one foreign gene (a gene derived from another species), the presence at least one mutated regulatory region (e.g., a promoter, a terminator, a riboswitch, a ribosome binding site), the presence of at least one non-native plasmid, the presence of at least one antibiotic resistance cassette, or a combination thereof.
  • strains may be identified by PCR amplification optionally followed by DNA sequencing of the genomic region(s) of interest or of the whole genome.
  • strains may be differentiated by selection or counter-selection using an antibiotic or nutrient/metabolite, respectively.
  • treating refers to subjecting the subject to a pharmaceutical treatment, e.g., the administration of one or more agents, such that at least one symptom of the disease is decreased or prevented from worsening.
  • a pharmaceutical treatment e.g., the administration of one or more agents, such that at least one symptom of the disease is decreased or prevented from worsening.
  • “treating” refers inter alia to delaying progression, expediting remission, inducing remission, augmenting remission, speeding recovery, increasing efficacy of or decreasing resistance to alternative therapeutics, or a combination thereof.
  • a bacterial composition comprising Lachnospiraceae bacteria and/or a product of such bacteria (e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)).
  • the bacteria is a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1.
  • AAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGG 27 CTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACG TAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGT GTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGCGAAGCAAGTCT GAAGTGAAAACCCAGGGCTCAACCCTGGGAC TGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTTGCTAGAGTGTCGGA GAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGA AATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGG CGAAGGCGGCTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGT TGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGA TTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGA TGAATGCTAGGTGTTGGGGGGCAAAGCCCTT CGGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGCATTCCA CCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTC AAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGA
  • nexilis S10-231 consensus sequence SEQ nexilis GGCTAAATACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATA ID Strain A CGTATGGTGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGG NO. GTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTTGTGTAAGT 29 CTGATGTGAAAGCCCGGGGCTCAACCCCGGG ACTGCATTGGAAACTATGTAACTAGAGTGTCG GAGAGGTAAGCGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGT GAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGT GGCGAAGGCGGCTTACTGGACGATCACTGAC GTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAG GATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAAC GATGACTACTAGGTGTCGGGGAGCAAAGCTC TTCGGTGCCGCAGCAAACGCAATAAGTAGTC CACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAAC TCAAAGGAATTGACGGACCCGCACAAGCG GTGGAGCATGTGGTTTA
  • the bacteria is a strain comprising at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the nucleotide sequence (e.g., genomic, 16S or CRISPR nucleotide sequence) of the bacterial strains listed in Table 1.
  • sequence identity e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity
  • the bacteria described herein are modified to improve colonization and/or engraftment in the mammalian gastrointestinal tract (e.g., modified metabolism, such as improved mucin degradation, enhanced competition profile, increased motility, increased adhesion to gut epithelial cells, modified chemotaxis).
  • the bacteria described herein are modified to enhance their immunomodulatory and/or therapeutic effect (e.g., either alone or in combination with another therapeutic agent).
  • the bacteria described herein are modified to enhance immune activation (e.g., through modified production of polysaccharides, pili, fimbriae, adhesins, outer membrane vesicles).
  • the bacteria described herein are modified to improve bacterial manufacturing (e.g., higher oxygen tolerance, improved freeze-thaw tolerance, shorter generation times).
  • the Lachnospiraceae bacteria can be cultured according to methods known in the art.
  • the Lachnospiraceae bacteria e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1
  • Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs described herein can be prepared using any method known in the art.
  • the Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs are prepared without an EV purification step.
  • Lachnospiraceae bacteria comprising the EVs described herein are killed using a method that leaves the disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs intact and the resulting bacterial components, including the EVs, are used in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • the Lachnospiraceae bacteria are killed using an antibiotic (e.g., using an antibiotic described herein).
  • the Lachnospiraceae bacteria are killed using UV irradiation.
  • the EVs described herein are purified from one or more other bacterial components.
  • Methods for purifying EVs from bacteria are known in the art.
  • EVs are prepared from bacterial cultures using methods described in S. Bin Park, et al. PLoS ONE. 6(3):e17629 (2011) or G. Norheim, et al. PLoS ONE. 10(9): e0134353 (2015), each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • the bacteria are cultured to high optical density and then centrifuged to pellet bacteria (e.g., at 10,000 ⁇ g for 30 min at 4° C., at 15,500 ⁇ g for 15 min at 4° C.).
  • the culture supernatants are then passed through filters to exclude intact bacterial cells (e.g., a 0.22 ⁇ m filter).
  • the supernatants are then subjected to tangential flow filtration, during which the supernatant is concentrated, species smaller than 100 kDa are removed, and the media is partially exchanged with PBS.
  • filtered supernatants are centrifuged to pellet bacterial EVs (e.g., at 100,000-150,000 ⁇ g for 1-3 hours at 4° C., at 200,000 ⁇ g for 1-3 hours at 4° C.).
  • the EVs are further purified by resuspending the resulting EV pellets (e.g., in PBS), and applying the resuspended EVs to an Optiprep (iodixanol) gradient or gradient (e.g., a 30-60% discontinuous gradient, a 0-45% discontinuous gradient), followed by centrifugation (e.g., at 200,000 ⁇ g for 4-20 hours at 4° C.).
  • EV bands can be collected, diluted with PBS, and centrifuged to pellet the EVs (e.g., at 150,000 ⁇ g for 3 hours at 4° C., at 200,000 ⁇ g for 1 hour at 4° C.).
  • the purified EVs can be stored, for example, at ⁇ 80° C. or ⁇ 20° C. until use.
  • the EVs are further purified by treatment with DNase and/or proteinase K.
  • cultures of disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria disclosed herein can be centrifuged at 11,000 ⁇ g for 20-40 min at 4° C. to pellet bacteria.
  • Culture supernatants may be passed through a 0.22 ⁇ m filter to exclude intact bacterial cells.
  • Filtered supernatants may then be concentrated using methods that may include, but are not limited to, ammonium sulfate precipitation, ultracentrifugation, or filtration.
  • ammonium sulfate precipitation 1.5-3 M ammonium sulfate can be added to filtered supernatant slowly, while stirring at 4° C. Precipitations can be incubated at 4° C.
  • filtered supernatants can be centrifuged at 100,000-200,000 ⁇ g for 1-16 hours at 4° C.
  • the pellet of this centrifugation contains disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs and other debris such as large protein complexes.
  • a filtration technique such as through the use of an Amicon Ultra spin filter or by tangential flow filtration, supernatants can be filtered so as to retain species of molecular weight >50 or 100 kDa.
  • EVs can be obtained from disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria cultures continuously during growth, or at selected time points during growth, for example, by connecting a bioreactor to an alternating tangential flow (ATF) system (e.g., XCell ATF from Repligen).
  • ATF alternating tangential flow
  • the ATF system retains intact cells (>0.22 um) in the bioreactor, and allows smaller components (e.g., EVs, free proteins) to pass through a filter for collection.
  • the system may be configured so that the ⁇ 0.22 um filtrate is then passed through a second filter of 100 kDa, allowing species such as EVs between 0.22 um and 100 kDa to be collected, and species smaller than 100 kDa to be pumped back into the bioreactor.
  • the system may be configured to allow for medium in the bioreactor to be replenished and/or modified during growth of the culture. EVs collected by this method may be further purified and/or concentrated by ultracentrifugation or filtration as described above for filtered supernatants.
  • EVs obtained by methods provided herein may be further purified by size-based column chromatography, by affinity chromatography, by ion-exchange chromatography, and by gradient ultracentrifugation, using methods that may include, but are not limited to, use of a sucrose gradient or Optiprep gradient. Briefly, using a sucrose gradient method, if ammonium sulfate precipitation or ultracentrifugation were used to concentrate the filtered supernatants, pellets are resuspended in 60% sucrose, 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0. If filtration was used to concentrate the filtered supernatant, the concentrate is buffer exchanged into 60% sucrose, 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0, using an Amicon Ultra column.
  • Samples are applied to a 35-60% discontinuous sucrose gradient and centrifuged at 200,000 ⁇ g for 3-24 hours at 4° C. Briefly, using an Optiprep gradient method, if ammonium sulfate precipitation or ultracentrifugation were used to concentrate the filtered supernatants, pellets are resuspended in PBS and 3 volumes of 60% Optiprep are added to the sample. In some embodiments, if filtration was used to concentrate the filtered supernatant, the concentrate is diluted using 60% Optiprep to a final concentration of 35% Optiprep. Samples are applied to a 0-45% discontinuous Optiprep gradient and centrifuged at 200,000 ⁇ g for 3-24 hours at 4° C., e.g. 4-24 hours at 4° C.
  • EVs are serially diluted onto agar medium used for routine culture of the bacteria being tested, and incubated using routine conditions. Non-sterile preparations are passed through a 0.22 um filter to exclude intact cells. To further increase purity, isolated EVs may be DNase or proteinase K treated.
  • purified EVs are processed as described previously (G. Norheim, et al. PLoS ONE. 10(9): e0134353 (2015)). Briefly, after sucrose gradient centrifugation, bands containing EVs are resuspended to a final concentration of 50 ⁇ g/mL in a solution containing 3% sucrose or other solution suitable for in vivo injection known to one skilled in the art. This solution may also contain adjuvant, for example aluminum hydroxide at a concentration of 0-0.5% (w/v).
  • EVs in PBS are sterile-filtered to ⁇ 0.22 um.
  • samples are buffer exchanged into PBS or 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0 using filtration (e.g. Amicon Ultra columns), dialysis, or ultracentrifugation (200,000 ⁇ g, ⁇ 3 hours, 4° C.) and resuspension.
  • filtration e.g. Amicon Ultra columns
  • dialysis e.g. dialysis
  • ultracentrifugation 200,000 ⁇ g, ⁇ 3 hours, 4° C.
  • the sterility of the EV preparations can be confirmed by plating a portion of the EVs onto agar medium used for standard culture of the bacteria used in the generation of the EVs and incubating using standard conditions.
  • select EVs are isolated and enriched by chromatography and binding surface moieties on EVs.
  • select EVs are isolated and/or enriched by fluorescent cell sorting by methods using affinity reagents, chemical dyes, recombinant proteins or other methods known to one skilled in the art.
  • bacterial compositions comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacteria and/or a product of such bacteria (e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)).
  • the bacteria is a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1.
  • the bacteria is a strain comprising at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the nucleotide sequence of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
  • the bacterial formulation comprises a bacterium and/or a combination of bacteria described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition).
  • At least 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the bacterial composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1. In certain embodiments, substantially all of the bacteria in the bacterial composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
  • the bacterial composition comprises at least 1 ⁇ 10 3 colony forming units (CFUs), 1 ⁇ 10 4 colony forming units (CFUs), 1 ⁇ 10 5 colony forming units (CFUs), 5 ⁇ 10 5 colony forming units (CFUs), 1 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 2 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 3 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 4 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 5 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 6 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 7 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 8 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 9 ⁇ 10 6 colony forming units (CFUs), 1 ⁇ 10 7 colony forming units (CFUs), 2 ⁇ 10 7 colony forming units (CFUs), 3 ⁇ 10 7 colony forming units (CFUs), 4 ⁇ 10 7 colony forming units (CFUs), 5 ⁇ 10 7 colony forming units
  • At least 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the composition are selected from among the bacterial species described herein. 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the composition are selected from among the bacterial strains described herein.
  • compositions described herein may include only one species of bacteria described herein or may include two or more species of the bacteria described herein.
  • 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20 of the species described herein, in any combination, can be included in the compositions provided herein.
  • the bacterial composition comprises a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium.
  • Bacteria may be heat-killed by pasteurization, sterilization, high temperature treatment, spray cooking and/or spray drying (heat treatments can be performed at 500 C, 650 C, 850 C or a variety of other temperatures and/or a varied amount of time).
  • Bacteria may also be killed or inactivated using ⁇ -irradiation (gamma irradiation), exposure to UV light, formalin-inactivation, and/or freezing methods, or a combination thereof.
  • the bacteria may be exposed to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, or 50 kGy of radiation prior to administration.
  • bacteria are killed using gamma irradiation.
  • the bacteria are killed or inactivated using electron irradiation (e.g., beta radiation) or x-ray irradiation.
  • the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using a method that leaves the disease modulating activity of the bacteria intact and the resulting bacterial components are used in the methods and compositions described herein.
  • the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using an antibiotic (e.g., using an antibiotic described herein).
  • the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using UV irradiation.
  • Bacteria may be grown to various growth phases and tested for efficacy at different dilutions and at different points during the growth phase. For example, bacteria may be tested for efficacy following administration at stationary phase (including early or late stationary phase), or at various timepoints during exponential phase. In addition to inactivation by various methods, bacteria may be tested for efficacy using different ratios of live versus inactivated cells, or different ratios of cells at various growth phases.
  • compositions comprising Lachnospiraceae EVs and/or Lachnospiraceae bacteria, provided herein (e.g., an EV composition), such as those disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/578,559, hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • the EV composition comprises an EV and/or a combination of EVs described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions comprise Lachnospiraceae EVs substantially or entirely free of bacteria. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions comprise both Lachnospiraceae EVs and whole Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., live bacteria, killed bacteria, attenuated bacteria). In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions comprise Lachnospiraceae bacteria that is substantially or entirely free of EVs.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises a certain ratio of Lachnospiraceae bacteria particles to Lachnospiraceae EV particles.
  • the number of Lachnospiraceae bacteria particles can be based on actual particle number or (if the bacteria is live) the number of CFUs.
  • the particle number can be established by combining a set number of purified Lachnospiraceae EVs with a set number of purified Lachnospiraceae bacterium, by modifying the growth conditions under which the Lachnospiraceae bacteria are cultured, or by modifying the Lachnospiraceae bacteria itself to produce more or fewer Lachnospiraceae EVs.
  • NTA nanoparticle tracking analysis
  • DLS dynamic light scattering
  • Coulter counting reveals the numbers of particles with diameters of 0.7-10 um.
  • NTA reveals the numbers of particles with diameters of 50-1400 nm.
  • the Coulter counter alone can reveal the number of bacteria in a sample.
  • EVs are 20-250 nm in diameter. NTA will allow us to count the numbers of particles that are 50-250 nm in diameter.
  • DLS reveals the distribution of particles of different diameters within an approximate range of 1 nm-3 um.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises no more than 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises no more than 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8.
  • the Lachnospiraceae EVs in the pharmaceutical composition are purified from one or more other bacterial components.
  • the pharmaceutical composition further comprises other bacterial components.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprise bacteria cells.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for oral or rectal administration.
  • the composition described herein may be a pharmaceutical composition, a dietary supplement, or a food product (e.g., a food or beverage).
  • a food product e.g., a food or beverage.
  • the food product is an animal feed.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for oral administration described herein comprises an additional component that enables efficient delivery of the bacteria to the colon.
  • pharmaceutical preparation that enables the delivery of the bacteria to the colon can be used.
  • examples of such formulations include pH sensitive compositions, such as buffered sachet formulations or enteric polymers that release their contents when the pH becomes alkaline after the enteric polymers pass through the stomach.
  • the pH sensitive composition can be a polymer whose pH threshold of the decomposition of the composition is between about 6.8 and about 7.5.
  • a pharmaceutical composition useful for delivery of the bacteria to the colon is one that ensures the delivery to the colon by delaying the release of the bacteria by approximately 3 to 5 hours, which corresponds to the small intestinal transit time.
  • the pharmaceutical composition for delayed release includes a hydrogel shell. The hydrogel is hydrated and swells upon contact with gastrointestinal fluid, with the result that the contents are effectively released (released predominantly in the colon).
  • Delayed release dosage units include bacteria-containing compositions having a material which coats or selectively coats the bacteria. Examples of such a selective coating material include in vivo degradable polymers, gradually hydrolyzable polymers, gradually water-soluble polymers, and/or enzyme degradable polymers.
  • a wide variety of coating materials for efficiently delaying the release includes, for example, cellulose-based polymers such as hydroxypropyl cellulose, acrylic acid polymers and copolymers such as methacrylic acid polymers and copolymers, and vinyl polymers and copolymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone.
  • composition enabling the delivery to the colon further include bioadhesive compositions which specifically adhere to the colonic mucosal membrane (for example, a polymer described in the specification of U.S. Pat. No. 6,368,586, hereby incorporated by reference) and compositions into which a protease inhibitor is incorporated for protecting particularly a biopharmaceutical preparation in the gastrointestinal tracts from decomposition due to an activity of a protease.
  • bioadhesive compositions which specifically adhere to the colonic mucosal membrane
  • compositions into which a protease inhibitor is incorporated for protecting particularly a biopharmaceutical preparation in the gastrointestinal tracts from decomposition due to an activity of a protease for protecting particularly a biopharmaceutical preparation in the gastrointestinal tracts from decomposition due to an activity of a protease.
  • An example of a system enabling the delivery to the colon is a system of delivering a composition to the colon by pressure change in such a way that the contents are released by utilizing pressure change caused by generation of gas in bacterial fermentation at a distal portion of the stomach.
  • a system is not particularly limited, and a more specific example thereof is a capsule which has contents dispersed in a suppository base and which is coated with a hydrophobic polymer (for example, ethyl cellulose).
  • Another example of the system enabling the delivery to the colon is a system of delivering a composition to the colon, the system being specifically decomposed by an enzyme (for example, a carbohydrate hydrolase or a carbohydrate reductase) present in the colon.
  • an enzyme for example, a carbohydrate hydrolase or a carbohydrate reductase
  • Such a system is not particularly limited, and more specific examples thereof include systems which use food components such as non-starch polysaccharides, amylose, xanthan gum, and azopolymers.
  • Probiotic formulations containing a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 are provided as encapsulated, enteric coated, or powder forms, with doses ranging up to 10 11 cfu (e.g., up to 10 10 cfu).
  • the composition comprises 5 ⁇ 10 11 cfu of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 and 10% (w/w) corn starch in a capsule.
  • the capsule is enteric coated for duodenal release at pH5.5
  • the capsule is enteric coated for duodenal release at pH 5.5.
  • the composition comprises a powder of freeze-dried bacteria of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 which is deemed “Qualified Presumption of Safety” (QPS) status.
  • the composition is stable at frozen or refrigerated temperature.
  • Methods for producing microbial compositions may include three main processing steps. The steps are: organism banking, organism production, and preservation.
  • a sample that contains an abundance of the bacterial strain e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1
  • the strains included in the microbial composition may be (1) isolated directly from a specimen or taken from a banked stock, (2) optionally cultured on a nutrient agar or broth that supports growth to generate viable biomass, and (3) the biomass optionally preserved in multiple aliquots in long-term storage.
  • the agar or broth may contain nutrients that provide essential elements and specific factors that enable growth.
  • An example would be a medium composed of 20 g/L glucose, 10 g/L yeast extract, 10 g/L soy peptone, 2 g/L citric acid, 1.5 g/L sodium phosphate monobasic, 100 mg/L ferric ammonium citrate, 80 mg/L magnesium sulfate, 10 mg/L hemin chloride, 2 mg/L calcium chloride, 1 mg/L menadione.
  • the medium is composed of 10 g/L beef extract, 10 g/L peptone, 5 g/L sodium chloride, 5 g/L dextrose, 3 g/L yeast extract, 3 g/L sodium acetate, 1 g/L soluble starch, and 0.5 g/L L-cysteine HCl, at pH 6.8.
  • 10 g/L beef extract 10 g/L peptone, 5 g/L sodium chloride, 5 g/L dextrose, 3 g/L yeast extract, 3 g/L sodium acetate, 1 g/L soluble starch, and 0.5 g/L L-cysteine HCl, at pH 6.8.
  • a variety of microbiological media and variations are well known in the art (e.g., R. M. Atlas, Handbook of Microbiological Media (2010) CRC Press). Culture media can be added to the culture at the start, may be added during the culture, or may be intermittently/continuously flowed through the culture.
  • the strains in the bacterial composition may be cultivated alone, as a subset of the microbial composition, or as an entire collection comprising the microbial composition.
  • a first strain may be cultivated together with a second strain in a mixed continuous culture, at a dilution rate lower than the maximum growth rate of either cell to prevent the culture from washing out of the cultivation.
  • the inoculated culture is incubated under favorable conditions for a time sufficient to build biomass.
  • microbial compositions for human use this is often at 37° C. temperature, pH, and other parameter with values similar to the normal human niche.
  • the environment may be actively controlled, passively controlled (e.g., via buffers), or allowed to drift.
  • an anoxic/reducing environment may be employed. This can be accomplished by addition of reducing agents such as cysteine to the broth, and/or stripping it of oxygen.
  • a culture of a bacterial composition may be grown at 37° C., pH 7, in the medium above, pre-reduced with 1 g/L cysteine-HCl.
  • the organisms may be placed into a chemical milieu that protects from freezing (adding ‘cryoprotectants’), drying (‘lyoprotectants’), and/or osmotic shock (‘osmoprotectants’), dispensing into multiple (optionally identical) containers to create a uniform bank, and then treating the culture for preservation.
  • Containers are generally impermeable and have closures that assure isolation from the environment. Cryopreservation treatment is accomplished by freezing a liquid at ultra-low temperatures (e.g., at or below ⁇ 80° C.).
  • a microbial composition culture may be harvested by centrifugation to pellet the cells from the culture medium, the supernatant decanted and replaced with fresh culture broth containing 15% glycerol. The culture can then be aliquoted into 1 mL cryotubes, sealed, and placed at ⁇ 80° C. for long-term viability retention. This procedure achieves acceptable viability upon recovery from frozen storage.
  • Microbial production may be conducted using similar culture steps to banking, including medium composition and culture conditions described above. It may be conducted at larger scales of operation, especially for clinical development or commercial production. At larger scales, there may be several subcultivations of the microbial composition prior to the final cultivation. At the end of cultivation, the culture is harvested to enable further formulation into a dosage form for administration. This can involve concentration, removal of undesirable medium components, and/or introduction into a chemical milieu that preserves the microbial composition and renders it acceptable for administration via the chosen route.
  • a microbial composition may be cultivated to a concentration of 10 10 CFU/mL, then concentrated 20-fold by tangential flow microfiltration; the spent medium may be exchanged by diafiltering with a preservative medium consisting of 2% gelatin, 100 mM trehalose, and 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer. The suspension can then be freeze-dried to a powder and titrated.
  • the powder may be blended to an appropriate potency, and mixed with other cultures and/or a filler such as microcrystalline cellulose for consistency and ease of handling, and the bacterial composition formulated as provided herein.
  • a filler such as microcrystalline cellulose for consistency and ease of handling, and the bacterial composition formulated as provided herein.
  • bacterial compositions for administration subjects are provided.
  • the bacterial compositions are combined with additional active and/or inactive materials in order to produce a final product, which may be in single dosage unit or in a multi-dose format.
  • the composition comprises at least one carbohydrate.
  • a “carbohydrate” refers to a sugar or polymer of sugars.
  • saccharide polysaccharide
  • carbohydrate oligosaccharide
  • Most carbohydrates are aldehydes or ketones with many hydroxyl groups, usually one on each carbon atom of the molecule.
  • Carbohydrates generally have the molecular formula C n H 2n O n .
  • a carbohydrate may be a monosaccharide, a disaccharide, trisaccharide, oligosaccharide, or polysaccharide.
  • the most basic carbohydrate is a monosaccharide, such as glucose, sucrose, galactose, mannose, ribose, arabinose, xylose, and fructose.
  • Disaccharides are two joined monosaccharides. Exemplary disaccharides include sucrose, maltose, cellobiose, and lactose.
  • an oligosaccharide includes between three and six monosaccharide units (e.g., raffinose, stachyose), and polysaccharides include six or more monosaccharide units.
  • Exemplary polysaccharides include starch, glycogen, and cellulose.
  • Carbohydrates may contain modified saccharide units such as 2′-deoxyribose wherein a hydroxyl group is removed, 2′-fluororibose wherein a hydroxyl group is replaced with a fluorine, or N-acetylglucosamine, a nitrogen-containing form of glucose (e.g., 2′-fluororibose, deoxyribose, and hexose).
  • Carbohydrates may exist in many different forms, for example, conformers, cyclic forms, acyclic forms, stereoisomers, tautomers, anomers, and isomers.
  • the composition comprises at least one lipid.
  • a “lipid” includes fats, oils, triglycerides, cholesterol, phospholipids, fatty acids in any form including free fatty acids. Fats, oils and fatty acids can be saturated, unsaturated (cis or trans) or partially unsaturated (cis or trans).
  • the lipid comprises at least one fatty acid selected from lauric acid (12:0), myristic acid (14:0), palmitic acid (16:0), palmitoleic acid (16:1), margaric acid (17:0), heptadecenoic acid (17:1), stearic acid (18:0), oleic acid (18:1), linoleic acid (18:2), linolenic acid (18:3), octadecatetraenoic acid (18:4), arachidic acid (20:0), eicosenoic acid (20:1), eicosadienoic acid (20:2), eicosatetraenoic acid (20:4), eicosapentaenoic acid (20:5) (EPA), docosanoic acid (22:0), docosenoic acid (22:1), docosapentaenoic acid (22:5), docosahexaenoic acid (22:6) (DHA), and t
  • the composition comprises at least one supplemental mineral or mineral source.
  • supplemental mineral or mineral source examples include, without limitation: chloride, sodium, calcium, iron, chromium, copper, iodine, zinc, magnesium, manganese, molybdenum, phosphorus, potassium, and selenium.
  • Suitable forms of any of the foregoing minerals include soluble mineral salts, slightly soluble mineral salts, insoluble mineral salts, chelated minerals, mineral complexes, non-reactive minerals such as carbonyl minerals, and reduced minerals, and combinations thereof.
  • the composition comprises at least one supplemental vitamin.
  • the at least one vitamin can be fat-soluble or water soluble vitamins.
  • Suitable vitamins include but are not limited to vitamin C, vitamin A, vitamin E, vitamin B12, vitamin K, riboflavin, niacin, vitamin D, vitamin B6, folic acid, pyridoxine, thiamine, pantothenic acid, and biotin.
  • Suitable forms of any of the foregoing are salts of the vitamin, derivatives of the vitamin, compounds having the same or similar activity of the vitamin, and metabolites of the vitamin.
  • the composition comprises an excipient.
  • suitable excipients include a buffering agent, a preservative, a stabilizer, a binder, a compaction agent, a lubricant, a dispersion enhancer, a disintegration agent, a flavoring agent, a sweetener, and a coloring agent.
  • the excipient is a buffering agent.
  • suitable buffering agents include sodium citrate, magnesium carbonate, magnesium bicarbonate, calcium carbonate, and calcium bicarbonate.
  • the excipient comprises a preservative.
  • suitable preservatives include antioxidants, such as alpha-tocopherol and ascorbate, and antimicrobials, such as parabens, chlorobutanol, and phenol.
  • the composition comprises a binder as an excipient.
  • suitable binders include starches, pregelatinized starches, gelatin, polyvinylpyrolidone, cellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose, polyacrylamides, polyvinyloxoazolidone, polyvinylalcohols, C 12 -C 18 fatty acid alcohol, polyethylene glycol, polyols, saccharides, oligosaccharides, and combinations thereof.
  • the composition comprises a lubricant as an excipient.
  • suitable lubricants include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, zinc stearate, hydrogenated vegetable oils, sterotex, polyoxyethylene monostearate, talc, polyethyleneglycol, sodium benzoate, sodium lauryl sulfate, magnesium lauryl sulfate, and light mineral oil.
  • the composition comprises a dispersion enhancer as an excipient.
  • suitable dispersants include starch, alginic acid, polyvinylpyrrolidones, guar gum, kaolin, bentonite, purified wood cellulose, sodium starch glycolate, isoamorphous silicate, and microcrystalline cellulose as high HLB emulsifier surfactants.
  • the composition comprises a disintegrant as an excipient.
  • the disintegrant is a non-effervescent disintegrant.
  • suitable non-effervescent disintegrants include starches such as corn starch, potato starch, pregelatinized and modified starches thereof, sweeteners, clays, such as bentonite, micro-crystalline cellulose, alginates, sodium starch glycolate, gums such as agar, guar, locust bean, karaya, pectin, and tragacanth.
  • the disintegrant is an effervescent disintegrant.
  • suitable effervescent disintegrants include sodium bicarbonate in combination with citric acid, and sodium bicarbonate in combination with tartaric acid.
  • the bacterial formulation comprises an enteric coating or micro encapsulation.
  • the enteric coating or micro encapsulation improves targeting to a desired region of the gastrointestinal tract.
  • the bacterial composition comprises an enteric coating and/or microcapsules that dissolves at a pH associated with a particular region of the gastrointestinal tract.
  • the enteric coating and/or microcapsules dissolve at a pH of about 5.5-6.2 to release in the duodenum, at a pH value of about 7.2-7.5 to release in the ileum, and/or at a pH value of about 5.6-6.2 to release in the colon.
  • Exemplary enteric coatings and microcapsules are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2016/0022592, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • the composition is a food product (e.g., a food or beverage) such as a health food or beverage, a food or beverage for infants, a food or beverage for pregnant women, athletes, senior citizens or other specified group, a functional food, a beverage, a food or beverage for specified health use, a dietary supplement, a food or beverage for patients, or an animal feed.
  • a food product e.g., a food or beverage
  • a food or beverage such as a health food or beverage, a food or beverage for infants, a food or beverage for pregnant women, athletes, senior citizens or other specified group, a functional food, a beverage, a food or beverage for specified health use, a dietary supplement, a food or beverage for patients, or an animal feed.
  • the foods and beverages include various beverages such as juices, refreshing beverages, tea beverages, drink preparations, jelly beverages, and functional beverages; alcoholic beverages such as beers; carbohydrate-containing foods such as rice food products, noodles, breads, and pastas; paste products such as fish hams, sausages, paste products of seafood; retort pouch products such as curries, food dressed with a thick starchy sauces, and Chinese soups; soups; dairy products such as milk, dairy beverages, ice creams, cheeses, and yogurts; fermented products such as fermented soybean pastes, yogurts, fermented beverages, and pickles; bean products; various confectionery products, including biscuits, cookies, and the like, candies, chewing gums, gummies, cold desserts including jellies, cream caramels, and frozen desserts; instant foods such as instant soups and instant soy-bean soups; microwavable foods; and the like. Further, the examples also include health foods and beverages prepared in the forms of powders, granules, tablets, carb
  • the bacteria disclosed herein are administered in conjunction with a prebiotic to the subject.
  • Prebiotics are carbohydrates which are generally indigestible by a host animal and are selectively fermented or metabolized by bacteria.
  • Prebiotics may be short-chain carbohydrates (e.g., oligosaccharides) and/or simple sugars (e.g., mono- and di-saccharides) and/or mucins (heavily glycosylated proteins) that alter the composition or metabolism of a microbiome in the host.
  • the short chain carbohydrates are also referred to as oligosaccharides, and usually contain from 2 or 3 and up to 8, 9, 10, 15 or more sugar moieties.
  • a prebiotic composition can selectively stimulate the growth and/or activity of one of a limited number of bacteria in a host.
  • Prebiotics include oligosaccharides such as fructooligosaccharides (FOS) (including inulin), galactooligosaccharides (GOS), trans-galactooligosaccharides, xylooligosaccharides (XOS), chitooligosaccharides (COS), soy oligosaccharides (e.g., stachyose and raffinose) gentiooligosaccharides, isomaltooligosaccharides, mannooligosaccharides, maltooligosaccharides and mannanoligosaccharides.
  • FOS fructooligosaccharides
  • XOS galactooligosaccharides
  • COS chitooligosaccharides
  • soy oligosaccharides e.g., stachyos
  • Oligosaccharides are not necessarily single components, and can be mixtures containing oligosaccharides with different degrees of oligomerization, sometimes including the parent disaccharide and the monomeric sugars.
  • Various types of oligosaccharides are found as natural components in many common foods, including fruits, vegetables, milk, and honey.
  • Specific examples of oligosaccharides are lactulose, lactosucrose, palatinose, glycosyl sucrose, guar gum, gum Arabic, tagalose, amylose, amylopectin, pectin, xylan, and cyclodextrins.
  • Prebiotics may also be purified or chemically or enzymatically synthesized.
  • PhABs described herein can be prepared using any method known in the art.
  • the PhABs described herein are prepared by fractionation.
  • Bacterial cells and/or supernatants from cultured bacteria cells are fractionated into various pharmacologically active biomass (PhABs) and/or products derived therefrom.
  • Bacterial cells and/or supernatants are fractionated using materials and methods known in the art (see e.g. Sandrini et al. Fractionation by ultracentrifugation of gram negative cytoplasmic and membrane proteins. 2014. Bio-Protocol. 4(21); Scholler et al. Protoplast and cytoplasmic membrane preparations from Streptococcus sanguis and Streptococcus mutans. 1983. J Gen Micro.
  • PhABs obtained by methods provided herein may be further purified by size based column chromatography, by affinity chromatography, and by gradient ultracentrifugation, using methods that may include, but are not limited to, use of a sucrose gradient or Optiprep gradient. Briefly, using a sucrose gradient method, if ammonium sulfate precipitation or ultracentrifugation were used to concentrate the filtered supernatants, pellets are resuspended in 60% sucrose, 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0. If filtration was used to concentrate the filtered supernatant, the concentrate is buffer exchanged into 60% sucrose, 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0, using an Amicon Ultra column.
  • Samples are applied to a 35-60% discontinuous sucrose gradient and centrifuged at 200,000 ⁇ g for 3-24 hours at 4° C. Briefly, using an Optiprep gradient method, if ammonium sulfate precipitation or ultracentrifugation were used to concentrate the filtered supernatants, pellets are resuspended in 35% Optiprep in PBS. In some embodiments, if filtration was used to concentrate the filtered supernatant, the concentrate is diluted using 60% Optiprep to a final concentration of 35% Optiprep. Samples are applied to a 35-60% discontinuous sucrose gradient and centrifuged at 200,000 ⁇ g for 3-24 hours at 4° C.
  • PhABs are serially diluted onto agar medium used for routine culture of the bacteria being tested, and incubated using routine conditions. Non-sterile preparations are passed through a 0.22 um filter to exclude intact cells. To further increase purity, isolated PhABs may be DNase or proteinase K treated.
  • PhABs used for in vivo injections purified PhABs are processed as described previously (G. Norheim, et al. PLoS ONE. 10(9): e0134353 (2015)). Briefly, after sucrose gradient centrifugation, bands containing PhABs are resuspended to a final concentration of 50 ⁇ g/mL in a solution containing 3% sucrose or other solution suitable for in vivo injection known to one skilled in the art. This solution may also contain adjuvant, for example aluminum hydroxide at a concentration of 0-0.5% (w/v).
  • adjuvant for example aluminum hydroxide at a concentration of 0-0.5% (w/v).
  • samples are buffer exchanged into PBS or 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0 using filtration (e.g. Amicon Ultra columns), dialysis, or ultracentrifugation (200,000 ⁇ g, ⁇ 3 hours, 4° C.) and resuspension.
  • filtration e.g. Amicon Ultra columns
  • dialysis e.g. dialysis
  • ultracentrifugation 200,000 ⁇ g, ⁇ 3 hours, 4° C.
  • the sterility of the PhAB preparations can be confirmed by plating a portion of the PhABs onto agar medium used for standard culture of the bacteria used in the generation of the PhABs and incubating using standard conditions.
  • select PhABs are isolated and enriched by chromatography and binding surface moieties on PhABs.
  • select PhABs are isolated and/or enriched by fluorescent cell sorting by methods using affinity reagents, chemical dyes, recombinant proteins or other methods known to one skilled in the art.
  • provided herein is a method of delivering a bacterium and/or a bacterial composition described herein to a subject.
  • the bacteria are administered in conjunction with the administration of an additional therapeutic.
  • the bacteria is co-formulated in a pharmaceutical composition with the additional therapeutic.
  • the bacteria is co-administered with the additional therapeutic.
  • the additional therapeutic is administered to the subject before administration of the bacteria (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 or 55 minutes before, about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23 hours before, or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14 days before).
  • the bacteria e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 or 55 minutes before, about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23 hours before, or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14 days before.
  • the additional therapeutic is administered to the subject after administration of the bacteria (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 or 55 minutes after, about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23 hours after, or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14 days after).
  • the same mode of delivery is used to deliver both the bacteria and the additional therapeutic.
  • different modes of delivery are used to administer the bacteria and the additional therapeutic.
  • the bacteria is administered orally while the additional therapeutic is administered via injection (e.g., an intravenous, intramuscular and/or intratumoral injection).
  • the pharmaceutical compositions, dosage forms, and kits described herein can be administered in conjunction with any other conventional anti-immune disorder treatment. These treatments may be applied as necessary and/or as indicated and may occur before, concurrent with or after administration of the pharmaceutical compositions, dosage forms, and kits described herein.
  • the dosage regimen can be any of a variety of methods and amounts, and can be determined by one skilled in the art according to known clinical factors. As is known in the medical arts, dosages for any one patient can depend on many factors, including the subject's species, size, body surface area, age, sex, immunocompetence, and general health, the particular microorganism to be administered, duration and route of administration, the kind and stage of the disease, for example, tumor size, and other compounds such as drugs being administered concurrently. In addition to the above factors, such levels can be affected by the infectivity of the microorganism, and the nature of the microorganism, as can be determined by one skilled in the art.
  • appropriate minimum dosage levels of microorganisms can be levels sufficient for the microorganism to survive, grow and replicate.
  • the methods of treatment described herein may be suitable for the treatment of an immune disorder (e.g., an autoimmune disease, an inflammatory disease, an allergy).
  • the dose of the pharmaceutical compositions described herein may be appropriately set or adjusted in accordance with the dosage form, the route of administration, the degree or stage of a target disease, and the like.
  • the general effective dose of the agents may range between 0.01 mg/kg body weight/day and 1000 mg/kg body weight/day, between 0.1 mg/kg body weight/day and 1000 mg/kg body weight/day, 0.5 mg/kg body weight/day and 500 mg/kg body weight/day, 1 mg/kg body weight/day and 100 mg/kg body weight/day, or between 5 mg/kg body weight/day and 50 mg/kg body weight/day.
  • the effective dose may be 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 500, or 1000 mg/kg body weight/day or more, but the dose is not limited thereto.
  • the dose administered to a subject is sufficient to prevent the immune disorder, delay its onset, or slow or stop its progression or prevent a relapse of the immune disorder.
  • dosage will depend upon a variety of factors including the strength of the particular compound employed, as well as the age, species, condition, and body weight of the subject.
  • the size of the dose will also be determined by the route, timing, and frequency of administration as well as the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects that might accompany the administration of a particular compound and the desired physiological effect.
  • Suitable doses and dosage regimens can be determined by conventional range-finding techniques known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Generally, treatment is initiated with smaller dosages, which are less than the optimum dose of the compound. Thereafter, the dosage is increased by small increments until the optimum effect under the circumstances is reached.
  • An effective dosage and treatment protocol can be determined by routine and conventional means, starting e.g., with a low dose in laboratory animals and then increasing the dosage while monitoring the effects, and systematically varying the dosage regimen as well. Animal studies are commonly used to determine the maximal tolerable dose (“MTD”) of bioactive agent per kilogram weight. Those skilled in the art regularly extrapolate doses for efficacy, while avoiding toxicity, in other species, including humans.
  • MTD maximal tolerable dose
  • the dosages of the active agents used in accordance with the invention vary depending on the active agent, the age, weight, and clinical condition of the recipient patient, and the experience and judgment of the clinician or practitioner administering therapy, among other factors affecting the selected dosage.
  • the dose should be sufficient to result in slowing, and preferably regressing, the advancement of an immune disorder.
  • Separate administrations can include any number of two or more administrations (e.g., doses), including two, three, four, five or six administrations.
  • One skilled in the art can readily determine the number of administrations to perform, or the desirability of performing one or more additional administrations, according to methods known in the art for monitoring therapeutic methods and other monitoring methods provided herein.
  • the doses may be separated by at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days or 1, 2, 3, or 4 weeks.
  • the methods provided herein include methods of providing to the subject one or more administrations of a bacterium, where the number of administrations can be determined by monitoring the subject, and, based on the results of the monitoring, determining whether or not to provide one or more additional administrations.
  • Deciding on whether or not to provide one or more additional administrations can be based on a variety of monitoring results, including, but not limited to, indication of tumor growth or inhibition of tumor growth, appearance of new metastases or inhibition of metastasis, the subject's anti-bacterium antibody titer, the subject's anti-tumor antibody titer, the overall health of the subject and/or the weight of the subject.
  • the time period between administrations can be any of a variety of time periods.
  • the time period between administrations can be a function of any of a variety of factors, including monitoring steps, as described in relation to the number of administrations, the time period for a subject to mount an immune response and/or the time period for a subject to clear the bacteria from normal tissue.
  • the time period can be a function of the time period for a subject to mount an immune response; for example, the time period can be more than the time period for a subject to mount an immune response, such as more than about one week, more than about ten days, more than about two weeks, or more than about a month; in another example, the time period can be less than the time period for a subject to mount an immune response, such as less than about one week, less than about ten days, less than about two weeks, or less than about a month.
  • the time period can be a function of the time period for a subject to clear the bacteria from normal tissue; for example, the time period can be more than the time period for a subject to clear the bacteria from normal tissue, such as more than about a day, more than about two days, more than about three days, more than about five days, or more than about a week.
  • the delivery of an immune disorder therapeutic in combination with the bacteria described herein reduces the adverse effects and/or improves the efficacy of the immune disorder therapeutic.
  • the effective dose of an immune disorder therapeutic described herein is the amount of therapeutic agent that is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, with the least toxicity to the patient.
  • the effective dosage level can be identified using the methods described herein and will depend upon a variety of pharmacokinetic factors including the activity of the particular compositions administered, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular compound being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compositions employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • an effective dose of an immune disorder therapy will be the amount of therapeutic agent, which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above.
  • the toxicity of an immune disorder therapy is the level of adverse effects experienced by the subject during and following treatment.
  • Adverse events associated with immune disorder therapy toxicity include, but are not limited to, abdominal pain, acid indigestion, acid reflux, allergic reactions, alopecia, anaphylaxis, anemia, anxiety, lack of appetite, arthralgias, asthenia, ataxia, azotemia, loss of balance, bone pain, bleeding, blood clots, low blood pressure, elevated blood pressure, difficulty breathing, bronchitis, bruising, low white blood cell count, low red blood cell count, low platelet count, cardiotoxicity, cystitis, hemorrhagic cystitis, arrhythmias, heart valve disease, cardiomyopathy, coronary artery disease, cataracts, central neurotoxicity, cognitive impairment, confusion, conjunctivitis, constipation, coughing, cramping, cystitis, deep vein thrombosis, dehydration, depression, diarrhea, dizziness, dry mouth, dry skin, dyspepsia
  • the administration of the bacterial composition treats the immune disorder.
  • the methods provided herein include the administration to a subject of a bacterium and/or a bacterial composition described herein (e.g., a bacterial composition comprising a bacterial strain listed in Table 1) either alone or in combination with another therapeutic.
  • a bacterial composition described herein e.g., a bacterial composition comprising a bacterial strain listed in Table 1
  • the bacterial composition and the other therapy can be administered to the subject in any order.
  • the bacterial composition and the other therapy are administered conjointly.
  • the bacterium is administered to the subject before the additional therapeutic is administered (e.g., at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 hours before or at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days before).
  • the bacterium is administered to the subject after the additional therapeutic is administered (e.g., at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 hours after or at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days after).
  • the bacterium and the additional therapeutic are administered to the subject simultaneously or nearly simultaneously (e.g., administrations occur within an hour of each other).
  • the subject is administered an antibiotic before the bacterium is administered to the subject (e.g., at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 hours before or at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days before).
  • the subject is administered an antibiotic after the bacterium is administered to the subject (e.g., at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 hours before or at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days after).
  • the bacterium and the antibiotic are administered to the subject simultaneously or nearly simultaneously (e.g., administrations occur within an hour of each other).
  • the subject may undergo surgery.
  • Types of surgery include but are not limited to preventative, diagnostic or staging, curative and palliative surgery.
  • the additional therapeutic is an antibiotic.
  • antibiotics broadly refers to compounds capable of inhibiting or preventing a bacterial infection. Antibiotics can be classified in a number of ways, including their use for specific infections, their mechanism of action, their bioavailability, or their spectrum of target microbe (e.g., Gram-negative vs. Gram-positive bacteria, aerobic vs.
  • antibiotics can be used to selectively target bacteria of a specific niche.
  • antibiotics known to treat a particular infection that includes an immune disorder niche may be used to target immune-disorder-associated microbes, including immune-disorder-associated bacteria in that niche.
  • antibiotics are administered after the bacterial treatment.
  • antibiotics are administered after the bacterial treatment to remove the engraftment.
  • antibiotics can be selected based on their bactericidal or bacteriostatic properties.
  • Bactericidal antibiotics include mechanisms of action that disrupt the cell wall (e.g., ⁇ -lactams), the cell membrane (e.g., daptomycin), or bacterial DNA (e.g., fluoroquinolones).
  • Bacteriostatic agents inhibit bacterial replication and include sulfonamides, tetracyclines, and macrolides, and act by inhibiting protein synthesis.
  • some drugs can be bactericidal in certain organisms and bacteriostatic in others, knowing the target organism allows one skilled in the art to select an antibiotic with the appropriate properties.
  • bacteriostatic antibiotics inhibit the activity of bactericidal antibiotics.
  • bactericidal and bacteriostatic antibiotics are not combined.
  • Antibiotics include, but are not limited to aminoglycosides, ansamycins, carbacephems, carbapenems, cephalosporins, glycopeptides, lincosamides, lipopeptides, macrolides, monobactams, nitrofurans, oxazolidonones, penicillins, polypeptide antibiotics, quinolones, fluoroquinolone, sulfonamides, tetracyclines, and anti-mycobacterial compounds, and combinations thereof.
  • Aminoglycosides include, but are not limited to Amikacin, Gentamicin, Kanamycin, Neomycin, Netilmicin, Tobramycin, Paromomycin, and Spectinomycin.
  • Aminoglycosides are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria, such as Escherichia coli, Klebsiella, Pseudomonas aeruginosa , and Francisella tularensis , and against certain aerobic bacteria but less effective against obligate/facultative anaerobes Aminoglycosides are believed to bind to the bacterial 30S or 50S ribosomal subunit thereby inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis.
  • Ansamycins include, but are not limited to, Geldanamycin, Herbimycin, Rifamycin, and Streptovaricin.
  • Geldanamycin and Herbimycin are believed to inhibit or alter the function of Heat Shock Protein 90.
  • Carbacephems include, but are not limited to, Loracarbef. Carbacephems are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis.
  • Carbapenems include, but are not limited to, Ertapenem, Doripenem, Imipenem/Cilastatin, and Meropenem. Carbapenems are bactericidal for both Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria as broad-spectrum antibiotics. Carbapenems are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis.
  • Cephalosporins include, but are not limited to, Cefadroxil, Cefazolin, Cefalotin, Cefalothin, Cefalexin, Cefaclor, Cefamandole, Cefoxitin, Cefprozil, Cefuroxime, Cefixime, Cefdinir, Cefditoren, Cefoperazone, Cefotaxime, Cefpodoxime, Ceftazidime, Ceftibuten, Ceftizoxime, Ceftriaxone, Cefepime, Ceftaroline fosamil, and Ceftobiprole.
  • Cephalosporins are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria and against Gram-positive bacteria, including Pseudomonas , certain Cephalosporins are effective against methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA). Cephalosporins are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis by disrupting synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • MRSA methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus
  • Glycopeptides include, but are not limited to, Teicoplanin, Vancomycin, and Telavancin. Glycopeptides are effective, e.g., against aerobic and anaerobic Gram-positive bacteria including MRSA and Clostridium difficile . Glycopeptides are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis by disrupting synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • Lincosamides include, but are not limited to, Clindamycin and Lincomycin. Lincosamides are effective, e.g., against anaerobic bacteria, as well as Staphylococcus , and Streptococcus . Lincosamides are believed to bind to the bacterial 50S ribosomal subunit thereby inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis.
  • Lipopeptides include, but are not limited to, Daptomycin. Lipopeptides are effective, e.g., against Gram-positive bacteria. Lipopeptides are believed to bind to the bacterial membrane and cause rapid depolarization.
  • Macrolides include, but are not limited to, Azithromycin, Clarithromycin, Dirithromycin, Erythromycin, Roxithromycin, Troleandomycin, Telithromycin, and Spiramycin. Macrolides are effective, e.g., against Streptococcus and Mycoplasma . Macrolides are believed to bind to the bacterial or 50S ribosomal subunit, thereby inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis.
  • Monobactams include, but are not limited to, Aztreonam. Monobactams are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria. Monobactams are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis by disrupting synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • Nitrofurans include, but are not limited to, Furazolidone and Nitrofurantoin.
  • Oxazolidonones include, but are not limited to, Linezolid, Posizolid, Radezolid, and Torezolid. Oxazolidonones are believed to be protein synthesis inhibitors.
  • Penicillins include, but are not limited to, Amoxicillin, Ampicillin, Azlocillin, Carbenicillin, Cloxacillin, Dicloxacillin, Flucloxacillin, Mezlocillin, Methicillin, Nafcillin, Oxacillin, Penicillin G, Penicillin V, Piperacillin, Temocillin and Ticarcillin.
  • Penicillins are effective, e.g., against Gram-positive bacteria, facultative anaerobes, e.g., Streptococcus, Borrelia , and Treponema . Penicillins are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis by disrupting synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • Penicillin combinations include, but are not limited to, Amoxicillin/clavulanate, Ampicillin/sulbactam, Piperacillin/tazobactam, and Ticarcillin/clavulanate.
  • Polypeptide antibiotics include, but are not limited to, Bacitracin, Colistin, and Polymyxin B and E.
  • Polypeptide Antibiotics are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria. Certain polypeptide antibiotics are believed to inhibit isoprenyl pyrophosphate involved in synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls, while others destabilize the bacterial outer membrane by displacing bacterial counter-ions.
  • Quinolones and Fluoroquinolone include, but are not limited to, Ciprofloxacin, Enoxacin, Gatifloxacin, Gemifloxacin, Levofloxacin, Lomefloxacin, Moxifloxacin, Nalidixic acid, Norfloxacin, Ofloxacin, Trovafloxacin, Grepafloxacin, Sparfloxacin, and Temafloxacin.
  • Quinolones/Fluoroquinolone are effective, e.g., against Streptococcus and Neisseria .
  • Quinolones/Fluoroquinolone are believed to inhibit the bacterial DNA gyrase or topoisomerase IV, thereby inhibiting DNA replication and transcription.
  • Sulfonamides include, but are not limited to, Mafenide, Sulfacetamide, Sulfadiazine, Silver sulfadiazine, Sulfadimethoxine, Sulfamethizole, Sulfamethoxazole, Sulfanilimide, Sulfasalazine, Sulfisoxazole, Trimethoprim-Sulfamethoxazole (Co-trimoxazole), and Sulfonamidochrysoidine.
  • Sulfonamides are believed to inhibit folate synthesis by competitive inhibition of dihydropteroate synthetase, thereby inhibiting nucleic acid synthesis.
  • Tetracyclines include, but are not limited to, Demeclocycline, Doxycycline, Minocycline, Oxytetracycline, and Tetracycline. Tetracyclines are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria. Tetracyclines are believed to bind to the bacterial 30S ribosomal subunit thereby inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis.
  • Anti-mycobacterial compounds include, but are not limited to, Clofazimine, Dapsone, Capreomycin, Cycloserine, Ethambutol, Ethionamide, Isoniazid, Pyrazinamide, Rifampicin, Rifabutin, Rifapentine, and Streptomycin.
  • Suitable antibiotics also include arsphenamine, chloramphenicol, fosfomycin, fusidic acid, metronidazole, mupirocin, platensimycin, quinupristin/dalfopristin, tigecycline, tinidazole, trimethoprim amoxicillin/clavulanate, ampicillin/sulbactam, amphomycin ristocetin, azithromycin, bacitracin, buforin II, carbomycin, cecropin Pl, clarithromycin, erythromycins, furazolidone, fusidic acid, Na fusidate, gramicidin, imipenem, indolicidin, josamycin, magainan II, metronidazole, nitroimidazoles, mikamycin, mutacin B-Ny266, mutacin B-JH1 140, mutacin J-T8, nisin, nisin A, novobiocin, oleandomycin,
  • the additional therapeutic is an immunosuppressive agent, a DMARD, a pain-control drug, a steroid, a non-steroidal antiinflammatory drug (NSAID), or a cytokine antagonist, and combinations thereof.
  • Representative agents include, but are not limited to, cyclosporin, retinoids, corticosteroids, propionic acid derivative, acetic acid derivative, enolic acid derivatives, fenamic acid derivatives, Cox-2 inhibitors, lumiracoxib, ibuprophen, cholin magnesium salicylate, fenoprofen, salsalate, difunisal, tolmetin, ketoprofen, flurbiprofen, oxaprozin, indomethacin, sulindac, etodolac, ketorolac, nabumetone, naproxen, valdecoxib, etoricoxib, MK0966; rofecoxib, acetominophen, Cele
  • the agent is an immunosuppressive agent.
  • immunosuppressive agents include, but are not limited to, corticosteroids, mesalazine, mesalamine, sulfasalazine, sulfasalazine derivatives, immunosuppressive drugs, cyclosporin A, mercaptopurine, azathiopurine, prednisone, methotrexate, antihistamines, glucocorticoids, epinephrine, theophylline, cromolyn sodium, anti-leukotrienes, anti-cholinergic drugs for rhinitis, TLR antagonists, inflammasome inhibitors, anti-cholinergic decongestants, mast-cell stabilizers, monoclonal anti-IgE antibodies, vaccines (e.g., vaccines used for vaccination where the amount of an allergen is gradually increased), cytokine inhibitors, such as anti-IL-6 antibodies, TNF inhibitors such as inf
  • the immune disorder therapy comprises administering a therapeutic bacteria and/or a therapeutic combination of bacteria to the subject so a healthy microbiome can be reconstituted in the subject.
  • therapeutic bacteria is a non-immune-disorder-associated bacteria.
  • therapeutic bacteria is a probiotic bacteria.
  • the additional therapeutic is a cancer therapeutic.
  • the cancer therapeutic is a chemotherapeutic agent.
  • chemotherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, alkylating agents such as thiotepa and cyclosphosphamide; alkyl sulfonates such as busulfan, improsulfan and piposulfan; aziridines such as benzodopa, carboquone, meturedopa, and uredopa; ethylenimines and methylamelamines including altretamine, triethylenemelamine, trietylenephosphoramide, triethiylenethiophosphoramide and trimethylolomelamine; acetogenins (especially bullatacin and bullatacinone); a camptothecin (including the synthetic analogue topotecan); bryostatin; callystatin; CC-1065 (including its adozelesin, carzelesin and
  • the cancer therapeutic is a cancer immunotherapy agent
  • Immunotherapy refers to a treatment that uses a subject's immune system to treat cancer, e.g., checkpoint inhibitors, cancer vaccines, cytokines, cell therapy, CAR-T cells, and dendritic cell therapy.
  • checkpoint inhibitors include Nivolumab (BMS, anti-PD-1), Pembrolizumab (Merck, anti-PD-1), Ipilimumab (BMS, anti-CTLA-4), MEDI4736 (AstraZeneca, anti-PD-L1), and MPDL3280A (Roche, anti-PD-L1).
  • Other immunotherapies may be tumor vaccines, such as Gardail, Cervarix, BCG, sipulencel-T, Gp100:209-217, AGS-003, DCVax-L, Algenpantucel-L, Tergenpantucel-L, TG4010, ProstAtak, Prostvac-V/R-TRICOM, Rindopepimul, E75 peptide acetate, IMA901, POL-103A, Belagenpumatucel-L, GSK1572932A, MDX-1279, GV1001, and Tecemotide.
  • tumor vaccines such as Gardail, Cervarix, BCG, sipulencel-T, Gp100:209-217, AGS-003, DCVax-L, Algenpantucel-L, Tergenpantucel-L, TG4010, ProstAtak, Prostvac-V/R-TRICOM, Rindopepimul, E75 peptide
  • Immunotherapy may be administered via injection (e.g., intravenously, intratumorally, subcutaneously, or into lymph nodes), but may also be administered orally, topically, or via aerosol Immunotherapies may comprise adjuvants such as cytokines.
  • the immunotherapy agent is an immune checkpoint inhibitor
  • Immune checkpoint inhibition broadly refers to inhibiting the checkpoints that cancer cells can produce to prevent or downregulate an immune response.
  • immune checkpoint proteins include, but are not limited to, CTLA4, PD-1, PD-L1, PD-L2, A2AR, B7-H3, B7-H4, BTLA, KIR, LAG3, TIM-3 or VISTA
  • Immune checkpoint inhibitors can be antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof that bind to and inhibit an immune checkpoint protein.
  • immune checkpoint inhibitors include, but are not limited to, nivolumab, pembrolizumab, pidilizumab, AMP-224, AMP-514, STI-A1110, TSR-042, RG-7446, BMS-936559, MEDI-4736, MSB-0020718C, AUR-012 and STI-A1010.
  • the immunotherapy agent is an antibody or antigen binding fragment thereof that, for example, binds to a cancer-associated antigen.
  • cancer-associated antigens include, but are not limited to, adipophilin, AIM-2, ALDH1A1, alpha-actinin-4, alpha-fetoprotein (“AFP”), ARTC1, B-RAF, BAGE-1, BCLX (L), BCR-ABL fusion protein b3a2, beta-catenin, BING-4, CA-125, CALCA, carcinoembryonic antigen (“CEA”), CASP-5, CASP-8, CD274, CD45, Cdc27, CDK12, CDK4, CDKN2A, CEA, CLPP, COA-1, CPSF, CSNK1A1, CTAG1, CTAG2, cyclin D1, Cyclin-AL dek-can fusion protein, DKK1, EFTUD2, Elongation factor 2, ENAH (hMena), Ep-CAM, EpCAM, EphA3, epit
  • AFP
  • the immunotherapy agent is a cancer vaccine and/or a component of a cancer vaccine (e.g., an antigenic peptide and/or protein).
  • the cancer vaccine can be a protein vaccine, a nucleic acid vaccine or a combination thereof.
  • the cancer vaccine comprises a polypeptide comprising an epitope of a cancer-associated antigen.
  • the cancer vaccine comprises a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA, such as mRNA) that encodes an epitope of a cancer-associated antigen.
  • cancer-associated antigens include, but are not limited to, adipophilin, AIM-2, ALDH1A1, alpha-actinin-4, alpha-fetoprotein (“AFP”), ARTC1, B-RAF, BAGE-1, BCLX (L), BCR-ABL fusion protein b3a2, beta-catenin, BING-4, CA-125, CALCA, carcinoembryonic antigen (“CEA”), CASP-5, CASP-8, CD274, CD45, Cdc27, CDK12, CDK4, CDKN2A, CEA, CLPP, COA-1, CPSF, CSNK1A1, CTAG1, CTAG2, cyclin D1, Cyclin-A1, dek-can fusion protein, DKK1, EFTUD2, Elongation factor 2, ENAH (hMena), Ep-CAM, EpCAM, EphA3, epithelial tumor antigen (“ETA”), ETV6-AML1 fusion protein, EZH2, FGFS, FLT3-ITD
  • the antigen is a neo-antigen.
  • the cancer vaccine is administered with an adjuvant.
  • adjuvants include, but are not limited to, an immune modulatory protein, Adjuvant 65, ⁇ -GalCer, aluminum phosphate, aluminum hydroxide, calcium phosphate, ⁇ -Glucan Peptide, CpG ODN DNA, GPI-0100, lipid A, lipopolysaccharide, Lipovant, Montanide, N-acetyl-muramyl-L-alanyl-D-isoglutamine, Pam3CSK4, quil A, cholera toxin (CT) and heat-labile toxin from enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli (LT) including derivatives of these (CTB, mmCT, CTA1-DD, LTB, LTK63, LTR72, dmLT) and trehalose dimycolate.
  • CTB cholera toxin
  • LT heat-labile toxin from entero
  • the immunotherapy agent is an immune modulating protein to the subject.
  • the immune modulatory protein is a cytokine or chemokine.
  • immune modulating proteins include, but are not limited to, B lymphocyte chemoattractant (“BLC”), C-C motif chemokine 11 (“Eotaxin-1”), Eosinophil chemotactic protein 2 (“Eotaxin-2”), Granulocyte colony-stimulating factor (“G-CSF”), Granulocyte macrophage colony-stimulating factor (“GM-CSF”), 1-309, Intercellular Adhesion Molecule 1 (“ICAM-1”), Interferon alpha (“IFN-alpha”), Interferon beta (“IFN-beta”) Interferon gamma (“IFN-gamma”), Interlukin-1 alpha (“IL-1 alpha”), Interlukin-1 beta (“IL-1 beta”), Interleukin 1 receptor antagonist (“IL-1 ra”), Interleukin-2 (“IL-2”)
  • BLC B lymphocyte
  • the cancer therapeutic agent is an anti-cancer compound.
  • anti-cancer compounds include, but are not limited to, Alemtuzumab (Campath®), Alitretinoin (Panretin®), Anastrozole (Arimidex®), Bevacizumab (Avastin®), Bexarotene (Targretin®), Bortezomib (Velcade®), Bosutinib (Bosulif®), Brentuximab vedotin (Adcetris®), Cabozantinib (CometrigTM) Carfilzomib (KyprolisTM), Cetuximab (Erbitux®), Crizotinib (Xalkori®), Dasatinib (Sprycel®), Denileukin diftitox (Ontak®), Erlotinib hydrochloride (Tarceva®), Everolimus (Afinitor®), Exemestane (A
  • anti-cancer compounds that modify the function of proteins that regulate gene expression and other cellular functions (e.g., HDAC inhibitors, retinoid receptor ligants) are Vorinostat (Zolinza®), Bexarotene (Targretin®) and Romidepsin (Istodax®), Alitretinoin (Panretin®), and Tretinoin (Vesanoid®).
  • anti-cancer compounds that induce apoptosis are Bortezomib (Velcade®), Carfilzomib (KyprolisTM), and Pralatrexate (Folotyn®).
  • anti-cancer compounds that increase anti-tumor immune response are Rituximab (Rituxan®), Alemtuzumab (Campath®), Ofatumumab (Arzerra®), and Ipilimumab (YervoyTM).
  • anti-cancer compounds that deliver toxic agents to cancer cells are Tositumomab and 131I-tositumomab (Bexxar®) and Ibritumomab tiuxetan (Zevalin®), Denileukin diftitox (Ontak®), and Brentuximab vedotin (Adcetris®).
  • exemplary anti-cancer compounds are small molecule inhibitors and conjugates thereof of, e.g., Janus kinase, ALK, Bcl-2, PARP, PI3K, VEGF receptor, Braf, MEK, CDK, and HSP90.
  • platinum-based anti-cancer compounds include, for example, cisplatin, carboplatin, oxaliplatin, satraplatin, picoplatin, Nedaplatin, Triplatin, and Lipoplatin.
  • Other metal-based drugs suitable for treatment include, but are not limited to ruthenium-based compounds, ferrocene derivatives, titanium-based compounds, and gallium-based compounds.
  • the cancer therapeutic is a radioactive moiety that comprises a radionuclide.
  • radionuclides include, but are not limited to Cr-51, Cs-131, Ce-134, Se-75, Ru-97, I-125, Eu-149, Os-189m, Sb-119, 1-123, Ho-161, Sb-117, Ce-139, In-111, Rh-103m, Ga-67, Tl-201, Pd-103, Au-195, Hg-197, Sr-87m, Pt-191, P-33, Er-169, Ru-103, Yb-169, Au-199, Sn-121, Tm-167, Yb-175, In-113m, Sn-113, Lu-177, Rh-105, Sn-117m, Cu-67, Sc-47, Pt-195m, Ce-141, 1-131, Tb-161, As-77, Pt-197, Sm-153, Gd-159, Tm-173, Pr-143, Au-198, Tm
  • the cancer therapeutic is an antibiotic.
  • antibiotics broadly refers to compounds capable of inhibiting or preventing a bacterial infection. Antibiotics can be classified in a number of ways, including their use for specific infections, their mechanism of action, their bioavailability, or their spectrum of target microbe (e.g., Gram-negative vs. Gram-positive bacteria, aerobic vs. anaerobic bacteria, etc.) and these may be used to kill specific bacteria in specific areas of the host (“niches”) (Leekha, et al 2011.
  • antibiotics can be used to selectively target bacteria of a specific niche.
  • antibiotics known to treat a particular infection that includes a cancer niche may be used to target cancer-associated microbes, including cancer-associated bacteria in that niche.
  • antibiotics are administered after the bacterial treatment.
  • antibiotics are administered after the bacterial treatment to remove the engraftment.
  • the methods and compositions described herein relate to the treatment or prevention of a disease or disorder associated with a pathological immune response, such as an autoimmune disease, an allergic reaction and/or an inflammatory disease.
  • the disease or disorder is an inflammatory bowel disease (e.g., Crohn's disease or ulcerative colitis).
  • the methods and compositions described herein relate to the treatment or prevention of delayed-type hypersensitivity, autoimmune myocarditis, granulomas, peripheral neuropathies, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, inflammation of the colon, colitis, microscopic colitis, collagenous colitis, diversion colitis, chemical colitis, ischemic colitis, indeterminate colitis, atypical colitis.
  • a “subject in need thereof” includes any subject that has a disease or disorder associated with a pathological immune response (e.g., an inflammatory bowel disease), as well as any subject with an increased likelihood of acquiring a such a disease or disorder.
  • a pathological immune response e.g., an inflammatory bowel disease
  • compositions described herein can be used, for example, as a pharmaceutical composition for preventing or treating (reducing, partially or completely, the adverse effects of) an autoimmune disease, such as chronic inflammatory bowel disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, psoriasis, muckle-wells syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, or Hashimoto's disease; an allergic disease, such as a food allergy, pollenosis, or asthma; an infectious disease, such as an infection with Clostridium difficile ; an inflammatory disease such as a TNF-mediated inflammatory disease (e.g., an inflammatory disease of the gastrointestinal tract, such as pouchitis, a cardiovascular inflammatory condition, such as atherosclerosis, or an inflammatory lung disease, such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease); a pharmaceutical composition for suppressing rejection in organ transplantation or other situations in which tissue rejection might occur; a supplement, food, or beverage for improving immune functions; or a reagent for suppressing the proliferation or function of
  • the methods provided herein are useful for the treatment of inflammation.
  • the inflammation of any tissue and organs of the body including musculoskeletal inflammation, vascular inflammation, neural inflammation, digestive system inflammation, ocular inflammation, inflammation of the reproductive system, and other inflammation, as discussed below.
  • Immune disorders of the musculoskeletal system include, but are not limited, to those conditions affecting skeletal joints, including joints of the hand, wrist, elbow, shoulder, jaw, spine, neck, hip, knew, ankle, and foot, and conditions affecting tissues connecting muscles to bones such as tendons.
  • immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, arthritis (including, for example, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, acute and chronic infectious arthritis, arthritis associated with gout and pseudogout, and juvenile idiopathic arthritis), tendonitis, synovitis, tenosynovitis, bursitis, fibrositis (fibromyalgia), epicondylitis, myositis, and osteitis (including, for example, Paget's disease, osteitis pubis, and osteitis fibrosa cystic).
  • arthritis including, for example, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, acute and chronic infectious arthritis, arthritis associated with gout and pseudogout, and juvenile idiopathic arthritis
  • tendonitis synovitis, ten
  • Ocular immune disorders refers to an immune disorder that affects any structure of the eye, including the eye lids.
  • ocular immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, blepharitis, blepharochalasis, conjunctivitis, dacryoadenitis, keratitis, keratoconjunctivitis sicca (dry eye), scleritis, trichiasis, and uveitis
  • Examples of nervous system immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, encephalitis, Guillain-Barre syndrome, meningitis, neuromyotonia, narcolepsy, multiple sclerosis, myelitis and schizophrenia.
  • inflammation of the vasculature or lymphatic system which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, arthrosclerosis, arthritis, phlebitis, vasculitis, and lymphangitis
  • Examples of digestive system immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, cholangitis, cholecystitis, enteritis, enterocolitis, gastritis, gastroenteritis, inflammatory bowel disease, ileitis, and proctitis.
  • Inflammatory bowel diseases include, for example, certain art-recognized forms of a group of related conditions.
  • Crohn's disease regional bowel disease, e.g., inactive and active forms
  • ulcerative colitis e.g., inactive and active forms
  • the inflammatory bowel disease encompasses irritable bowel syndrome, microscopic colitis, lymphocytic-plasmocytic enteritis, coeliac disease, collagenous colitis, lymphocytic colitis and eosinophilic enterocolitis.
  • Other less common forms of IBD include indeterminate colitis, pseudomembranous colitis (necrotizing colitis), ischemic inflammatory bowel disease, Behcet's disease, sarcoidosis, scleroderma, IBD-associated dysplasia, dysplasia associated masses or lesions, and primary sclerosing cholangitis.
  • reproductive system immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, cervicitis, chorioamnionitis, endometritis, epididymitis, omphalitis, oophoritis, orchitis, salpingitis, tubo-ovarian abscess, urethritis, vaginitis, vulvitis, and vulvodynia.
  • autoimmune conditions having an inflammatory component.
  • Such conditions include, but are not limited to, acute disseminated alopecia universalise, Behcet's disease, Chagas' disease, chronic fatigue syndrome, dysautonomia, encephalomyelitis, ankylosing spondylitis, aplastic anemia, hidradenitis suppurativa, autoimmune hepatitis, autoimmune oophoritis, celiac disease, Crohn's disease, diabetes mellitus type 1, giant cell arteritis, goodpasture's syndrome, Grave's disease, Guillain-Barre syndrome, Hashimoto's disease, Henoch-Schonlein purpura, Kawasaki's disease, lupus erythematosus, microscopic colitis, microscopic polyarteritis, mixed connective tissue disease, Muckle-Wells syndrome, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, opsoclonus myo
  • T-cell mediated hypersensitivity diseases having an inflammatory component.
  • Such conditions include, but are not limited to, contact hypersensitivity, contact dermatitis (including that due to poison ivy), uticaria, skin allergies, respiratory allergies (hay fever, allergic rhinitis, house dustmite allergy) and gluten-sensitive enteropathy (Celiac disease).
  • immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions include, for example, appendicitis, dermatitis, dermatomyositis, endocarditis, fibrositis, gingivitis, glossitis, hepatitis, hidradenitis suppurativa, ulceris, laryngitis, mastitis, myocarditis, nephritis, otitis, pancreatitis, parotitis, percarditis, peritonoitis, pharyngitis, pleuritis, pneumonitis, prostatistis, pyelonephritis, and stomatisi, transplant rejection (involving organs such as kidney, liver, heart, lung, pancreas (e.g., islet cells), bone marrow, cornea, small bowel, skin allografts, skin homografts, and heart valve xengrafts, sewrum sickness, and graft vs host disease),
  • Preferred treatments include treatment of transplant rejection, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, multiple sclerosis, Type 1 diabetes, asthma, inflammatory bowel disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, psoriasis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and inflammation accompanying infectious conditions (e.g., sepsis).
  • the methods and compositions described herein relate to the treatment of cancer.
  • any cancer can be treated using the methods described herein.
  • cancers that may treated by methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, cancer cells from the bladder, blood, bone, bone marrow, brain, breast, colon, esophagus, gastrointestine, gum, head, kidney, liver, lung, nasopharynx, neck, ovary, prostate, skin, stomach, testis, tongue, or uterus.
  • the cancer may specifically be of the following histological type, though it is not limited to these: neoplasm, malignant; carcinoma; carcinoma, undifferentiated; giant and spindle cell carcinoma; small cell carcinoma; papillary carcinoma; squamous cell carcinoma; lymphoepithelial carcinoma; basal cell carcinoma; pilomatrix carcinoma; transitional cell carcinoma; papillary transitional cell carcinoma; adenocarcinoma; gastrinoma, malignant; cholangiocarcinoma; hepatocellular carcinoma; combined hepatocellular carcinoma and cholangiocarcinoma; trabecular adenocarcinoma; adenoid cystic carcinoma; adenocarcinoma in adenomatous polyp; adenocarcinoma, familial polyposis coli ; solid carcinoma; carcinoid tumor, malignant; branchiolo-alveolar adenocarcinoma; papillary adenocarcinoma; chromophobe carcinoma;
  • the methods and compositions provided herein relate to the treatment of a leukemia.
  • leukemia is meant broadly progressive, malignant diseases of the hematopoietic organs/systems and is generally characterized by a distorted proliferation and development of leukocytes and their precursors in the blood and bone marrow.
  • Non-limiting examples of leukemia diseases include, acute nonlymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, acute granulocytic leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, adult T-cell leukemia, aleukemic leukemia, a leukocythemic leukemia, basophilic leukemia, blast cell leukemia, bovine leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia, leukemia cutis, embryonal leukemia, eosinophilic leukemia, Gross' leukemia, Rieder cell leukemia, Schilling's leukemia, stem cell leukemia, subleukemic leukemia, undifferentiated cell leukemia, hairy-cell leukemia, hemoblastic leukemia, hemocytoblastic leukemia, histiocytic leukemia, stem cell leukemia, acute monocytic leukemia, leukopenic leukemia, lymphatic leuk
  • the methods and compositions provided herein relate to the treatment of a carcinoma.
  • carcinoma refers to a malignant growth made up of epithelial cells tending to infiltrate the surrounding tissues, and/or resist physiological and non-physiological cell death signals and gives rise to metastases.
  • Non-limiting exemplary types of carcinomas include, acinar carcinoma, acinous carcinoma, adenocystic carcinoma, adenoid cystic carcinoma, carcinoma adenomatosum, carcinoma of adrenal cortex, alveolar carcinoma, alveolar cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, carcinoma basocellulare, basaloid carcinoma, basosquamous cell carcinoma, bronchioalveolar carcinoma, bronchiolar carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, cerebriform carcinoma, cholangiocellular carcinoma, chorionic carcinoma, colloid carcinoma, comedo carcinoma, corpus carcinoma, cribriform carcinoma, carcinoma en cuirasse, carcinoma cutaneum , cylindrical carcinoma, cylindrical cell carcinoma, duct carcinoma, carcinoma durum, embryonal carcinoma, encephaloid carcinoma, epiennoid carcinoma, carcinoma epitheliale adenoides, exophytic carcinoma, carcinoma ex ulcere, carcinoma fibrosum, gelatiniform carcinoma, gelatinous carcinoma, giant cell carcinoma, signet-ring cell carcinoma, carcinoma simplex, small-cell carcinoma, solanoid carcinoma
  • the methods and compositions provided herein relate to the treatment of a sarcoma.
  • sarcoma generally refers to a tumor which is made up of a substance like the embryonic connective tissue and is generally composed of closely packed cells embedded in a fibrillar, heterogeneous, or homogeneous substance.
  • Sarcomas include, but are not limited to, chondrosarcoma, fibrosarcoma, lymphosarcoma, melanosarcoma, myxosarcoma, osteosarcoma, endometrial sarcoma, stromal sarcoma, Ewing's sarcoma, fascial sarcoma, fibroblastic sarcoma, giant cell sarcoma, Abemethy's sarcoma, adipose sarcoma, liposarcoma, alveolar soft part sarcoma, ameloblastic sarcoma, botryoid sarcoma, chloroma sarcoma, chorio carcinoma, embryonal sarcoma, Wilms' tumor sarcoma, granulocytic sarcoma, Hodgkin's sarcoma, idiopathic multiple pigmented hemorrhagic sar
  • Additional exemplary neoplasias that can be treated using the methods and compositions described herein include Hodgkin's Disease, Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma, multiple myeloma, neuroblastoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, lung cancer, rhabdomyosarcoma, primary thrombocytosis, primary macroglobulinemia, small-cell lung tumors, primary brain tumors, stomach cancer, colon cancer, malignant pancreatic insulanoma, malignant carcinoid, premalignant skin lesions, testicular cancer, lymphomas, thyroid cancer, neuroblastoma, esophageal cancer, genitourinary tract cancer, malignant hypercalcemia, cervical cancer, endometrial cancer, and adrenal cortical cancer.
  • the cancer treated is a melanoma.
  • melanoma is taken to mean a tumor arising from the melanocytic system of the skin and other organs.
  • melanomas are Harding-Passey melanoma, juvenile melanoma, lentigo maligna melanoma, malignant melanoma, acral-lentiginous melanoma, amelanotic melanoma, benign juvenile melanoma, Cloudman's melanoma, S91 melanoma, nodular melanoma subungal melanoma, and superficial spreading melanoma.
  • tumors that can be treated using methods and compositions described herein include lymphoproliferative disorders, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, cervical cancer, endometrial cancer, bone cancer, liver cancer, stomach cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, cancer of the thyroid, head and neck cancer, cancer of the central nervous system, cancer of the peripheral nervous system, skin cancer, kidney cancer, as well as metastases of all the above.
  • tumors include hepatocellular carcinoma, hepatoma, hepatoblastoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, esophageal carcinoma, thyroid carcinoma, ganglioblastoma, fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, Ewing's tumor, leimyosarcoma, rhabdotheliosarcoma, invasive ductal carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinoma, melanoma, pulmonary squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma (well differentiated, moderately differentiated, poorly differentiated or undifferentiated), bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hypernephroma, hypernephroid adenocarcinoma, bile duct carcinoma,
  • Cancers treated in certain embodiments also include precancerous lesions, e.g., actinic keratosis (solar keratosis), moles (dysplastic nevi), acitinic chelitis (farmer's lip), cutaneous horns, Barrett's esophagus, atrophic gastritis, dyskeratosis congenita, sideropenic dysphagia, lichen planus, oral submucous fibrosis, actinic (solar) elastosis and cervical dysplasia.
  • precancerous lesions e.g., actinic keratosis (solar keratosis), moles (dysplastic nevi), acitinic chelitis (farmer's lip), cutaneous horns, Barrett's esophagus, atrophic gastritis, dyskeratosis congenita, sideropenic dysphagia, lichen
  • Cancers treated in some embodiments include non-cancerous or benign tumors, e.g., of endodermal, ectodermal or mesenchymal origin, including, but not limited to cholangioma, colonic polyp, adenoma, papilloma, cystadenoma, liver cell adenoma, hydatidiform mole, renal tubular adenoma, squamous cell papilloma, gastric polyp, hemangioma, osteoma, chondroma, lipoma, fibroma, lymphangioma, leiomyoma, rhabdomyoma, astrocytoma, nevus, meningioma, and ganglioneuroma.
  • non-cancerous or benign tumors e.g., of endodermal, ectodermal or mesenchymal origin, including, but not limited to cholangioma, colonic
  • Example 1 Immune Modulation of Human Commensal Bacteria in a KLH-Based Delayed Type Hypersensitivity Model
  • Delayed-type hypersensitivity is an animal model of atopic dermatitis (or allergic contact dermatitis), as reviewed by Petersen et al. (In vivo pharmacological disease models for psoriasis and atopic dermatitis in drug discovery. Basic & Clinical Pharm & Toxicology. 2006. 99(2): 104-115; see also Irving C. Allen (ed.) Mouse Models of Innate Immunity: Methods and Protocols, Methods in Molecular Biology, 2013. vol. 1031, DOI 10.1007/978-1-62703-481-4_13).
  • DTH can be induced in a variety of mouse and rat strains using various haptens or antigens, for example an antigen emulsified with an adjuvant.
  • DTH is characterized by sensitization as well as an antigen-specific T cell-mediated reaction that results in erythema, edema, and cellular infiltration—especially infiltration of antigen presenting cells (APCs), eosinophils, activated CD4+ T cells, and cytokine-expressing Th2 cells.
  • APCs antigen presenting cells
  • eosinophils activated CD4+ T cells
  • cytokine-expressing Th2 cells cytokine-expressing Th2 cells.
  • the test formulations were prepared for KLH-based delayed type hypersensitivity model.
  • the delayed-type hypersensitivity (DTH) model provides an in vivo mechanism to study the cell-mediated immune response, and resulting inflammation, following exposure to a specific antigen to which the mice have been sensitized.
  • DTH delayed-type hypersensitivity
  • Several variations of the DTH model have been used and are well known in the art (Irving C. Allen (ed.). Mouse Models of Innate Immunity: Methods and Protocols , Methods in Molecular Biology. Vol. 1031, DOI 10.1007/978-1-62703-481-4_13, Springer Science+Business Media, LLC 2013).
  • KLH Keyhole Limpet Hemocyanin
  • CFA Complete Freund's Adjuvant
  • mice On day 0, C57Bl/6J female mice, approximately 7 weeks old, were primed with KLH antigen in CFA by subcutaneous immunization (4 sites, 50 ⁇ L per site).
  • Dexamethasone a corticosteroid
  • Dexamethasone a corticosteroid
  • Dexamethasone a corticosteroid
  • a positive control for suppressing inflammation in this model Taube and Carlsten, Action of dexamethasone in the suppression of delayed-type hypersensitivity in reconstituted SCID mice. Inflamm Res. 2000. 49(10): 548-512.
  • a stock solution of 17 mg/mL of Dexamethasone was prepared on by diluting 6.8 mg Dexamethasone in 400 ⁇ L 96% ethanol.
  • a working solution is prepared by diluting the stock solution 100 ⁇ in sterile PBS to obtain a final concentration of 0.17 mg/mL in a septum vial for intraperitoneal dosing.
  • Dexamethasone-treated mice received 100 ⁇ L Dexamethasone i.p. (5 mL/kg of a 0.17 mg/mL solution). Frozen sucrose served as the negative control (vehicle). Bacteria are dosed at 100 ul of bacterial cells at 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ circumflex over ( ) ⁇ 10 CFU/ml p.o. daily. Dexamethasone (positive control), vehicle (negative control), and bacteria of the bacterial strain were dosed daily.
  • mice are challenged intradermally (i.d.) with 10 ⁇ g KLH in saline (in a volume of 10 ⁇ L) in the right ear and a control in the left ear. Inflammatory response are measured using methods known in the art. Ear pinna thickness was measured at 48 hours following antigen challenge.
  • the efficacy of the bacteria may be studied further using varied timing and varied doses. For instance, treatment with bacteria of a strain of table containing bacterial composition may be initiated at some point, either around the time of priming or around the time of DTH challenge. For example, bacteria (1 ⁇ 10 9 CFU per mouse per day) may be administered at the same time as the subcutaneous injections (day 0), or they may be administered prior to, or upon, intradermal injection.
  • the bacterial composition is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with a bacterial composition at a range of between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse. While some mice receive the bacteria through i.v.
  • mice may receive the bacteria through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, topical administration, intradermal (i.d.) injection, or other means of administration.
  • Some mice may receive the bacteria every day (e.g. starting on day 0), while others may receive the bacteria at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days).
  • Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strains listed in table 1.
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened.
  • the bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1) administrated.
  • the bacterial strain e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, i.d. injection, topical administration, or nasal route administration.
  • mice may be treated with anti-inflammatory agent(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • anti-inflammatory agent(s) e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment
  • an appropriate control e.g. vehicle or control antibody
  • mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment.
  • antibiotics for example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment.
  • Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • Study animals may be sacrificed by exsanguination from the orbital plexus under CO 2 /O 2 anesthesia, followed by cervical dislocation on day 10.
  • the blood samples are allowed to clot before centrifuging.
  • the sera are transferred into clean tubes, each animal in a separate tube.
  • both ears each ear in a separate vial
  • the spleen the mesenteric lymph nodes (MLN)
  • the entire small intestine and the colon are collected in cryovials, snap frozen and stored at ⁇ 70° C.
  • Tissues may be dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80).
  • serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • Example 2 An Evaluation of Test Articles in the Modulation of DSS-Induced Colitis in C57BL/6 Mice
  • Dextran sulfate sodium (DSS)-induced colitis is a well-studied animal model of colitis, as reviewed by Randhawa et al. (A review on chemical-induced inflammatory bowel disease models in rodents. Korean J Physiol Pharmacol. 2014. 18(4): 279-288; see also Chassaing et al. Dextran sulfate sodium (DSS)-induced colitis in mice. Curr Protoc Immunol. 2014 Feb. 4; 104: Unit 15.25). In this model, mice are treated with DSS in drinking water, resulting in diarrhea and weight loss.
  • mice were treated with DSS to induce colitis as known in the art (Randhawa et al. 2014; Chassaing et al. 2014; see also Kim et al. Investigating intestinal inflammation in DSS-induced model of IBD. J Vis Exp. 2012. 60: 3678).
  • colitis was induced in mice by exposure to 3% DSS-treated drinking water from Day 0 to Day 5.
  • One group did not receive DSS and served as naive controls. Animals were dosed with sucrose vehicle (negative control), bacterial strain (1 ⁇ 10 9 CFU per mouse per day), or anti-p40 positive control (administered i.p. on days 0, 3, 7, and 10). All animals were weighed daily.
  • treatment with a bacterial strain may be initiated at some point, either on day 1 of DSS administration, or sometime thereafter.
  • the bacterial strain A may be administered at the same time as DSS initiation (day 1), or they may be administered upon the first signs of disease (e.g. weight loss or diarrhea), or during the stages of severe colitis. Mice may be observed daily for weight, morbidity, survival, presence of diarrhea and/or bloody stool.
  • the bacterial strain is administered at varied doses, varied intervals, and/or varied routes of administration.
  • some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a dose of between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse.
  • other mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration.
  • Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain.
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened.
  • the bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions may be tested for their efficacy in a mouse model of DSS-induced colitis, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory agents.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration.
  • mice may be treated with additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment
  • an appropriate control e.g. vehicle or control antibody
  • mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment.
  • antibiotics for example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment.
  • Some mice receive DSS without receiving antibiotics beforehand.
  • mice undergo video endoscopy using a small animal endoscope (Karl Storz Endoskipe, Germany) under isoflurane anesthesia. Still images and video are recorded to evaluate the extent of colitis and the response to treatment. Colitis is scored using criteria known in the art. Fecal material is collected for study.
  • GI gastrointestinal
  • lymph nodes and/or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art.
  • tissues are harvested and may be dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art.
  • Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80).
  • serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+GI tract-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • mice In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be rechallenged with a disease trigger. Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to colitis severity following rechallenge.
  • the colon, small intestine, spleen, and mesenteric lymph nodes may be collected from all animals, and blood collected for analysis.
  • EAE is a well-studied animal model of multiple sclerosis, as reviewed by Constantinescu et al. (Experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE) as a model for multiple sclerosis (MS). Br J Pharmacol. 2011 October; 164(4): 1079-1106). It can be induced in a variety of mouse and rat strains using different myelin-associated peptides, by the adoptive transfer of activated encephalitogenic T cells, or the use of TCR transgenic mice susceptible to EAE, as discussed in Mangalam et al. (Two discreet subsets of CD8+ T cells modulate PLP 91-110 induced experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis in HLA-DR3 transgenic mice. J Autoimmun 2012 June; 38(4): 344-353).
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in the rodent model of EAE, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory treatments.
  • female 6-8 week old C57Bl/6 mice are obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.).
  • mice are administered two subcutaneous (s.c.) injections at two sites on the back (upper and lower) of 0.1 ml myelin oligodentrocyte glycoprotein 35-55 (MOG35-55; 100 ug per injection; 200 ug per mouse (total 0.2 ml per mouse)), emulsified in Complete Freund's Adjuvant (CFA; 2-5 mg killed Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra/ml emulsion). Approximately 1-2 hours after the above, mice are intraperitoneally (i.p.) injected with 200 ng Pertussis toxin (PTx) in 0.1 ml PBS (2 ug/ml). An additional IP injection of PTx is administered on day 2.
  • PTx Pertussis toxin
  • an appropriate amount of an alternative myelin peptide (e.g. proteolipid protein (PLP)) is used to induce EAE.
  • PLP proteolipid protein
  • Some animals serve as na ⁇ ve controls. EAE severity is assessed and a disability score is assigned daily beginning on day 4 according to methods known in the art (Mangalam et al. 2012).
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain-containing bacterial composition is initiated at some point, either around the time of immunization or following EAE immunization.
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial composition may be administered at the same time as immunization (day 1), or they may be administered upon the first signs of disability (e.g. limp tail), or during severe EAE.
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are administered at varied doses and at defined intervals.
  • some mice are intravenously injected with effective doses of the bacterial strain.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v.
  • mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain.
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened.
  • the bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, or nasal route administration.
  • mice may be treated with additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) or EAE therapeutic(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, Vitamin D, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various time points and at effective doses.
  • additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) or EAE therapeutic(s) e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, Vitamin D, or other treatment
  • an appropriate control e.g. vehicle or control antibody
  • mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment.
  • antibiotics for example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment.
  • Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • mice are sacrificed and sites of inflammation (e.g. brain and spinal cord), lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art.
  • tissues are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80).
  • serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ central nervous system (CNS)-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • CNS central nervous system
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • mice may be rechallenged with a disease trigger (e.g. activated encephalitogenic T cells or re-injection of EAE-inducing peptides). Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to disease and EAE severity following rechallenge.
  • a disease trigger e.g. activated encephalitogenic T cells or re-injection of EAE-inducing peptides.
  • Collagen-induced arthritis is an animal model commonly used to study rheumatoid arthritis (RA), as described by Caplazi et al. (Mouse models of rheumatoid arthritis. Veterinary Pathology. Sep. 1, 2015. 52(5): 819-826) (see also Brand et al. Collagen-induced arthritis. Nature Protocols. 2007. 2: 1269-1275; Pietrosimone et al. Collagen-induced arthritis: a model for murine autoimmune arthritis. Bio Protoc. 2015 Oct. 20; 5(20): e1626).
  • one model involves immunizing HLA-DQ8 Tg mice with chick type II collagen as described by Tanej a et al. (J. Immunology. 2007. 56: 69-78; see also Taneja et al. J. Immunology 2008. 181: 2869-2877; and Taneja et al. Arthritis Rheum., 2007. 56: 69-78). Purification of chick CII has been described by Taneja et al. (Arthritis Rheum., 2007. 56: 69-78). Mice are monitored for CIA disease onset and progression following immunization, and severity of disease is evaluated and “graded” as described by Wooley, J. Exp. Med. 1981. 154: 688-700.
  • mice are immunized for CIA induction and separated into various treatment groups.
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in CIA, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory treatments.
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain-containing bacterial composition is initiated either around the time of immunization with collagen or post-immunization.
  • the bacterial strain may be administered at the same time as immunization (day 1), or the bacterial strain may be administered upon first signs of disease, or upon the onset of severe symptoms.
  • the bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals.
  • mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a dose of between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other groups of mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, intradermal (i.d.) injection, or nasal route administration.
  • mice may be treated with additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) or CIA therapeutic(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, Vitamin D, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various time points and at effective doses.
  • additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) or CIA therapeutic(s) e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, Vitamin D, or other treatment
  • an appropriate control e.g. vehicle or control antibody
  • mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment.
  • antibiotics for example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment.
  • Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • mice are sacrificed and sites of inflammation (e.g. synovium), lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art.
  • the synovium and synovial fluid are analyzed for plasma cell infiltration and the presence of antibodies using techniques known in the art.
  • tissues are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions to examine the profiles of the cellular infiltrates.
  • Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art.
  • Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80).
  • serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ synovium-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • mice may be rechallenged with a disease trigger (e.g. activated re-injection with CIA-inducing peptides). Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to disease and CIA severity following rechallenge.
  • a disease trigger e.g. activated re-injection with CIA-inducing peptides.
  • T1D A Mouse Model of Type 1 Diabetes
  • Type 1 diabetes is an autoimmune disease in which the immune system targets the islets of Langerhans of the pancreas, thereby destroying the body's ability to produce insulin.
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in a mouse model of T1D, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory treatments.
  • treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either around the time of induction or following induction, or prior to the onset (or upon the onset) of spontaneously-occurring T1D.
  • the bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a dose of between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, or 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v.
  • mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day, while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain.
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened.
  • the bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration.
  • mice may be treated with additional treatments and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • an appropriate control e.g. vehicle or control antibody
  • mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment.
  • antibiotics for example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment.
  • Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • Blood glucose is monitored biweekly prior to the start of the experiment. At various timepoints thereafter, nonfasting blood glucose is measured. At various timepoints, mice are sacrificed and site the pancreas, lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art. For example, tissues are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art. Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80).
  • serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified tissue-infiltrating immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression. Antibody production may also be assessed by ELISA.
  • mice may be rechallenged with a disease trigger, or assessed for susceptibility to relapse. Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to diabetes onset and severity following rechallenge (or spontaneously-occurring relapse).
  • PSC Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis
  • IBD inflammatory bowel disease
  • PSC primary sclerosing cholangitis
  • DDC 3,5-diethoxycarbonyl-1,4-dihydrocollidine
  • bile duct ligation is performed as described by Georgiev et al. (Characterization of time-related changes after experimental bile duct ligation. Br J Surg. 2008. 95(5): 646-56), or disease is induced by DCC exposure as described by Fickert et al. (A new xenobiotic-induced mouse model of sclerosing cholangitis and biliary fibrosis. Am J Path. Vol 171(2): 525-536.
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in a mouse model of PSC, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of some other therapeutic agent.
  • mice 6-8 week old C57b1/6 mice are obtained from Taconic or other vendor. Mice are fed a 0.1% DCC-supplemented diet for various durations. Some groups receive DCC-supplement food for 1 week, others for 4 weeks, others for 8 weeks. Some groups of mice may receive a DCC-supplemented diet for a length of time and then be allowed to recover, thereafter receiving a normal diet. These mice may be studied for their ability to recover from disease and/or their susceptibility to relapse upon subsequent exposure to DCC. Treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either around the time of DCC-feeding or subsequent to initial exposure to DCC. For example, the bacterial strain may be administered on day 1, or they may be administered sometime thereafter.
  • the bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a range between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through i.p. injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain.
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened.
  • the bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen), and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • some groups of mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with additional agents and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment.
  • antibiotics for example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment.
  • Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • serum samples are analyzed for ALT, AP, bilirubin, and serum bile acid (BA) levels.
  • mice are sacrificed, body and liver weight are recorded, and sites of inflammation (e.g. liver, small and large intestine, spleen), lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histolomorphological characterization, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art (see Fickert et al. Characterization of animal models for primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC)). J Hepatol. 2014. 60(6): 1290-1303). For example, bile ducts are stained for expression of ICAM-1, VCAM-1, MadCAM-1. Some tissues are stained for histological examination, while others are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • sites of inflammation e.g. liver, small and large intestine, spleen
  • lymph nodes e.g. liver, small and large intestine, spleen
  • Other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histolomorphological characterization, cytokine and/or
  • Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80), as well as adhesion molecule expression (ICAM-1, VCAM-1, MadCAM-1).
  • T cell markers CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4
  • macrophage/myeloid markers CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80
  • IAM-1 adhesion molecule expression
  • VCAM-1 MadCAM-1
  • serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ bile duct-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • Liver tissue is prepared for histological analysis, for example, using Sirius-red staining followed by quantification of the fibrotic area.
  • blood is collected for plasma analysis of liver enzymes, for example, AST or ALT, and to determine Bilirubin levels.
  • the hepatic content of Hydroxyproline can be measured using established protocols.
  • Hepatic gene expression analysis of inflammation and fibrosis markers may be performed by qRT-PCR using validated primers. These markers may include, but are not limited to, MCP-1, alpha-SMA, Coll1a1, and TIMP-. Metabolite measurements may be performed in plasma, tissue and fecal samples using established metabolomics methods.
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on liver sections to measure neutrophils, T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, or other immune cell infiltrates.
  • mice In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be rechallenged with DCC at a later time. Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to cholangitis and cholangitis severity following rechallenge.
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in BDL-induced cholangitis.
  • 6-8 week old C57Bl/6J mice are obtained from Taconic or other vendor. After an acclimation period the mice are subjected to a surgical procedure to perform a bile duct ligation (BDL). Some control animals receive a sham surgery. The BDL procedure leads to liver injury, inflammation and fibrosis within 7-21 days.
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either around the time of surgery or some time following the surgery.
  • the bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a range between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, or 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through i.p. injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g.
  • mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain.
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. They bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen), and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • some groups of mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with additional agents and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment.
  • antibiotics for example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment.
  • Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • serum samples are analyzed for ALT, AP, bilirubin, and serum bile acid (BA) levels.
  • mice are sacrificed, body and liver weight are recorded, and sites of inflammation (e.g. liver, small and large intestine, spleen), lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histolomorphological characterization, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art (see Fickert et al. Characterization of animal models for primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC)). J Hepatol. 2014. 60(6): 1290-1303). For example, bile ducts are stained for expression of ICAM-1, VCAM-1, MadCAM-1. Some tissues are stained for histological examination, while others are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • sites of inflammation e.g. liver, small and large intestine, spleen
  • lymph nodes e.g. liver, small and large intestine, spleen
  • Other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histolomorphological characterization, cytokine and/or
  • Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80), as well as adhesion molecule expression (ICAM-1, VCAM-1, MadCAM-1).
  • T cell markers CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4
  • macrophage/myeloid markers CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80
  • IAM-1 adhesion molecule expression
  • VCAM-1 MadCAM-1
  • serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ bile duct-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • Liver tissue is prepared for histological analysis, for example, using Sirius-red staining followed by quantification of the fibrotic area.
  • blood is collected for plasma analysis of liver enzymes, for example, AST or ALT, and to determine Bilirubin levels.
  • the hepatic content of Hydroxyproline can be measured using established protocols.
  • Hepatic gene expression analysis of inflammation and fibrosis markers may be performed by qRT-PCR using validated primers. These markers may include, but are not limited to, MCP-1, alpha-SMA, Coll1a1, and TIMP-. Metabolite measurements may be performed in plasma, tissue and fecal samples using established metabolomics methods.
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on liver sections to measure neutrophils, T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, or other immune cell infiltrates.
  • mice In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be analyzed for recovery.
  • Nonalcoholic Steatohepatitis is a severe form of Nonalcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD), where buildup of hepatic fat (steatosis) and inflammation lead to liver injury and hepatocyte cell death (ballooning).
  • NASH Nonalcoholic Steatohepatitis
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in a mouse model of NASH, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of another therapeutic agent.
  • a mouse model of NASH either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of another therapeutic agent.
  • MCD methionine choline deficient
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either at the beginning of the diet, or at some point following diet initiation (for example, one week after).
  • the bacterial strain may be administered starting in the same day as the initiation of the MCD diet.
  • the bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals.
  • some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at doses between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, or 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse.
  • mice may receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection
  • other mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration.
  • mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain.
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened.
  • the bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with additional NASH therapeutic(s) (e.g., FXR agonists, PPAR agonists, CCR2/5 antagonists or other treatment) and/or appropriate control at various timepoints and effective doses.
  • mice are sacrificed and liver, intestine, blood, feces, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, biochemical, molecular or cytokine and/or flow cytometry analysis using methods known in the art.
  • liver tissues are weighed and prepared for histological analysis, which may comprise staining with H&E, Sirius Red, and determination of NASH activity score (NAS).
  • NAS NASH activity score
  • blood is collected for plasma analysis of liver enzymes, for example, AST or ALT, using standards assays.
  • the hepatic content of cholesterol, triglycerides, or fatty acid acids can be measured using established protocols.
  • Hepatic gene expression analysis of inflammation, fibrosis, steatosis, ER stress, or oxidative stress markers may be performed by qRT-PCR using validated primers. These markers may include, but are not limited to, IL-6, MCP-1, alpha-SMA, Coll1a1, CHOP, and NRF2. Metabolite measurements may be performed in plasma, tissue and fecal samples using established biochemical and mass-spectrometry-based metabolomics methods.
  • Serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ bile duct-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on liver or intestine sections to measure neutrophils, T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, or other immune cell infiltrates.
  • mice In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be analyzed for recovery.
  • Psoriasis is a T-cell-mediated chronic inflammatory skin disease.
  • plat-type psoriasis is the most common form of psoriasis and is typified by dry scales, red plaques, and thickening of the skin due to infiltration of immune cells into the dermis and epidermis.
  • Several animal models have contributed to the understanding of this disease, as reviewed by Gudjonsson et al. (Mouse models of psoriasis. J Invest Derm. 2007. 127: 1292-1308; see also van der Fits et al. Imiquimod-induced psoriasis-like skin inflammation in mice is mediated via the IL-23/IL-17 axis. J. Immunol. 2009 May 1. 182(9): 5836-45).
  • Psoriasis can be induced in a variety of mouse models, including those that use transgenic, knockout, or xenograft models, as well as topical application of imiquimod (IMQ), a TLR7/8 ligand.
  • IMQ imiquimod
  • the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in the mouse model of psoriasis, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory treatments.
  • 6-8 week old C57Bl/6 or Balb/c mice are obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.), or other vendor. Mice are shaved on the back and the right ear. Groups of mice receive a daily topical dose of 62.5 mg of commercially available IMQ cream (5%) (Aldara; 3M Pharmaceuticals). The dose is applied to the shaved areas for 5 or 6 consecutive days.
  • mice are scored for erythema, scaling, and thickening on a scale from 0 to 4, as described by van der Fits et al. (2009). Mice are monitored for ear thickness using a Mitutoyo micrometer.
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either around the time of the first application of IMQ, or something thereafter.
  • the bacterial strain may be administered at the same time as the subcutaneous injections (day 0), or they may be administered prior to, or upon, application.
  • the bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a dose of between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, or 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v.
  • mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, topical administration, intradermal (i.d.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, or other means of administration.
  • Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 0), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain.
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened.
  • the bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, i.d. injection, s.c. injection, topical administration, or nasal route administration.
  • mice may be treated with anti-inflammatory agent(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • anti-inflammatory agent(s) e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment
  • an appropriate control e.g. vehicle or control antibody
  • mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment.
  • antibiotics for example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment.
  • Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • samples from back and ear skin are taken for cryosection staining analysis using methods known in the art.
  • Other groups of mice are sacrificed and lymph nodes, spleen, mesenteric lymph nodes (MLN), the small intestine, colon, and other tissues may be removed for histology studies, ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art.
  • Some tissues may be dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Cryosection samples, tissue samples, or cells obtained ex vivo are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art.
  • Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103.
  • Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80).
  • serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1.
  • Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ skin-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • mice In order to examine the impact and longevity of psoriasis protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be studied to assess recovery, or they may be rechallenged with IMQ. The groups of rechallenged mice are analyzed for susceptibility to psoriasis and severity of response.
  • a mouse model of cancer is generated by subcutaneously injecting a tumor cell line or patient derived tumor sample and allowing it to engraft into C57BL/6, female mice at ages 6-8 weeks old.
  • the methods provided herein are replicated using several tumor cell lines including: B16-F10 or B16-F10-SIY cells as an orthotopic model of melanoma, Panc02 cells as an orthotopic model of pancreatic cancer, injected at a concentration of 1 ⁇ 10 6 cells into the right flank (Maletzki et al 2008. Gut 57:483-491), LLC1 cells as an orthotopic model of lung cancer, CT-26 as an orthotopic model of colorectal cancer, and RM-1 as an orthotopic model of prostate cancer.
  • methods for the B16-F10 model are provided in depth herein.
  • a syngeneic mouse model of spontaneous melanoma with a very high metastatic frequency is used to test the ability of bacteria to reduce tumor growth and the spread of metastases.
  • the mouse melanoma cell line B16-F10 is obtained from ATCC.
  • the cells are cultured in vitro as a monolayer in RPMI medium, supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum and 1% penicillin/streptomycin at 37° C. in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 in air.
  • the exponentially growing tumor cells are harvested by trypsinization, washed three times with cold 1 ⁇ PBS, and a suspension of 5E6 cells/ml is prepared for administration.
  • Female C57BL/6 mice are used for this experiment.
  • mice are 6-8 weeks old and weigh approximately 16-20 g.
  • each mouse is injected SC into the flank with 100 ⁇ l of the B16-F10 cell suspension.
  • the mice are anesthetized by ketamine and xylazine prior to the cell transplantation.
  • the animals used in the experiment may be started on an antibiotic treatment via instillation of a cocktail of kanamycin (0.4 mg/ml), gentamicin, (0.035 mg/ml), colistin (850 U/ml), metronidazole (0.215 mg/ml) and vancomycin (0.045 mg/ml) in the drinking water from day 2 to 5 and an intraperitoneal injection of clindamycin (10 mg/kg) on day 7 after tumor injection.
  • the animals are sorted into several groups based on their body weight. The mice are then randomly taken from each group and assigned to a treatment group. The mice are orally inoculated with the bacterial strains disclosed herein (e.g. a bacterial strain of Table 1). Mice are orally gavaged with the same amount of bacteria daily, weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, bi-monthly, or on any other dosing schedule throughout the treatment period. Mice are IV injected in the tail vein or directly injected into the tumor.
  • Mice can be injected with bacteria or inactivated bacteria. Mice can be injected weekly or once a month. All mice are housed under specific pathogen-free conditions following approved protocols. Tumor size, mouse weight, and body temperature are monitored every 3-4 days and the mice are humanely sacrificed 6 weeks after the B16-F10 mouse melanoma cell injection or when the volume of the primary tumor reaches 1000 mm3. Blood draws are taken weekly and a full necropsy under sterile conditions is performed at the termination of the protocol.
  • Cancer cells can be easily visualized in the mouse B16-F10 melanoma model due to their melanin production.
  • tissue samples from lymph nodes and organs from the neck and chest region are collected and the presence of micro- and macro-metastases is analyzed using the following classification rule.
  • An organ is classified as positive for metastasis if at least two micro-metastatic and one macro-metastatic lesion per lymph node or organ are found.
  • Micro-metastases are detected by staining the paraffin-embedded lymphoid tissue sections with hematoxylin-eosin following standard protocols known to one skilled in the art.
  • the total number of metastases is correlated to the volume of the primary tumor and it is found that the tumor volume correlates significantly with tumor growth time and the number of macro- and micro-metastases in lymph nodes and visceral organs and also with the sum of all observed metastases. Twenty-five different metastatic sites are identified as previously described (Bobek V., et al., Syngeneic lymph-node-targeting model of green fluorescent protein-expressing Lewis lung carcinoma, Clin. Exp. Metastasis, 2004; 21(8):705-8).
  • the tumor tissue samples are further analyzed for tumor infiltrating lymphocytes.
  • the CD8+ cytotoxic T cells can be isolated by FACS (see Example 17) and can then be further analyzed using customized p/MHC class I microarrays to reveal their antigen specificity (see e.g. Deviren G., et al., Detection of antigen-specific T cells on p/MHC microarrays, J. Mol. Recognit., 2007 January-February; 20(1):32-8).
  • CD4+ T cells can be analyzed using customized p/MHC class II microarrays.
  • mice The same experiment is also performed with a mouse model of multiple pulmonary melanoma metastases.
  • the mouse melanoma cell line B16-BL6 is obtained from ATCC and the cells are cultured in vitro as described above.
  • Female C57BL/6 mice are used for this experiment. The mice are 6-8 weeks old and weigh approximately 16-20 g.
  • each mouse is injected into the tail vein with 100 ⁇ l of a 2E6 cells/ml suspension of B16-BL6 cells.
  • the tumor cells that engraft upon IV injection end up in the lungs.
  • mice are humanely killed after 9 days.
  • the lungs are weighed and analyzed for the presence of pulmonary nodules on the lung surface.
  • the extracted lungs are bleached with Fekete's solution, which does not bleach the tumor nodules because of the melanin in the B16 cells though a small fraction of the nodules is amelanotic (i.e. white).
  • the number of tumor nodules is carefully counted to determine the tumor burden in the mice.
  • 200-250 pulmonary nodules are found on the lungs of the control group mice (i.e. PBS gavage).
  • the percentage tumor burden is calculated for the three treatment groups. This measure is defined as the mean number of pulmonary nodules on the lung surfaces of mice that belong to a treatment group divided by the mean number of pulmonary nodules on the lung surfaces of the control group mice.
  • Biological triplicates of media and spent media samples after bacterial conditioning and after growth of the tumor are deproteinized using Sartorius Centrisart I filters (cutoff 10 kDa). Before use, the filter is washed twice by centrifugation of water to remove glycerol and a small volume (20 ⁇ l) of 20.2 mM trimethylsilyl-2,2,3,3-tetradeuteropropionic acid (TSP, sodium salt) in D20 is added to 700 ul of the ultrafiltrate, providing a chemical shift reference (0.00 ppm) and a deuterium lock signal. 650 ul of the sample is placed in a 5 mm NMR tube.
  • TSP trimethylsilyl-2,2,3,3-tetradeuteropropionic acid
  • Single pulse 1H-NMR spectra (500 MHz) are obtained on a Bruker DMX-500 spectrometer or comparable instrument as described previously (by Engelke et al. 2006 NMR spectroscopic studies on the late onset form of 3-methylutaconic aciduria type I and other defects in leucine metabolism. NMR Biomed. 19: 271-278). Phase and baseline are corrected manually. All spectra are scaled to TSP and metabolite signals are fitted semi-automatically with a Lorentzian line shape. Metabolite concentrations in the spent media are calculated relative to the known concentration in the standard medium and correspondingly expressed in units of mM. The concentration of a particular metabolite was calculated by the area of the corresponding peak to the area of the valine doublet at 1.04 ppm or an appropriate standard.
  • Metabolic content of a sample is ascertained using liquid chromatography techniques combined with mass spectrometry.
  • a LC-MS system includes a 4000 QTRAP triple quadrupole mass spectrometer (AB SCIEX) combined with 1100 Series pump (Agilent) and an HTS PAL autosampler (Leap Technologies). Media samples or other complex metabolic mixtures ( ⁇ 10 ⁇ L) are extracted using nine volumes of 74.9:24.9:0.2 (v/v/v) acetonitrile/methanol/formic acid containing stable isotope-labeled internal standards (valine-d8, Isotec; and phenylalanine-d8, Cambridge Isotope Laboratories). Standards may be adjusted or modified depending on the metabolites of interest.
  • the samples are centrifuged (10 mM, 9,000 g, 4° C.), and the supernatants (10 ⁇ L) are submitted to LCMS by injecting the solution onto the HILIC column (150 ⁇ 2.1 mm, 3 ⁇ m particle size).
  • the column is eluted by flowing a 5% mobile phase [10 mM ammonium formate, 0.1% formic acid in water] for 1 min at a rate of 250 uL/min followed by a linear gradient over 10 min to a solution of 40% mobile phase [acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid].
  • the ion spray voltage is set to 4.5 kV and the source temperature is 450° C.
  • the data are analyzed using commercially available software such as Multiquant 1.2 from AB SCIEX for mass spectrum peak integration. Peaks of interest are manually curated and compared to standards to confirm the identity of the peak. Quantitation with appropriate standards is performed to determine the amount of metabolites present in the initial media, after bacterial conditioning and after tumor cell growth.
  • the tumor biopsies and blood samples are submitted for metabolic analysis via LCMS techniques described herein. Differential levels of amino acids, sugars, lactate, among other metabolites, between test groups demonstrate the ability of the microbial composition to disrupt the tumor metabolic state.
  • Dendritic cells are purified from tumors, Peyers patches, and mesenteric lymph nodes as described in Example 12.
  • RNAseq analysis is carried out and analyzed according to standard techniques known to one skilled in the art (Z. Hou. Scientific Reports. 5(9570):doi:10.1038/srep09570 (2015)).
  • specific attention is placed on innate inflammatory pathway genes including TLRs, CLRs, NLRs, and STING, cytokines, chemokines, antigen processing and presentation pathways, cross presentation, and T cell co-stimulation.
  • Example 10 Administering Bacteria to Treat Syngeneic Mouse Tumor Models in Combination with PD-1 or PD-L1 Inhibition
  • CT-26 colorectal cancer
  • CAT #CRL-2638 tumor cells are cultured in vitro as a monolayer in RPMI-1640 or DMEM supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum at 37° C. in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 in air. The exponentially-growing cells are harvested and counted prior to tumor inoculation. 6-8 week old female BALB/c mice are used for this experiment.
  • each mouse is injected subcutaneously in one or both rear flanks with 5 ⁇ 10 5 CT-26 tumor cells in 0.1 ml of 1 ⁇ PBS. Some mice may receive antibiotic pre-treatment. Tumor size and mouse weight are monitored at least thrice weekly on nonconsecutive days.
  • the bacterial strains are tested for their efficacy in the mouse tumor model, either with or without anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1.
  • Bacterial cells, and/or anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1 are administered at varied time points and at varied doses. For example, on day 10 after tumor injection, or after the tumor volume reaches 100 mm 3 , the mice are treated with the bacterial strain alone or in combination with anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1.
  • mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration.
  • Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days).
  • the bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened.
  • the bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • mice may receive between 1 ⁇ 10 4 and 5 ⁇ 10 9 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration.
  • bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route injection.
  • Some groups of mice are also injected with effective doses of checkpoint inhibitor.
  • mice receive 100 ⁇ g anti-PD-L1 mAB (clone 10f.9g2, BioXCell) or another anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1 mAB in 100 ⁇ l PBS, and some mice receive vehicle and/or other appropriate control (e.g. control antibody).
  • mice are injected with mABs 3, 6, and 9 days after the initial injection.
  • control mice receiving anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1 mABs are included to the standard control panel.
  • Primary (tumor size) and secondary (tumor infiltrating lymphocytes and cytokine analysis) endpoints are assessed, and some groups of mice are rechallenged with a subsequent tumor cell inoculation to assess the effect of treatment on memory response.
  • Example 11 An Orally Administered RuminococcusGnavus Strain Inhibits Colorectal Carcinoma Tumor Growth
  • mice Female 6-8 week old Balb/c mice were obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). 100,000 CT-26 colorectal tumor cells (ATCC CRL-2638) were resuspended in sterile PBS and inoculated in the presence of 50% Matrigel. CT-26 tumor cells were subcutaneously injected into one hind flank of each mouse. When tumor volumes reached an average of 100 mm 3 (approximately 10-12 days following tumor cell inoculation), animals were distributed into the following groups: 1) Vehicle; 2) anti-PD-1 antibody; and 3) Ruminococcus gnavus .
  • Antibodies were administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) at 200 ug/mouse (100 ul final volume) every four days, starting on day 1, and Ruminococcus gnavus bacteria (6.7 ⁇ 10 8 ) were administered by oral gavage (p.o.) daily, starting on day 1 until the conclusion of the study.
  • the Ruminococcus gnavus group showed tumor growth inhibition comparable to that seen in the anti-PD-1 group ( FIGS. 1, 2, 3, and 4 ).
  • Antibodies were administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) at 200 ug/mouse (100 ul final volume) every four days, starting on day 1, and Ruminococcus gnavus bacteria (6.7 ⁇ 10 8 ) were administered by oral gavage (p.o.) daily, starting on day 1 until the conclusion of the study.
  • the Ruminococcus gnavus group showed tumor growth inhibition comparable to that seen in the anti-PD-1 group ( FIGS. 5 and 6 ).
  • Example 12 An Orally Administered Tyzzerella nexilis Strain Inhibits Colorectal Carcinoma Tumor Growth
  • mice Female 6-8 week old Balb/c mice were obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). 100,000 CT-26 colorectal tumor cells (ATCC CRL-2638) were resuspended in sterile PBS and inoculated in the presence of 50% Matrigel. CT-26 tumor cells were subcutaneously injected into one hind flank of each mouse. When tumor volumes reached an average of 100 mm 3 (approximately 10-12 days following tumor cell inoculation), animals were distributed into the following groups: 1) Vehicle; 2) anti-PD-1 antibody; and 3) Tyzzerella nexilis .
  • CT-26 colorectal tumor cells ATCC CRL-2638
  • Antibodies were administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) at 200 ug/mouse (100 ul final volume) every four days, starting on day 1, and Tyzzerella nexilis bacteria (6.7 ⁇ 10 8 ) were administered by oral gavage (p.o.) daily, starting on day 1 until the conclusion of the study.
  • the Tyzzerella nexilis group showed tumor growth inhibition comparable to that seen in the anti-PD-1 group ( FIG. 7 ).
  • mice Female 6-8 week old Balb/c mice are obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). 100,000 CT-26 colorectal tumor cells (ATCC CRL-2638) are resuspended in sterile PBS and inoculated in the presence of 50% Matrigel. CT-26 tumor cells are subcutaneously injected into one hind flank of each mouse. When tumor volumes reach an average of 100 mm 3 (approximately 10-12 days following tumor cell inoculation), animals are distributed into the following groups: 1) Vehicle; 2) anti-PD-1 antibody; and 3) Tyzzerella nexilis and anti-PD-1 antibody.
  • Antibodies are administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) at 200 ug/mouse (100 ul final volume) every four days, starting on day 1, and Tyzzerella nexilis bacteria (6.7 ⁇ 10 8 ) are administered by oral gavage (p.o.) daily, starting on day 1 until the conclusion of the study.
  • the Tyzzerella nexilis group show tumor growth inhibition comparable to that seen in the anti-PD-1 group.
  • Enriched media is used to grow and prepare the bacterium for in vitro and in vivo use.
  • media may contain sugar, yeast extracts, plant based peptones, buffers, salts, trace elements, surfactants, anti-foaming agents, and vitamins Composition of complex components such as yeast extracts and peptones may be undefined or partially defined (including approximate concentrations of amino acids, sugars etc.). Microbial metabolism may be dependent on the availability of resources such as carbon and nitrogen. Various sugars or other carbon sources may be tested.
  • media may be prepared and the selected bacterium grown as shown by Saarela et al., J. Applied Microbiology. 2005. 99: 1330-1339, which is hereby incorporated by reference. Influence of fermentation time, cryoprotectant and neutralization of cell concentrate on freeze-drying survival, storage stability, and acid and bile exposure of the selected bacterium produced without milk-based ingredients.
  • the media is sterilized.
  • Sterilization may be by Ultra High Temperature (UHT) processing.
  • UHT processing is performed at very high temperature for short periods of time.
  • the UHT range may be from 135-180° C.
  • the medium may be sterilized from between 10 to 30 seconds at 135° C.
  • Inoculum can be prepared in flasks or in smaller bioreactors and growth is monitored.
  • the inoculum size may be between approximately 0.5 and 3% of the total bioreactor volume.
  • bioreactor volume can be at least 2 L, 10 L, 80 L, 100 L, 250 L, 1000 L, 2500 L, 5000 L, 10,000 L.
  • the bioreactor Before the inoculation, the bioreactor is prepared with medium at desired pH, temperature, and oxygen concentration.
  • the initial pH of the culture medium may be different that the process set-point. pH stress may be detrimental at low cell centration; the initial pH could be between pH 7.5 and the process set-point. For example, pH may be set between 4.5 and 8.0.
  • the pH can be controlled through the use of sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, or ammonium hydroxide.
  • the temperature may be controlled from 25° C. to 45° C., for example at 37° C. Anaerobic conditions are created by reducing the level of oxygen in the culture broth from around 8 mg/L to 0 mg/L.
  • nitrogen or gas mixtures may be used in order to establish anaerobic conditions.
  • no gases are used and anaerobic conditions are established by cells consuming remaining oxygen from the medium.
  • the bioreactor fermentation time can vary. For example, fermentation time can vary from approximately 5 hours to 48 hours.
  • Reviving microbes from a frozen state may require special considerations.
  • Production medium may stress cells after a thaw; a specific thaw medium may be required to consistently start a seed train from thawed material.
  • the kinetics of transfer or passage of seed material to fresh medium may be influenced by the current state of the microbes (ex. exponential growth, stationary growth, unstressed, stressed).
  • Inoculation of the production fermenter(s) can impact growth kinetics and cellular activity.
  • the initial state of the bioreactor system must be optimized to facilitate successful and consistent production.
  • the fraction of seed culture to total medium (e.g. a percentage) has a dramatic impact on growth kinetics.
  • the range may be 1-5% of the fermenter's working volume.
  • the initial pH of the culture medium may be different from the process set-point. pH stress may be detrimental at low cell concentration; the initial pH may be between pH 7.5 and the process set-point. Agitation and gas flow into the system during inoculation may be different from the process set-points. Physical and chemical stresses due to both conditions may be detrimental at low cell concentration.
  • Process conditions and control settings may influence the kinetics of microbial growth and cellular activity. Shifts in process conditions may change membrane composition, production of metabolites, growth rate, cellular stress, etc.
  • Optimal temperature range for growth may vary with strain. The range may be 20-40° C.
  • Optimal pH for cell growth and performance of downstream activity may vary with strain. The range may be pH 5-8. Gasses dissolved in the medium may be used by cells for metabolism. Adjusting concentrations of O 2 , CO2, and N2 throughout the process may be required. Availability of nutrients may shift cellular growth. Microbes may have alternate kinetics when excess nutrients are available.
  • microbes may be preconditioned shortly before harvest to better prepare them for the physical and chemical stresses involved in separation and downstream processing.
  • a change in temperature (often reducing to 20-5° C.) may reduce cellular metabolism, slowing growth (and/or death) and physiological change when removed from the fermenter.
  • Effectiveness of centrifugal concentration may be influenced by culture pH. Raising pH by 1-2 points can improve effectiveness of concentration but can also be detrimental to cells.
  • Microbes may be stressed shortly before harvest by increasing the concentration of salts and/or sugars in the medium. Cells stressed in this way may better survive freezing and lyophilization during downstream.
  • Separation methods and technology may impact how efficiently microbes are separated from the culture medium.
  • Solids may be removed using centrifugation techniques. Effectiveness of centrifugal concentration can be influenced by culture pH or by the use of flocculating agents. Raising pH by 1-2 points may improve effectiveness of concentration but can also be detrimental to cells.
  • Microbes may be stressed shortly before harvest by increasing the concentration of salts and/or sugars in the medium. Cells stressed in this way may better survive freezing and lyophilization during downstream. Additionally, Microbes may also be separated via filtration. Filtration is superior to centrifugation techniques for purification if the cells require excessive g-minutes to successfully centrifuge. Excipients can be added before after separation.
  • Excipients can be added for cryo protection or for protection during lyophilization.
  • Excipients can include, but are not limited to, sucrose, trehalose, or lactose, and these may be alternatively mixed with buffer and anti-oxidants.
  • droplets of cell pellets mixed with excipients are submerged in liquid nitrogen.
  • Harvesting can be performed by continuous centrifugation.
  • Product may be resuspended with various excipients to a desired final concentration.
  • Excipients can be added for cryo protection or for protection during lyophilization.
  • Excipients can include, but are not limited to, sucrose, trehalose, or lactose, and these may be alternatively mixed with buffer and anti-oxidants.
  • droplets of cell pellets mixed with excipients are submerged in liquid nitrogen.
  • Lyophilization of material begins with primary drying.
  • the ice is removed.
  • a vacuum is generated and an appropriate amount of heat is supplied to the material for the ice to sublime.
  • product bound water molecules are removed.
  • the temperature is raised higher than in the primary drying phase to break any physico-chemical interactions that have formed between the water molecules and the product material.
  • the pressure may also be lowered further to enhance desorption during this stage.
  • the chamber may be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen.
  • the product may be sealed within the freeze dryer under dry conditions, preventing exposure to atmospheric water and contaminants.

Abstract

Provided herein are methods and compositions related to Lachnospiraceae bacteria useful as therapeutic agents.

Description

    RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit of priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Applications having Ser. No. 62/624,504, filed Jan. 31, 2018, 62/636,539, filed Feb. 28, 2018, and 62/643,515, filed Mar. 15, 2018, the contents of each are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
    • SUMMARY
  • In certain aspects, provided herein are methods and compositions (e.g., bacterial composition, pharmaceutical compositions) related to the treatment and/or prevention of disease (e.g., cancer, autoimmune disease, inflammatory disease, metabolic disease), in a subject (e.g., a human subject) comprising administering a bacterial composition comprising Lachnospiraceae bacteria, and/or a product of such bacteria (e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)), as well as methods of making and/or identifying such a bacterium. In some embodiments, provided here are bioreactors comprising such bacteria. In some embodiments, the bacteria is a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacteria is a strain comprising at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the nucleotide sequence (e.g., genomic sequence, 16S sequence, CRISPR sequence) of the bacterial strains listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the administration of the bacterial composition treats the immune disorder in the subject. In some embodiments, the immune disorder is an autoimmune disease. In some embodiments, the immune disorder is an inflammatory disease. In some embodiments, the immune disorder is an allergy.
  • In some embodiments, provided herein are extracellular vesicles (EVs) produced by and/or generated by and/or isolated from Lachnospiraceae bacteria provided herein. In some embodiments, the bacterial compositions comprise both Lachnospiraceae EVs and whole Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., live bacteria, killed bacteria, attenuated bacteria). In certain embodiments, provided herein are bacterial compositions comprising Lachnospiraceae bacteria in the absence of Lachnospiraceae EVs. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions comprise Lachnospiraceae EVs in the absence of Lachnospiraceae bacteria.
  • In certain embodiments, provided herein are methods of treating a subject who has an immune disorder (e.g., an autoimmune disease, an inflammatory disease, an allergy), comprising administering to the subject a bacterial composition comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacterium (e.g., a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium). In certain embodiments, provided herein are methods of treating a subject who has a metabolic disease comprising administering to the subject a bacterial composition described herein. In some embodiments, the bacterium is a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacterium is a strain comprising at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., genomic sequence identity, 16S sequence identity, CRISPR sequence identity) (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the corresponding nucleotide sequence of the bacterial strains listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the bacterial composition of the bacterial strains listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, all or substantially all of the bacteria in the bacterial formulation are bacterial strains listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacterial formulation comprises at least 1×105, 5×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108 or 1×109 colony forming units of Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1).
  • In certain embodiments, provided herein are methods of treating a subject who has cancer comprising administering to the subject a bacterial composition described herein.
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises administering to the subject an antibiotic. In some embodiments, the method further comprises administering to the subject one or more other cancer therapies (e.g., surgical removal of a tumor, the administration of a chemotherapeutic agent, the administration of radiation therapy, and/or the administration of a cancer immunotherapy, such as an immune checkpoint inhibitor, a cancer-specific antibody, a cancer vaccine, a primed antigen presenting cell, a cancer-specific T cell, a cancer-specific chimeric antigen receptor (CAR) T cell, an immune activating protein, and/or an adjuvant). In some embodiments, the method further comprises the administration of another therapeutic bacterium and/or EV. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the administration of an immune suppressant and/or an anti-inflammatory agent. In some embodiments, the method further comprises the administration of a metabolic disease therapeutic agent.
  • In certain embodiments, provided herein are bacterial compositions comprising a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 (e.g., a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium) and/or a product of such bacteria (e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)). In some embodiments, at least 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the bacterial composition are a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacteria is a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacteria is a strain comprising at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., genomic sequence identity, 16S sequence identity, CRISPR sequence identity) (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the nucleotide sequence of the strain of bacteria listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, all or substantially all of the bacteria in the bacterial formulation are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacterial formulation comprises at least 1×105, 5×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108 or 1×109 colony forming units of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacterial composition comprises EVs and/or PhABs (e.g., whole cells, fractions of cells, supernatant from fermentation, fractions of supernatant and/or extracellular vesicles) made from a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
  • In some embodiments, the bacterial composition is administered orally, intravenously, intratumorally, or subcutaneously. In some embodiments, the bacterial composition is administered in 2 or more (e.g., 3 or more, 4 or more or 5 or more doses). In some embodiments, the administration to the subject of the two or more doses are separated by at least 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 7 hours, 8 hours, 9 hours, 10 hours, 11 hours, 12 hours, 13 hours, 14 hours, 15 hours, 16 hours, 17 hours, 18 hours, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 7 days, 8 days, 9 days, 10 days, 11 days, 12 days, 13 days, 14 days, 15 days, 16 days, 17 days, 18 days, 19 days, 20 days or 21 days. In some embodiments, a second bacterium is administered as part of an ecological consortium.
  • In certain embodiments, the composition comprises a specific ratio of Lachnospiraceae bacteria to Lachnospiraceae EV particles. For example, in some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae EV particles. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae EV particles. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises no more than 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae EV particles. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae bacterium. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×10′2 Lachnospiraceae bacterium. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises no more than 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8, 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8, 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8, 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae bacterium.
  • In some embodiments, provided herein are PhABs made from and/or comprising a Lachnospiraceae strain provided herein. In some embodiments, the PhABs comprise whole cells, fractions of cells, supernatant from fermentation, fractions of supernatant and/or extracellular vesicles made from bacteria described herein. In some embodiments, the bacterial compositions provided herein comprise a Lachnospiraceae strain PhAB provided herein.
  • In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition suppresses the immune response in delayed-type hypersensitivity (DTH). In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition induces a regulatory T cell or an anti-inflammatory response. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition inhibits antigen-specific immune responses. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats allergic contact dermatitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats autoimmune myocarditis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats diabetes mellitus type 1. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats granulomas. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats peripheral neuropathies. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats Hashimoto's thyroiditis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats multiple sclerosis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats rheumatoid arthritis.
  • In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats inflammation of the colon. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats colitis. Colitis may be acute and self-limited or long-term. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats ulcerative colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats digestive diseases. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats Crohn's disease. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats inflammatory bowel disease (IBD). In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats microscopic colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats collagenous colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats diversion colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats chemical colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats ischemic colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats indeterminate colitis. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition treats atypical colitis. In some embodiments, the method further comprises administering to the subject an additional therapeutic (e.g., an antibiotic an immune suppressant, an anti-inflammatory agent). In some embodiments, the method further comprises administering to the subject is a second therapeutic bacterium.
  • In some embodiments, the methods and compositions described herein may be used to treat metabolic disorders and metabolic syndromes. Such conditions include, but are not limited to, Type II Diabetes, Encephalopathy, Tay-Sachs disease, Krabbe disease, Galactosemia, Phenylketonuria (PKU), and Maple syrup urine disease.
  • In some embodiments, the methods and compositions described herein may be used to treat neurodegenerative and neurological diseases. Such conditions include, but are not limited to, Parkinson's disease, Alzheimer's disease, prion disease, Huntington's disease, motor neurone diseases (MND), spinocerebellar ataxia, spinal muscular atrophy, dystonia, idiopathicintracranial hypertension, epilepsy, nervous system disease, central nervous system disease, movement disorders, multiple sclerosis, encephalopathy, peripheral neuropathy and post-operative cognitive dysfunction.
  • In some embodiments, the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the subject is a human. In some embodiments, the subject is a non-human mammal (e.g., a dog, a cat, a cow, a horse, a pig, a donkey, a goat, a camel, a mouse, a rat, a guinea pig, a sheep, a llama, a monkey, a gorilla or a chimpanzee).
  • In some embodiments, the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using a method that leaves the disease modulating activity of the bacteria intact and the resulting bacterial components are used in the methods and compositions described herein. In some embodiments, the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using an antibiotic (e.g., using an antibiotic described herein). In some embodiments, the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using UV irradiation.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • FIG. 1 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model.
  • FIG. 2 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 7.
  • FIG. 3 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 9.
  • FIG. 4 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 11.
  • FIG. 5 shows the efficacy of the combination of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain and anti-PD-1 compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 alone or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model.
  • FIG. 6 shows the efficacy of the combination of an exemplary Ruminococcus gnavus strain and anti-PD-1 compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 alone or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 21.
  • FIG. 7 shows the efficacy of an exemplary Tyzzerella nexilis strain compared to that of intraperitoneally (i.p.) administered anti-PD-1 or vehicle in a mouse colorectal carcinoma model at day 11.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION General
  • In certain aspects, provided herein are methods of treating an immune disorder (e.g., an autoimmune disease, an inflammatory disease, an allergy) in a subject comprising administering to the subject a bacterial composition comprising Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1).
    • Definitions
  • “Adjuvant” or “Adjuvant therapy” broadly refers to an agent that affects an immunological or physiological response in a patient or subject. For example, an adjuvant might increase the presence of an antigen over time or to an area of interest like a tumor, help absorb an antigen presenting cell antigen, activate macrophages and lymphocytes and support the production of cytokines. By changing an immune response, an adjuvant might permit a smaller dose of an immune interacting agent to increase the effectiveness or safety of a particular dose of the immune interacting agent. For example, an adjuvant might prevent T cell exhaustion
  • “Administration” broadly refers to a route of administration of a composition to a subject. Examples of routes of administration include oral administration, rectal administration, topical administration, inhalation (nasal) or injection. Administration by injection includes intravenous (IV), intramuscular (IM), intratumoral (IT) and subcutaneous (SC) administration. The pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be administered in any form by any effective route, including but not limited to intratumoral, oral, parenteral, enteral, intravenous, intraperitoneal, topical, transdermal (e.g., using any standard patch), intradermal, ophthalmic, (intra)nasally, local, non-oral, such as aerosol, inhalation, subcutaneous, intramuscular, buccal, sublingual, (trans)rectal, vaginal, intra-arterial, and intrathecal, transmucosal (e.g., sublingual, lingual, (trans)buccal, (trans)urethral, vaginal (e.g., trans- and perivaginally), intravesical, intrapulmonary, intraduodenal, intragastrical, and intrabronchial. In preferred embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions described herein are administered orally, rectally, intratumorally, topically, intravesically, by injection into or adjacent to a draining lymph node, intravenously, by inhalation or aerosol, or subcutaneously.
  • As used herein, the term “antibody” may refer to both an intact antibody and an antigen binding fragment thereof. Intact antibodies are glycoproteins that include at least two heavy (H) chains and two light (L) chains inter-connected by disulfide bonds. Each heavy chain includes a heavy chain variable region (abbreviated herein as VH) and a heavy chain constant region. Each light chain includes a light chain variable region (abbreviated herein as VL) and a light chain constant region. The VH and VL regions can be further subdivided into regions of hypervariability, termed complementarity determining regions (CDR), interspersed with regions that are more conserved, termed framework regions (FR). Each VH and VL is composed of three CDRs and four FRs, arranged from amino-terminus to carboxy-terminus in the following order: FR1, CDR1, FR2, CDR2, FR3, CDR3, FR4. The variable regions of the heavy and light chains contain a binding domain that interacts with an antigen. The term “antibody” includes, for example, monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, chimeric antibodies, humanized antibodies, human antibodies, multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies), single-chain antibodies and antigen-binding antibody fragments.
  • The terms “antigen binding fragment” and “antigen-binding portion” of an antibody, as used herein, refers to one or more fragments of an antibody that retain the ability to bind to an antigen. Examples of binding fragments encompassed within the term “antigen-binding fragment” of an antibody include Fab, Fab′, F(ab′)2, Fv, scFv, disulfide linked Fv, Fd, diabodies, single-chain antibodies, NANOBODIES®, isolated CDRH3, and other antibody fragments that retain at least a portion of the variable region of an intact antibody. These antibody fragments can be obtained using conventional recombinant and/or enzymatic techniques and can be screened for antigen binding in the same manner as intact antibodies.
  • “Cancer” broadly refers to an uncontrolled, abnormal growth of a host's own cells leading to invasion of surrounding tissue and potentially tissue distal to the initial site of abnormal cell growth in the host. Major classes include carcinomas which are cancers of the epithelial tissue (e.g., skin, squamous cells); sarcomas which are cancers of the connective tissue (e.g., bone, cartilage, fat, muscle, blood vessels, etc.); leukemias which are cancers of blood forming tissue (e.g., bone marrow tissue); lymphomas and myelomas which are cancers of immune cells; and central nervous system cancers which include cancers from brain and spinal tissue. “Cancer(s),” “neoplasm(s),” and “tumor(s)” are used herein interchangeably. As used herein, “cancer” refers to all types of cancer or neoplasm or malignant tumors including leukemias, carcinomas and sarcomas, whether new or recurring. Specific examples of cancers are: carcinomas, sarcomas, myelomas, leukemias, lymphomas and mixed type tumors. Non-limiting examples of cancers are new or recurring cancers of the brain, melanoma, bladder, breast, cervix, colon, head and neck, kidney, lung, non-small cell lung, mesothelioma, ovary, prostate, sarcoma, stomach, uterus and medulloblastoma.
  • “Cellular augmentation” broadly refers to the influx of cells or expansion of cells in an environment that are not substantially present in the environment prior to administration of a composition and not present in the composition itself. Cells that augment the environment include immune cells, stromal cells, bacterial and fungal cells. Environments of particular interest are the microenvironments where cancer cells reside or locate. In some instances, the microenvironment is a tumor microenvironment or a tumor draining lymph node. In other instances, the microenvironment is a pre-cancerous tissue site or the site of local administration of a composition or a site where the composition will accumulate after remote administration.
  • “Clade” refers to the OTUs or members of a phylogenetic tree that are downstream of a statistically valid node in a phylogenetic tree. The clade comprises a set of terminal leaves in the phylogenetic tree that is a distinct monophyletic evolutionary unit and that share some extent of sequence similarity. “Operational taxonomic units,” “OTU” (or plural, “OTUs”) refer to a terminal leaf in a phylogenetic tree and is defined by a nucleic acid sequence, e.g., the entire genome, or a specific genetic sequence, and all sequences that share sequence identity to this nucleic acid sequence at the level of species. In some embodiments the specific genetic sequence may be the 16S sequence or a portion of the 16S sequence. In other embodiments, the entire genomes of two entities are sequenced and compared. In another embodiment, select regions such as multilocus sequence tags (MLST), specific genes, or sets of genes may be genetically compared. In 16S embodiments, OTUs that share ≥97% average nucleotide identity across the entire 16S or some variable region of the 16S are considered the same OTU (see e.g. Claesson M J, Wang Q, O'Sullivan O, Greene-Diniz R, Cole J R, Ros R P, and O'Toole P W. 2010. Comparison of two next-generation sequencing technologies for resolving highly complex microbiota composition using tandem variable 16S rRNA gene regions. Nucleic Acids Res 38: e200. Konstantinidis K T, Ramette A, and Tiedje J M. 2006. The bacterial species definition in the genomic era. Philos Trans R Sac Land B Biol Sci 361: 1929-1940). In embodiments involving the complete genome, MLSTs, specific genes, or sets of genes OTUs that share ≥9.5% average nucleotide identity are considered the same OTU (see e.g. Achtman M, and Wagner M. 2008. Microbial diversity and the genetic nature of microbial species. Nat. Rev. Microbiol, 6: 431-440. Konstantinidis K Ramette A and Tiedje J M. 2006. The bacterial species definition in the genomic era. Philos Trans R Soc Land B Biol Sci 361: 1929-1940). OTUs are frequently defined by comparing sequences between organisms. Generally, sequences with less than 95% sequence identity are not considered to form part of the same OTU. OTUs may also be characterized by any combination of nucleotide markers or genes, in particular highly conserved genes (e.g., “house-keeping” genes), or a combination thereof. Such characterization employs, e.g., WGS data or a whole genome sequence.
  • A “combination” of two or more monoclonal microbial strains includes the physical co-existence of the two monoclonal microbial strains, either in the same material or product or in physically connected products, as well as the temporal co-administration or co-localization of the monoclonal microbial strains.
  • The term “decrease” or “deplete” means a change, such that the difference is, depending on circumstances, at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 1/100, 1/1000, 1/10,000, 1/100,000, 1/1,000,000 or undetectable after treatment when compared to a pre-treatment state.
  • The term “ecological consortium” is a group of bacteria which trades metabolites and positively co-regulates one another, in contrast to two bacteria which induce host synergy through activating complementary host pathways for improved efficacy.
  • The term “epitope” means a protein determinant capable of specific binding to an antibody. Epitopes usually consist of chemically active surface groupings of molecules such as amino acids or sugar side chains. Certain epitopes can be defined by a particular sequence of amino acids to which an antibody is capable of binding.
  • As used herein, “engineered bacteria” are any bacteria that have been genetically altered from their natural state by human intervention and the progeny of any such bacteria. Engineered bacteria include, for example, the products of targeted genetic modification, the products of random mutagenesis screens and the products of directed evolution.
  • The term “gene” is used broadly to refer to any nucleic acid associated with a biological function. The term “gene” applies to a specific genomic sequence, as well as to a cDNA or an mRNA encoded by that genomic sequence.
  • “Identity” as between nucleic acid sequences of two nucleic acid molecules can be determined as a percentage of identity using known computer algorithms such as the “FASTA” program, using for example, the default parameters as in Pearson et al. (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (other programs include the GCG program package (Devereux, J., et al., Nucleic Acids Research 12(I):387 (1984)), BLASTP, BLASTN, FASTA Atschul, S. F., et al., J Molec Biol 215:403 (1990); Guide to Huge Computers, Mrtin J. Bishop, ed., Academic Press, San Diego, 1994, and Carillo et al. (1988) SIAM J Applied Math 48:1073). For example, the BLAST function of the National Center for Biotechnology Information database can be used to determine identity. Other commercially or publicly available programs include, DNAStar “MegAlign” program (Madison, Wis.) and the University of Wisconsin Genetics Computer Group (UWG) “Gap” program (Madison Wis.)).
  • As used herein, the term “immune disorder” refers to any disease, disorder or disease symptom caused by an activity of the immune system, including autoimmune diseases, inflammatory diseases and allergies Immune disorders include, but are not limited to, autoimmune diseases (e.g., Lupus, Scleroderma, hemolytic anemia, vasculitis, type one diabetes, Grave's disease, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, Goodpasture's syndrome, pernicious anemia and/or myopathy), inflammatory diseases (e.g., acne vulgaris, asthma, celiac disease, chronic prostatitis, glomerulonephritis, inflammatory bowel disease, pelvic inflammatory disease, reperfusion injury, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, transplant rejection, vasculitis and/or interstitial cystitis), and/or an allergies (e.g., food allergies, drug allergies and/or environmental allergies).
  • The term “increase” means a change, such that the difference is, depending on circumstances, at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 2-fold, 4-fold, 10-fold, 100-fold, 10{circumflex over ( )}3 fold, 10{circumflex over ( )}4 fold, 10{circumflex over ( )}5 fold, 10{circumflex over ( )}6 fold, and/or 10{circumflex over ( )}7 fold greater after treatment when compared to a pre-treatment state. Properties that may be increased include immune cells, bacterial cells, stromal cells, myeloid derived suppressor cells, fibroblasts, metabolites, and cytokines.
  • The “internal transcribed spacer” or “ITS” is a piece of non-functional RNA located between structural ribosomal RNAs (rRNA) on a common precursor transcript often used for identification of eukaryotic species in particular fungi. The rRNA of fungi that forms the core of the ribosome is transcribed as a signal gene and consists of the 8S, 5.8S and 28S regions with ITS4 and 5 between the 8S and 5.8S and 5.8S and 28S regions, respectively. These two intercistronic segments between the 18S and 5.8S and 5.8S and 28S regions are removed by splicing and contain significant variation between species for barcoding purposes as previously described (Schoch et al Nuclear ribosomal internal transcribed spacer (ITS) region as a universal DNA barcode marker for Fungi. PNAS 109:6241-6246. 2012). 18S rDNA is traditionally used for phylogenetic reconstruction however the ITS can serve this function as it is generally highly conserved but contains hypervariable regions that harbor sufficient nucleotide diversity to differentiate genera and species of most fungus.
  • The term “isolated” or “enriched” encompasses a microbe, bacteria or other entity or substance that has been (1) separated from at least some of the components with which it was associated when initially produced (whether in nature or in an experimental setting), and/or (2) produced, prepared, purified, and/or manufactured by the hand of man. Isolated microbes may be separated from at least about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, or more of the other components with which they were initially associated. In some embodiments, isolated microbes are more than about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about 99%, or more than about 99% pure. As used herein, a substance is “pure” if it is substantially free of other components. The terms “purify,” “purifying” and “purified” refer to a microbe or other material that has been separated from at least some of the components with which it was associated either when initially produced or generated (e.g., whether in nature or in an experimental setting), or during any time after its initial production. A microbe or a microbial population may be considered purified if it is isolated at or after production, such as from a material or environment containing the microbe or microbial population, and a purified microbe or microbial population may contain other materials up to about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, or above about 90% and still be considered “isolated.” In some embodiments, purified microbes or microbial population are more than about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about 99%, or more than about 99% pure. In the instance of microbial compositions provided herein, the one or more microbial types present in the composition can be independently purified from one or more other microbes produced and/or present in the material or environment containing the microbial type. Microbial compositions and the microbial components thereof are generally purified from residual habitat products.
  • “Metabolite” as used herein refers to any and all molecular compounds, compositions, molecules, ions, co-factors, catalysts or nutrients used as substrates in any cellular or microbial metabolic reaction or resulting as product compounds, compositions, molecules, ions, co-factors, catalysts or nutrients from any cellular or microbial metabolic reaction.
  • “Microbe” refers to any natural or engineered organism characterized as a bacterium, fungus, microscopic alga, protozoan, and the stages of development or life cycle stages (e.g., vegetative, spore (including sporulation, dormancy, and germination), latent, biofilm) associated with the organism. Examples of gut microbes include: Actinomyces graevenitzii, Actinomyces odontolyticus, Akkermansia muciniphila, Bacteroides caccae, Bacteroides fragilis, Bacteroides putredinis, Bacteroides thetaiotaomicron, Bacteroides vultagus, Bifidobacterium adolescentis, Bifidobacterium bifidum, Bilophila wadsworthia, Lactococcus lactis, Butyrivibrio, Campylobacter gracilis, Clostridia cluster III, Clostridia cluster IV, Clostridia cluster IX (Acidaminococcaceae group), Clostridia cluster XI, Clostridia cluster XIII (Peptostreptococcus group), Clostridia cluster XIV, Clostridia cluster XV, Collinsella aerofaciens, Coprococcus, Corynebacterium sunsvallense, Desulfomonas pigra, Dorea formicigenerans, Dorea longicatena, Escherichia coli, Eubacterium hadrum, Eubacterium rectale, Faecalibacteria prausnitzii, Gemella, Lactococcus, Lanchnospira, Mollicutes cluster XVI, Mollicutes cluster XVIII, Prevotella, Rothia mucilaginosa, Ruminococcus callidus, Ruminococcus gnavus, Ruminococcus torques, and Streptococcus.
  • “Microbiome” broadly refers to the microbes residing on or in body site of a subject or patient. Microbes in a microbiome may include bacteria, viruses, eukaryotic microorganisms, and/or viruses. Individual microbes in a microbiome may be metabolically active, dormant, latent, or exist as spores, may exist planktonically or in biofilms, or may be present in the microbiome in sustainable or transient manner. The microbiome may be a commensal or healthy-state microbiome or a disease-state microbiome. The microbiome may be native to the subject or patient, or components of the microbiome may be modulated, introduced, or depleted due to changes in health state (e.g., precancerous or cancerous state) or treatment conditions (e.g., antibiotic treatment, exposure to different microbes). In some aspects, the microbiome occurs at a mucosal surface. In some aspects, the microbiome is a gut microbiome. In some aspects, the microbiome is a tumor microbiome.
  • A “microbiome profile” or a “microbiome signature” of a tissue or sample refers to an at least partial characterization of the bacterial makeup of a microbiome. In some embodiments, a microbiome profile indicates whether at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or more bacterial strains are present or absent in a microbiome.
  • “Modified” in reference to a bacteria broadly refers to a bacteria that has undergone a change from its wild-type form. Examples of bacterial modifications include genetic modification, gene expression, phenotype modification, formulation, chemical modification, and dose or concentration. Examples of improved properties are described throughout this specification and include, e.g., attenuation, auxotrophy, homing, or antigenicity. Phenotype modification might include, by way of example, bacteria growth in media that modify the phenotype of a bacterium that increase or decrease virulence.
  • As used herein, a gene is “overexpressed” in a bacteria if it is expressed at a higher level in an engineered bacteria under at least some conditions than it is expressed by a wild-type bacteria of the same species under the same conditions. Similarly, a gene is “underexpressed” in a bacteria if it is expressed at a lower level in an engineered bacteria under at least some conditions than it is expressed by a wild-type bacteria of the same species under the same conditions.
  • The terms “polynucleotide” and “nucleic acid” are used interchangeably. They refer to a polymeric form of nucleotides of any length, either deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides, or analogs thereof. Polynucleotides may have any three-dimensional structure, and may perform any function. The following are non-limiting examples of polynucleotides: coding or non-coding regions of a gene or gene fragment, loci (locus) defined from linkage analysis, exons, introns, messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA, ribosomal RNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes, and primers. A polynucleotide may comprise modified nucleotides, such as methylated nucleotides and nucleotide analogs. If present, modifications to the nucleotide structure may be imparted before or after assembly of the polymer. A polynucleotide may be further modified, such as by conjugation with a labeling component. In all nucleic acid sequences provided herein, U nucleotides are interchangeable with T nucleotides.
  • “Operational taxonomic units” and “OTU(s)” refer to a terminal leaf in a phylogenetic tree and is defined by a nucleic acid sequence, e.g., the entire genome, or a specific genetic sequence, and all sequences that share sequence identity to this nucleic acid sequence at the level of species. In some embodiments the specific genetic sequence may be the 16S sequence or a portion of the 16S sequence. In other embodiments, the entire genomes of two entities are sequenced and compared. In another embodiment, select regions such as multilocus sequence tags (MLST), specific genes, or sets of genes may be genetically compared. For 16S, OTUs that share ≥97% average nucleotide identity across the entire 16S or some variable region of the 16S are considered the same OTU. See e.g. Claesson M J, Wang Q, O'Sullivan O, Greene-Diniz R, Cole J R, Ross R P, and O'Toole P W. 2010. Comparison of two next-generation sequencing technologies for resolving highly complex microbiota composition using tandem variable 16S rRNA gene regions. Nucleic Acids Res 38: e200. Konstantinidis K T, Ramette A, and Tiedje J M. 2006. The bacterial species definition in the genomic era. Philos Trans R Soc Lond B Biol Sci 361: 1929-1940. For complete genomes, MLSTs, specific genes, other than 16S, or sets of genes OTUs that share ≥95% average nucleotide identity are considered the same OTU. See e.g., Achtman M, and Wagner M. 2008. Microbial diversity and the genetic nature of microbial species. Nat. Rev. Microbiol. 6: 431-440. Konstantinidis K T, Ramette A, and Tiedje J M. 2006. The bacterial species definition in the genomic era. Philos Trans R Soc Lond B Biol Sci 361: 1929-1940. OTUs are frequently defined by comparing sequences between organisms. Generally, sequences with less than 95% sequence identity are not considered to form part of the same OTU. OTUs may also be characterized by any combination of nucleotide markers or genes, in particular highly conserved genes (e.g., “house-keeping” genes), or a combination thereof. Operational Taxonomic Units (OTUs) with taxonomic assignments made to, e.g., genus, species, and phylogenetic clade are provided herein.
  • As used herein, a substance is “pure” if it is substantially free of other components. The terms “purify,” “purifying” and “purified” refer to a EV or other material that has been separated from at least some of the components with which it was associated either when initially produced or generated (e.g., whether in nature or in an experimental setting), or during any time after its initial production. An EV may be considered purified if it is isolated at or after production, such as from one or more other bacterial components, and a purified microbe or microbial population may contain other materials up to about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, or above about 90% and still be considered “purified.” In some embodiments, purified EVs are more than about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 91%, about 92%, about 93%, about 94%, about 95%, about 96%, about 97%, about 98%, about 99%, or more than about 99% pure. EV compositions and the microbial components thereof are, e.g., purified from residual habitat products.
  • As used herein, the term “purified EV composition” or “EV composition” refer to a preparation that includes EVs that have been separated from at least one associated substance found in a source material (e.g. separated from at least one other bacterial component) or any material associated with the EVs in any process used to produce the preparation. It also refers to a composition that has been significantly enriched or concentrated. In some embodiments the EVs are concentrated by 2 fold, 3-fold, 4-fold, 5-fold, 10-fold, 100-fold, 1000-fold, 10,000-fold or more than 10,000 fold.
  • As used herein, “specific binding” refers to the ability of an antibody to bind to a predetermined antigen or the ability of a polypeptide to bind to its predetermined binding partner. Typically, an antibody or polypeptide specifically binds to its predetermined antigen or binding partner with an affinity corresponding to a KD of about 10−7 M or less, and binds to the predetermined antigen/binding partner with an affinity (as expressed by KD) that is at least 10 fold less, at least 100 fold less or at least 1000 fold less than its affinity for binding to a non-specific and unrelated antigen/binding partner (e.g., BSA, casein). Alternatively, specific binding applies more broadly to a two component system where one component is a protein, lipid, or carbohydrate or combination thereof and engages with the second component which is a protein, lipid, carbohydrate or combination thereof in a specific way.
  • The terms “subject” or “patient” refers to any animal. A subject or a patient described as “in need thereof” refers to one in need of a treatment for a disease. Mammals (i.e., mammalian animals) include humans, laboratory animals (e.g., primates, rats, mice), livestock (e.g., cows, sheep, goats, pigs), and household pets (e.g., dogs, cats, rodents). For example, the subject may be a non-human mammal including but not limited to of a dog, a cat, a cow, a horse, a pig, a donkey, a goat, a camel, a mouse, a rat, a guinea pig, a sheep, a llama, a monkey, a gorilla or a chimpanzee. The subject or patient may be healthy, or may be suffering from an immune disorder at any developmental stage.
  • “Strain” refers to a member of a bacterial species with a genetic signature such that it may be differentiated from closely-related members of the same bacterial species. The genetic signature may be the absence of all or part of at least one gene, the absence of all or part of at least on regulatory region (e.g., a promoter, a terminator, a riboswitch, a ribosome binding site), the absence (“curing”) of at least one native plasmid, the presence of at least one recombinant gene, the presence of at least one mutated gene, the presence of at least one foreign gene (a gene derived from another species), the presence at least one mutated regulatory region (e.g., a promoter, a terminator, a riboswitch, a ribosome binding site), the presence of at least one non-native plasmid, the presence of at least one antibiotic resistance cassette, or a combination thereof. Genetic signatures between different strains may be identified by PCR amplification optionally followed by DNA sequencing of the genomic region(s) of interest or of the whole genome. In the case in which one strain (compared with another of the same species) has gained or lost antibiotic resistance or gained or lost a biosynthetic capability (such as an auxotrophic strain), strains may be differentiated by selection or counter-selection using an antibiotic or nutrient/metabolite, respectively.
  • As used herein, the term “treating” a disease in a subject or “treating” a subject having or suspected of having a disease refers to subjecting the subject to a pharmaceutical treatment, e.g., the administration of one or more agents, such that at least one symptom of the disease is decreased or prevented from worsening. Thus, in one embodiment, “treating” refers inter alia to delaying progression, expediting remission, inducing remission, augmenting remission, speeding recovery, increasing efficacy of or decreasing resistance to alternative therapeutics, or a combination thereof.
    • Bacteria
  • In certain aspects, provided herein are methods of using a bacterial composition comprising Lachnospiraceae bacteria and/or a product of such bacteria (e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)). In some embodiments, the bacteria is a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1.
  • TABLE 1
    Bacterial Strains
    Organism SEQ ID Isolation
    Strain name 16S sequence NO. source
    A [Clostridium] >S10-19-contig SEQ patient-fecal
    symbiosum CAGCGACGCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGTATTTC ID
    S10-19 GGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAGAAA NO. 1
    ATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTA
    ACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAG
    GGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTA
    AAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAAGTCTGAA
    GTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCGGGACTGC
    TTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGTCGGAGAG
    GTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAAT
    GCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGA
    AGGCGACTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGTTGA
    GGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTA
    GATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATG
    AATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTCG
    GTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTATTCCACCT
    GGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCAAA
    GGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGA
    GCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGA
    ACCTTACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATCCGACGGG
    GGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGGAG
    AAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGCTC
    GTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCAAC
    GAGCGCAACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAGCGGT
    TCGGCCGGGAACTCTTGGGAGACTGCCAGGG
    ATAACCTGGAGGAAGGTGGGGATGACGTCAA
    ATCATCATGCCCCTTATGATCTGGGCTACACA
    CGTGCTACAATGGCGTAAACAAAGAGAAGCA
    AGACCGCGAGGTGGAGCAAATCTCAAAAATA
    ACGTCTCAGTTCGGACTGCAGGCTGCAACTCG
    CCTGCACGAAGCTGGAATCGCTAGTAATCGC
    GAATCAGAATGTCGCGGTGAATACGTTCCCG
    GGTCTTGTACACACCGCCCGTCACACCATGGG
    AGTCAGTAACGCCCGAAGTCAGTGACCCAAC
    CGCAAGG
    B [Clostridium] >S6-202-contig SEQ patient-fecal
    symbiosum GATGCAGCGACGCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGTA ID
    S6-202 TTTCGGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAG NO. 2
    AAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGG
    CTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACG
    TAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGT
    GTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAAGTCT
    GAAGTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCGGGAC
    TGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGTCGGA
    GAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGA
    AATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGG
    CGAAGGCGACTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGT
    TGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGA
    TTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGA
    TGAATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTC
    GGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTATTCCAC
    CTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCA
    AAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTG
    GAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAA
    GAACCTTACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATCCGACG
    GGGGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGG
    AGAAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGC
    TCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCA
    ACGAGCGCAACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAGC
    GGTTCGGCCGGGAACTCTTGGGAGACTGCCA
    GGGATAACCTGGAGGAAGGTGGGGATGACGT
    CAAATCATCATGCCCCTTATGATCTGGGCTAC
    ACACGTGCTACAATGGCGTAAACAAAGAGAA
    GCAAGACCGCGAGGTGGAGCAAATCTCAAAA
    ATAACGTCTCAGTTCGGACTGCAGGCTGCAAC
    TCGCCTGCACGAAGCTGGAATCGCTAGTAATC
    GCGAATCAGAATGTCGCGGTGAATACGTTCC
    CGGGTCTTGTACACACCGCCCGTCACACCATG
    GGAGTCAGTAACGCCCGAAGTCAGTGACCCA
    ACCGCAAGGAGGG
    C [Clostridium] >consensus sequence SEQ patient
    symbiosum TGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGTGCCA ID
    S10-257 GCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGT NO. 3
    TATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGT
    AGACGGTAAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCC
    GCGGCTCAACTGCGGGACTGCTTTGGAAACT
    GTTTAACTGGAGTGTCGGAGAGGTAAGTGGA
    ATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAGATAT
    TAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGACTTA
    CTGGACGATAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAG
    CGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCCTGG
    TAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACTAGGT
    GTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTCGGTGCCGTCGC
    AAACGCAGTAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAGTAC
    GTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAATTGAC
    GGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGGT
    TTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTACCA
    GGTCTTGACATCGATCCGACGGGGGAGTAAC
    GTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGGAGAAGACAGG
    TGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGCTCGTGTCGTGA
    GATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCAACGAGCGCAA
    CCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAGCGGTTCGGCCGG
    GAACTCTTGGGAGACTGCCAGGGATAACCTG
    GAGGAAGGTGGGGATGACGTCAAATCATCAT
    GCCCCTTATGATCTGGGCTACACACGTGCTAC
    AATGGCGTAAACAAAGAGAAGCAAGACCGCG
    AGGTGGAGCAAATCTCAAAAATAACGTCTCA
    GTTCGGACTGCAGGCTGCAACTCGCCTGCACG
    AAGCTGGAATCGCTAGTAATCGCGAATCAGA
    ATGTCGC GGTGAATACGTTCCC
    D [Clostridium] >10-552 consensus SEQ patient
    symbiosum sequenceCGTATTCACCGCGACATTCTGATTCGC ID mucosa
    S10-552 GATTACTAGCGATTCCAGCTTCGTGCAGGCGA NO. 4
    GTTGCAGCCTGCAGTCCGAACTGAGACGTTAT
    TTTTGAGATTTGCTCCACCTCGCGGTCTTGCTT
    CTCTTTGTTTACGCCATTGTAGCACGTGTGTA
    GCCCAGATCATAAGGGGCATGATGATTTGAC
    GTCATCCCCACCTTCCTCCAGGTTATCCCTGG
    CAGTCTCCCAAGAGTTCCCGGCCGAACCGCTG
    GCTACTTAGAATAAGGGTTGCGCTCGTTGCGG
    GACTTAACCCAACATCTCACGACACGAGCTG
    ACGACAACCATGCACCACCTGTCTTCTCCGCC
    CCGAAGGGAAGGGGACGTTACTCCCCCGTCG
    GATCGATGTCAAGACCTGGTAAGGTTCTTCGC
    GTTGCTTCGAATTAAACCACATGCTCCACCGC
    TTGTGCGGGTCCCCGTCAATTCCTTTGAGTTT
    CATTCTTGCGAACGTACTCCCCAGGTGGAATA
    CTTACTGCGTTTGCGACGGCACCGAAGAGCTT
    TGCTCCCCAACACCTAGTATTCATCGTTTACG
    GCGTGGACTACCAGGGTATCTAATCCTGTTTG
    CTCCCCACGCTTTCGAGCCTCAACGTCAGTTA
    TCGTCCAGTAAGTCGCCTTCGCCACTGGTGTT
    CCTCCTAATATCTACGCATTTCACCGCTACAC
    TAGGAATTCCACTTACCTCTCCGACACTCCAG
    TTAAACAGTTTCCAAAGCAGTCCCGCAGTTGA
    GCCGCGGGCTTTCACTTCAGACTTGCTTTACC
    GTCTACGCTCCCTTTACACCCAGTAAATCCGG
    ATAACGCTTGCCCCCTACGTATTACCGCGGCT
    GCTGGCACGTAGTTAGCCGGGGCTTCTTAGT
    E [Clostridium] >10-511_consensus_sequence 2 reads from 10-511 SEQ patient
    symbiosum ACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGTGCCAGC ID mucosa
    S10-551 AGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTA NO. 5
    TCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAG
    ACGGTAAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGC
    GGCTCAACTGCGGGACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTT
    TAACTGGAGTGTCGGAGAGGTAAGTGGAATT
    CCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAGATATTA
    GGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGACTTACT
    GGACGATAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCG
    TGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCCTGGTA
    GTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACTAGGTGTT
    GGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTCGGTGCCGTCGCAAA
    CGCAGTAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAGTACGTTC
    GCAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAATTGACGGGG
    ACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAA
    TTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTACCAGGTC
    TTGACATCGATCCGACGGGGGAGTAACGTCC
    CCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGGAGAAGACAGGTGGT
    GCATGGTTGTCGTCAGCTCGTGTCGTGAGATG
    TTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCAACGAGCGCAACCCTT
    ATTCTAAGTAGCCAGCGGTTCGGCCGGGAAC
    TCTTGGGAGACTGCCAGGGATAACCTGGAGG
    AAGGTGGGGATGACGTCAAATCATCATGCCC
    CTTATGATCTGGGCTACACACGTGCTACAATG
    GCGTAAACAAAGAGAAGCAAGACCGCGAGGT
    GGAGCAAATCTCAAAAATAACGTCTCAGTTC
    GGACTGCAGGCTGCAACTCGCCTGCACGAAG
    CTGGAATCGCTAGTAATCGCGAATCAGAATG
    TCGCGGTGAATACGTTCCC
    F [Clostridium] >10- SEQ patient
    symbiosum 530GAAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCC ID mucosa
    S10-530 CGGCTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAAT NO. 6
    ACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACT
    GGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAA
    GTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCG
    GGACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGT
    CGGAGAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCG
    GTGAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCA
    GTGGCGAAGGCGACTTACTGGACGATAACTG
    ACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAAC
    AGGATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTA
    AACGATGAATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAG
    CTCTTCGGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTAT
    TCCACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAA
    ACTCAAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAG
    CGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAAC
    GCGAAGAACCTTACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATC
    CGACGGGGGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGG
    GCGGA
    G [Clostridium] >10-533_consensus_sequence 2 reads from 10- SEQ patient
    symbiosum 533GAACGTATTCACCGCGACATTCTGATTCGC ID mucosa
    S10-533 GATTACTAGCGATTCCAGCTTCGTGCAGGCGA NO. 7
    GTTGCAGCCTGCAGTCCGAACTGAGACGTTAT
    TTTTGAGATTTGCTCCACCTCGCGGTCTTGCTT
    CTCTTTGTTTACGCCATTGTAGCACGTGTGTA
    GCCCAGATCATAAGGGGCATGATGATTTGAC
    GTCATCCCCACCTTCCTCCAGGTTATCCCTGG
    CAGTCTCCCAAGAGTTCCCGGCCGAACCGCTG
    GCTACTTAGAATAAGGGTTGCGCTCGTTGCGG
    GACTTAACCCAACATCTCACGACACGAGCTG
    ACGACAACCATGCACCACCTGTCTTCTCCGCC
    CCGAAGGGAAGGGGACGTTACTCCCCCGTCG
    GATCGATGTCAAGACCTGGTAAGGTTCTTCGC
    GTTGCTTCGAATTAAACCACATGCTCCACCGC
    TTGTGCGGGTCCCCGTCAATTCCTTTGAGTTT
    CATTCTTGCGAACGTACTCCCCAGGTGGAATA
    CTTACTGCGTTTGCGACGGCACCGAAGAGCTT
    TGCTCCCCAACACCTAGTATTCATCGTTTACG
    GCGTGGACTACCAGGGTATCTAATCCTGTTTG
    CTCCCCACGCTTTCGAGCCTCAACGTCAGTTA
    TCGTCCAGTAAGTCGCCTTCGCCACTGGTGTT
    CCTCCTAATATCTACGCATTTCACCGCTACAC
    TAGGAATTCCACTTACCTCTCCGACACTCCAG
    TTAAACAGTTTCCAAAGCAGTCCCGCAGTTGA
    GCCGCGGGCTTTCACTTCAGACTTGCTTTACC
    GTCTACGCTCCCTTTACACCCAGTAAATCCGG
    ATAACGCTTGCCCCCTACGTATTACCGCGGCT
    GCTGGCACGTAGTTAGCCGGGGCTTCTTAG
    H [Clostridium] >10-537_consensus_sequence 2 reads from 10- SEQ patient
    symbiosum 537ACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGTGCCA ID mucosa
    S10-537 GCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGT NO. 8
    TATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGT
    AGACGGTAAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCC
    GCGGCTCAACTGCGGGACTGCTTTGGAAACT
    GTTTAACTGGAGTGTCGGAGAGGTAAGTGGA
    ATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAGATAT
    TAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGACTTA
    CTGGACGATAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAG
    CGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCCTGG
    TAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACTAGGT
    GTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTCGGTGCCGTCGC
    AAACGCAGTAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAGTAC
    GTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAATTGAC
    GGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGGT
    TTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTACCA
    GGTCTTGACATCGATCCGACGGGGGAGTAAC
    GTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGGAGAAGACAGG
    TGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGCTCGTGTCGTGA
    GATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCAACGAGCGCAA
    CCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAGCGGTTCGGCCGG
    GAACTCTTGGGAGACTGCCAGGGATAACCTG
    GAGGAAGGTGGGGATGACGTCAAATCATCAT
    GCCCCTTATGATCTGGGCTACACACGTGCTAC
    AATGGCGTAAACAAAGAGAAGCAAGACCGCG
    AGGTGGAGCAAATCTCAAAAATAACGTCTCA
    GTTCGGACTGCAGGCTGCAACTCGCCTGCACG
    AAGCTGGAATCGCTAGTAATCGCGAATCAGA
    ATGTCGCGGTGAATACGTT
    I [Clostridium] >10- SEQ patient
    symbiosum 544ATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGC ID mucosa
    S10-544 TAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGT NO. 9
    AGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGT
    GTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAAGTCT
    GAAGTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCGGGAC
    TGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGTCGGA
    GAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGA
    AATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGG
    CGAAGGCGACTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGT
    TGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGA
    TTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGA
    TGAATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTC
    GGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTATTCCAC
    CTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCA
    AAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTG
    GAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAA
    GAACCTTACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATCCGACG
    GGGGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGG
    AGAAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGC
    TCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCA
    ACGAGCGCAACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAGC
    GGTTCGGCCGGGAACTCTTGGGAGACTGCCA
    GGGATAACCTG
    J [Clostridium] >10- SEQ patient
    symbiosum 547GGGAAGAAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGA ID mucosa
    S10-547 AGCCCCGGCTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCG NO. 10
    GTAATACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGAT
    TTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAA
    AGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAA
    CTGCGGGACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGG
    AGTGTCGGAGAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTG
    TAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAA
    CACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGACTTACTGGACGAT
    AACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAG
    CAAACAGGATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACG
    CCGTAAACGATGAATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAG
    CAAAGCTCTTCGGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGT
    AAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAG
    AATGAAACTCAAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCG
    CACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGA
    AGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTACCAGGTCTTGAC
    ATCGATCCGACGGGGGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCC
    CTTCGGGGCGGAGAAGACAGGTGGTGCATGG
    TTGTCGTCAGCTCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGT
    TAAGTCCCGCAACGAGCGCAACCCTTATTCTA
    AGTAGCCAGCGGTTCGGCCGGGAACTC
    K [Clostridium] >10-548_consensus_sequence 2 reads from 10- SEQ patient
    symbiosum 548AAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGTGCCAGCA ID mucosa
    S10-548 GCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTAT NO. 11
    CCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGA
    CGGTAAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGCG
    GCTCAACTGCGGGACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTTT
    AACTGGAGTGTCGGAGAGGTAAGTGGAATTC
    CTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAGATATTAG
    GAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGACTTACTG
    GACGATAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGT
    GGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCCTGGTAG
    TCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACTAGGTGTTG
    GGGAGCAAAGCTCTTCGGTGCCGTCGCAAAC
    GCAGTAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCG
    CAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAATTGACGGGGA
    CCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATT
    CGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTACCAGGTCTT
    GACATCGATCCGACGGGGGAGTAACGTCCCC
    TTCCCTTCGGGGCGGAGAAGACAGGTGGTGC
    ATGGTTGTCGTCAGCTCGTGTCGTGAGATGTT
    GGGTTAAGTCCCGCAACGAGCGCAACCCTTA
    TTCTAAGTAGCCAGCGGTTCGGCCGGGAACTC
    TTGGGAGACTGCCAGGGATAACCTGGAGGAA
    GGTGGGGATGACGTCAAATCATCATGCCCCTT
    ATGATCTGGGCTACACACGTGCTACAATGGC
    GTAAACAAAGAGAAGCAAGACCGCGAGGTG
    GAGCAAATCTCAAAAATAACGTCTCAGTTCG
    GACTGCAGGCTGCAACTCGCCTGCACGAAGC
    TGGAATCGCTAGTAATCGCGAATCAGAATGT
    CGCGGTGAATACGTT
    L Clostridium >S7-203-357F SEQ patient-fecal
    sp. S7-203 TGATGCAGCGACGCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGT ID
    ATTTCGGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAA NO. 12
    GAAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCG
    GCTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATAC
    GTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGG
    GTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAAGT
    CTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCGGG
    ACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGTCG
    GAGAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGT
    GAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGT
    GGCGAAGGCGACTTACTGGACGATAACTGAC
    GTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAG
    GATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAAC
    GATGAATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTC
    TTCGGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTATTCC
    ACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACT
    CAAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGG
    TGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCG
    AAGAACCTTACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATCCGA
    CGGGGGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCG
    GAGAAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAG
    CTCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGC
    AACGAGCGCAACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAG
    CGGTTCGGCCGGGAACTCTTGGGAGACTGCC
    AGGGATAACCTGGAGGAAGGTGGGGATGACG
    TCAAATCATCATGCCCCT
    M [Clostridium] GCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGTATTTCGGTATGT SEQ patient
    sp. 36A7- AAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAGAAAATGACGG ID
    1014 TACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGT NO.
    GCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAA 13
    GCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGA
    GCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAA
    GCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCGGGACTGCTTTGGA
    AACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGTCGGAGAGGTAAG
    TGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTA
    GATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCG
    ACTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCG
    AAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACC
    CTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACT
    AGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTCGGTGCCG
    TCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGA
    GTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAAT
    TGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATG
    TGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTT
    ACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATCCGACGGGGGAG
    TAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGGAGAAGAC
    AGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGCTCGTGTCG
    TGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCAACGAGCG
    CAACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAGCGGTTC
    N Clostridium >4-31-contig SEQ patient-fecal
    sp. S4-31 GCCTGATGCAGCGACGCCGCGTGAGTGAAGA ID
    AGTATTTCGGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCAGG NO. 14
    GAAGAAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCC
    CCGGCTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAA
    TACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACT
    GGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAA
    GTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCG
    GGACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGT
    CGGAGAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCG
    GTGAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCA
    GTGGCGAAGGCGACTTACTGGACGATAACTG
    ACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAAC
    AGGATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTA
    AACGATGAATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAG
    CTCTTCGGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTAT
    TCCACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAA
    ACTCAAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAG
    CGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAAC
    GCGAAGAACCTTACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATC
    CGACGGGGGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGG
    GCGGAGAAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGT
    CAGCTCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCC
    CGCAACGAGCGCAACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCC
    AGCGGTTCGGCCGGGAACTCTTGGGAGACTG
    CCAGGGATAACCTGGAGGAAGGTGGGGATGA
    CGTCAAATCATCATGCCCCTTATGATCTGGGC
    TACACACGTGCTACAATGGCGTAAACAAAGA
    GAAGCAAGACCGCGAGGTGGAGCAAATCTCA
    AAAATAACGTCTCAGTTCGGACTGCAGGCTG
    CAACTCGCCTGCACGAAGCTGGAATCGCTAG
    TAATCGCGAATCAGAATGTCGCGGTGAATAC
    GTTCCCGGGTCTTGTACACACCGCCCGTCACA
    CCATGGGAGTCAGTAACGCCCGAAGTCAGTG
    ACCCAACCGCAAGGAGGGAGCTG
    O Clostridium >210-133-Contig SEQ patient-fecal
    sp. S210-133 TTCGGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAG ID
    AAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGG NO.
    CTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACG 15
    TAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGT
    GTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAAGTCT
    GAAGTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCGGGAC
    TGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGTCGGA
    GAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGA
    AATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGG
    CGAAGGCGACTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGT
    TGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGA
    TTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGA
    TGAATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTC
    GGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTATTCCAC
    CTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCA
    AAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTG
    GAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAA
    GAACCTTACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATCCGACG
    GGGGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGG
    AGAAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGC
    TCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCA
    ACGAGCGCAACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAGC
    GGTTCGGCCGGGAACTCTTGGGAGACTGCCA
    GGGATAACCTGGAGGAAGGTGGGGGATGACG
    TCAAATCATCATGCCCCTTATGATCTGGGCTA
    CACACGTGCTACAATGGCGTAAACAAAGAGA
    AGCAAGACCGCGAGGTGGAGCAAATCTCAAA
    AATAACGTCTCAGTTCGGACTGCAGGCTGCA
    ACTCGCCTGCACGAAGCTGGAATCGCTAGTA
    ATCGCGAATCAGAATGTCGCGGTGAATACGT
    TCCCGGGTCTTGTACACACCGCCCGTCACACC
    ATGGGAGTCAGTAACGCCCGAAGTCAGTGAC
    CCA
    P [Clostridium] >10-534_consensus_sequence 2 reads from 10- SEQ patient
    symbiosum 534ACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGTGCCA ID mucosa
    S10-534 GCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGT NO.
    TATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGT 16
    AGACGGTAAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCC
    GCGGCTCAACTGCGGGACTGCTTTGGAAACT
    GTTTAACTGGAGTGTCGGAGAGGTAAAGTGG
    AATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAGAT
    ATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGACT
    TACTGGACGATAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGAA
    AGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCCT
    GGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACTAG
    GTGTTGGGGAGCAAAGCTCTTCGGTGCCGTCG
    CAAACGCAGTAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAGTA
    CGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAATTGA
    CGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGG
    TTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTACC
    AGGTCTTGACATCGATCCGACGGGGGAGTAA
    CGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCGGAGAAGACAG
    GTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGCTCGTGTCGTG
    AGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCAACGAGCGCA
    ACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCCAGCGGTTCGGCCG
    GGAACTCTTGGGAGACTGCCAGGGATAACCT
    GGAGGAAGGTGGGGATGACGTCAAATCATCA
    TGCCCCTTATGATCTGGGCTACACACGTGCTA
    CAATGGCGTAAACAAAGAGAAGCAAGACCGC
    GAGGTGGAGCAAATCTCAAAAATAACGTCTC
    AGTTCGGACTGCAGGCTGCAACTCGCCTGCAC
    GAAGCTGGAATCGCTAGTAATCGCGAATCAG
    AATGTCGCGGTGAATACGTTCC
    Q Clostridium >4-44-contig SEQ patient-fecal
    sp. S4-44 CTGATGCAGCGACGCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAG ID
    TAGTTTCGGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGG NO.
    AAGAAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCC 17
    CGGCTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAAT
    ACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACT
    GGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTAAAGCAA
    GTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGCGGCTCAACTGCG
    GGACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTAACTGGAGTGT
    CGGAGAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCG
    GTGAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCA
    GTGGCGAAGGCGACTTACTGGACGATAACTG
    ACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAAC
    AGGATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTA
    AACGATGAATACTAGGTGTTGGGGAGCAAAG
    CTCTTCGGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGTAT
    TCCACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAA
    ACTCAAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAG
    CGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAAC
    GCGAAGAACCTTACCAGGTCTTGACATCGATC
    CGACGGGGGAGTAACGTCCCCTTCCCTTCGGG
    GCGGAGAAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGT
    CAGCTCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCC
    CGCAACGAGCGCAACCCTTATTCTAAGTAGCC
    AGCGGTTCGGCCGGGAACTCTTGGGAGACTG
    CCAGGGATAACCTGGAGGAAGGTGGGGGATG
    ACGTCAAATCATCATGCCCCTTATGATCTGGG
    CTACACACGTGCTACAATGGCGTAAACAAAG
    AGAAGCAAGACCGCGAGGTGGAGCAAATCTC
    AAAAATAACGTCTCAGTTCGGACTGCAGGCT
    GCAACTCGCCTGCACGAAGCTGGAATCGCTA
    GTAATCGCGAATCAGAATGTCGCGGTGAATA
    CGTTCCCGGGTCTTGTACACACCGCCCGTCAC
    ACCATGGGAGTCAGTAACGCCCGAAGTCAGT
    GACCCAACCGCAAGGAGGGAGCTGCCGA
    R Hungatella GAAGTATTTCGGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCA SEQ patient
    hathewayi or GGGAAGAAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAG ID
    [Clostridium] CCCCGGCTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGT NO.
    hathewayi AATACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTT 18
    34D2-1004 ACTGGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTTTAG
    CAAGTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGGGGCTCAACC
    CCGGTACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTTAGACTTGAG
    TGCAGGAGAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTA
    GCGGTGAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACA
    CCAGTGGCGAAGGCGGCTTACTGGACTGTAA
    CTGACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCA
    AACAGGATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCC
    GTAAACGATGAATACTAGGTGTCGGGGGGCA
    AAGCCCTTCGGTGCCGCCGCAAACGCAATAA
    GTATTCCACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAAT
    GAAACTCAAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCAC
    AAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGC
    AACGCGAAGAACCTTACCAAGTCTTGACATC
    S Hungatella TTCGGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAG SEQ patient
    hathewayi or AAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGG ID
    [Clostridium] CTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACG NO.
    hathewayi TAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGT 19
    34H6-1004 GTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTTTAGCAAGTCT
    GAAGTGAAAGCCCGGGGCTCAACCCCGGTAC
    TGCTTTGGAAACTGTTAGACTTGAGTGCAGGA
    GAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGA
    AATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGG
    CGAAGGCGGCTTACTGGACTGTAACTGACGTT
    GAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGAT
    TAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGAT
    GAATACTAGGTGTCGGGGGGCAAAGCCCTTC
    GGTGCCGCCGCAAACGCAATAAGTATTCCAC
    CTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCA
    AAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTG
    GAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAA
    GAACCTTACCAAGTCTTGACATCCCA
    T Hungatella GCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGTATTTCGGTATGT SEQ patient
    effluvii AAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAGAAAATGACGG ID
    36B10-1014 TACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGT NO. 20
    GCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAA
    GCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGA
    GCGTAGACGGTTAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAA
    GCCCGGGGCTCAACCCCGGTACTGCTTTGGAA
    ACTGTTTGACTTGAGTGCAGGAGAGGTAAGT
    GGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAG
    ATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGG
    CTTACTGGACTGTAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGA
    AAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCC
    TGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACTA
    GGTGTCGGGGGACAAAGTCCTTCGGTGCCGC
    CGCTAACGCAATAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAG
    TACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAATT
    GACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGT
    GGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTA
    CCAAGTCTTGACATCCCATTGAAAATCATTTA
    ACCG
    U Hungatella GCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGTATTTCGGTATGT SEQ patient
    effluvii AAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAGAAAATGACGG ID
    36C4-1014 TACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGT NO.
    GCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAA 21
    GCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGA
    GCGTAGACGGTTAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAA
    GCCCGGGGCTCAACCCCGGTACTGCTTTGGAA
    ACTGTTTGACTTGAGTGCAGGAGAGGTAAGT
    GGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAG
    ATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGG
    CTTACTGGACTGTAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGA
    AAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCC
    TGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACTA
    GGTGTCGGGGGACAAAGTCCTTCGGTGCCGC
    CGCTAACGCAATAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAG
    TACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAATT
    GACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGT
    GGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTA
    CCAAGTCTTGACATCCCATTGAAAA
    V Hungatella GCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGTATTTCGGTATGT SEQ patient
    effluvii 36F7- AAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAGAAAATGACGG ID
    1014 TACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGT NO. 22
    GCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAA
    GCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGA
    GCGTAGACGGTTAAGCAAGTCTGAAGTGAAA
    GCCCGGGGCTCAACCCCGGTACTGCTTTGGAA
    ACTGTTTGACTTGAGTGCAGGAGAGGTAAGT
    GGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAG
    ATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGG
    CTTACTGGACTGTAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGA
    AAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCC
    TGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATACTA
    GGTGTCGGGGGACAAAGTCCTTCGGTGCCGC
    CGCTAACGCAATAAGTATTCCACCTGGGGAG
    TACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTCAAAGGAATT
    GACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGT
    GGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGAAGAACCTTA
    CCAAGTCTTGACATCCCATTGAA
    W Lachno- GACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAAC SEQ patient
    spiraceae TACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGG ID
    sp or GGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAA NO.
    [Clostridium] GGGAGCGTAGACGGCGAAGCAAGTCTGGAGT 23
    citroniae GAAAACCCAGGGCTCAACCCTGGGACTGCTT
    39A7-1014 TGGAAACTGTTTTGCTAGAGTGTCGGAGAGGT
    AAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGC
    GTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAG
    GCGGCTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGTTGAGG
    CTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGA
    TACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAAT
    GCTAGGTGTTGGGGGG
    X Lachno- GACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAAC SEQ patient
    spiraceae TACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGG ID
    sp or GGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAA NO.
    [Clostridium] GGGAGCGTAGACGGCGAAGCAAGTCTGGAGT 24
    citroniae GAAAACCCAGGGCTCAACCCTGGGACTGCTT
    39A8-1014 TGGAAACTGTTTTGCTAGAGTGTCGGAGAGGT
    AAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGC
    GTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAG
    GCGGCTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGTTGAGG
    CTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGA
    TACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAAT
    GCTAGGTGTTGGGGGG
    Y Lachno- GCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGTATTTCGGTATGT SEQ patient
    spiraceae AAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAGAAACTGACGG ID
    sp or TACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGGCTAACTACGT NO.
    [Clostridium] GCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACGTAGGGGGCAA 25
    citroniae GCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGTGTAAAGGGA
    36A6-1014 GCGTAGACGGCGAAGCAAGTCTGGAGTGAAA
    ACCCAGGGCTCAACCCTGGGACTGCTTTGGA
    AACTGTTTTGCTAGAGTGTCGGAGAGGTAAGT
    GGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGAAATGCGTAG
    ATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGG
    CTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGA
    AAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGATTAGATACCC
    TGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGATGAATGCTA
    GGTGTTGGGGGGCAAAGCCCTTC
    Z Lachno- GAAGTATTTCGGTATGTAAACTTCTATCAGCA SEQ patient
    spiraceae GGGAAGAAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAG ID
    sp or CCCCGGCTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGT NO.
    [Clostridium] AATACGTAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTT 26
    sp 36C9-1014 ACTGGGTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGCAGTG
    CAAGTCTGAAGTGAAAGCCCGGGGCTCAACC
    CCGGGACTGCTTTGGAAACTGTGCAGCTAGA
    GTGTCGGAGAGGCAAGCGGAATTCCTAGTGT
    AGCGGTGAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAAC
    ACCAGTGGCGAAGGCGGCTTGCTGGACGATG
    ACTGACGTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGC
    AAACAGGATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGC
    CGTAAACGATGACTACTAGGTGTCGGGGAGC
    AAAGCTCTTCGGTGCCGCAGCCAACGCAATA
    AGTAGTCCACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGA
    ATGAAACTCAAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGC
    ACAAGCGGTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAA
    GCAACGCGAAGAACCTTACCTGCTCTTGACAT
    CCCTCTGACCG
    AA [Clostridium] >S10-121-contig SEQ patient-fecal
    bolteae S10- GATGCAGCGACGCCGCGTGAGTGAAGAAGTA ID
    21 TTTCGGTATGTAAAGCTCTATCAGCAGGGAAG NO.
    AAAATGACGGTACCTGACTAAGAAGCCCCGG 27
    CTAACTACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATACG
    TAGGGGGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGGGT
    GTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGCGAAGCAAGTCT
    GAAGTGAAAACCCAGGGCTCAACCCTGGGAC
    TGCTTTGGAAACTGTTTTGCTAGAGTGTCGGA
    GAGGTAAGTGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGTGA
    AATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGTGG
    CGAAGGCGGCTTACTGGACGATAACTGACGT
    TGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAGGA
    TTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAACGA
    TGAATGCTAGGTGTTGGGGGGCAAAGCCCTT
    CGGTGCCGTCGCAAACGCAGTAAGCATTCCA
    CCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAACTC
    AAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCGGT
    GGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGCGA
    AGAACCTTACCAAGTCTTGACATCCTCTTGAC
    CGGCGTGTAACGGCGCCTTCCCTTCGGGGCAG
    GAGAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCAGC
    TCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCGCA
    ACGAGCGCAACCCTTATCCTTAGTAGCCAGCA
    GGTAAAGCTGGGCACTCTAGGGAGACTGCCA
    GGGATAACCTGGAGGAAGGTGGGGATGACGT
    CAAATCATCATGCCCCTTATGATTTGGGCTAC
    ACACGTGCTACAATGGCGTAAACAAAGGGAA
    GCAAGACAGTGATGTGGAGCAAATCCCAAAA
    ATAACGTCCCAGTTCGGACTGTAGTCTGCAAC
    CCGACTACACGAAGCTGGAATCGCTAGTAAT
    CGCGAATCAGAATGTCGCGGTGAATACGTTC
    CCGGGTCTTGTACACACCGCCCGTCACACCAT
    GGGAGTCAGCAACGCCCGAAGTCAGTGACCC
    AACTCGCAAGAGAGGG
    Ruminococcus CCTTAGCGGTTGGGTCACTGACTTCGGGCGTT SEQ
    gnavus ACTGACTCCCATGGTGTGACGGGCGGTGTGTA ID
    Strain A CAAGACCCGGGAACGTATTCACCGCGACATT NO.
    CTGATTCGCGATTACTAGCGATTCCAGCTTCA 28
    TGTAGTCGAGTTGCAGACTACAATCCGAACTG
    AGACGTTATTTTTGGGATTTGCTCCCCCTCGC
    GGGCTCGCTTCCCTTTGTTTACGCCATTGTAG
    CACGTGTGTAGCCCTGGTCATAAGGGGCATG
    ATGATTTGACGTCATCCCCACCTTCCTCCAGG
    TTATCCCTGGCAGTCTCTCTAGAGTGCCCATC
    CTAAATGCTGGCTACTAAAGATAGGGGTTGC
    GCTCGTTGCGGGACTTAACCCAACATCTCACG
    ACACGAGCTGACGACAACCATGCACCACCTG
    TCTCCTCTGTCCCGAAGGAAAGCTCCGATTAA
    AGAGCGGTCAGAGGGATGTCAAGACCAGGTA
    AGGTTCTTCGCGTTGCTTCGAATTAAACCACA
    TGCTCCACCGCTTGTGCGGGTCCCCGTCAATT
    CCTTTGAGTTTCATTCTTGCGAACGTACTCCC
    CAGGTGGAATACTTATTGCGTTTGCTGCGGCA
    CCGAATGGCTTTGCCACCCGACACCTAGTATT
    CATCGTTTACGGCGTGGACTACCAGGGTATCT
    AATCCTGTTTGCTCCCCACGCTTTCGAGCCTC
    AACGTCAGTCATCGTCCAGAAAGCCGCCTTCG
    CCACTGGTGTTCCTCCTAATATCTACGCATTT
    CACCGCTACACTAGGAATTCCGCTTTCCTCTC
    CGACACTCTAGCCTGACAGTTCCAAATGCAGT
    Tyzzerella >ES1819 T. nexilis S10-231 consensus sequence SEQ
    nexilis GGCTAAATACGTGCCAGCAGCCGCGGTAATA ID
    Strain A CGTATGGTGCAAGCGTTATCCGGATTTACTGG NO.
    GTGTAAAGGGAGCGTAGACGGTTGTGTAAGT 29
    CTGATGTGAAAGCCCGGGGCTCAACCCCGGG
    ACTGCATTGGAAACTATGTAACTAGAGTGTCG
    GAGAGGTAAGCGGAATTCCTAGTGTAGCGGT
    GAAATGCGTAGATATTAGGAGGAACACCAGT
    GGCGAAGGCGGCTTACTGGACGATCACTGAC
    GTTGAGGCTCGAAAGCGTGGGGAGCAAACAG
    GATTAGATACCCTGGTAGTCCACGCCGTAAAC
    GATGACTACTAGGTGTCGGGGAGCAAAGCTC
    TTCGGTGCCGCAGCAAACGCAATAAGTAGTC
    CACCTGGGGAGTACGTTCGCAAGAATGAAAC
    TCAAAGGAATTGACGGGGACCCGCACAAGCG
    GTGGAGCATGTGGTTTAATTCGAAGCAACGC
    GAAGAACCTTACCTGGTCTTGACATCCCTCTG
    ACCGCTCTTTAATCGGAGTTTTCCTTCGGGAC
    AGAGGAGACAGGTGGTGCATGGTTGTCGTCA
    GCTCGTGTCGTGAGATGTTGGGTTAAGTCCCG
    CAACGAGCGCAACCCCTATCTTCAGTAGCCA
    GCATTTAAGGTGGGCACTCTGGAGAGACTGC
    CAGGGATAACCTGGAGGAAGGTGGGGATGAC
    GTCAAATCATCATGCCCCTTATGACCAGGGCT
    ACACACGTGCTACAATGGCGTAAACAAAGGG
    AAGCGAACCTGTGAGGGGAAGCAAATCTCAA
    AAATAACGTCTCAGTTCGGATTGTAGTCTGCA
    ACTCGACTACATGAAGCTGGAATCGCTAGTA
    ATCGCGAATCAGCATGTCGCGGTGAATACGTT
    CCCGGGTCTTGTACACACCGCCCGTC
  • In some embodiments, the bacteria is a strain comprising at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the nucleotide sequence (e.g., genomic, 16S or CRISPR nucleotide sequence) of the bacterial strains listed in Table 1.
  • In some embodiments, the bacteria described herein are modified to improve colonization and/or engraftment in the mammalian gastrointestinal tract (e.g., modified metabolism, such as improved mucin degradation, enhanced competition profile, increased motility, increased adhesion to gut epithelial cells, modified chemotaxis). In some embodiments, the bacteria described herein are modified to enhance their immunomodulatory and/or therapeutic effect (e.g., either alone or in combination with another therapeutic agent). In some embodiments, the bacteria described herein are modified to enhance immune activation (e.g., through modified production of polysaccharides, pili, fimbriae, adhesins, outer membrane vesicles). In some embodiments, the bacteria described herein are modified to improve bacterial manufacturing (e.g., higher oxygen tolerance, improved freeze-thaw tolerance, shorter generation times).
  • The Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1) can be cultured according to methods known in the art. For example, the Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1) can be grown in ATCC Medium 2722, ATCC Medium 1490, or other medium using methods disclosed, for example in Caballero et al., 2017. “Cooperating Commensals Restore Colonization Resistance to Vancomycin-Resistant Enterococcus faecium” Cell Host & Microbe 21:592-602, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
    • Production of EVs
  • In certain aspects, the Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs described herein can be prepared using any method known in the art.
  • In some embodiments, the Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs are prepared without an EV purification step. For example, in some embodiments, Lachnospiraceae bacteria comprising the EVs described herein are killed using a method that leaves the disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs intact and the resulting bacterial components, including the EVs, are used in the methods and compositions described herein. In some embodiments, the Lachnospiraceae bacteria are killed using an antibiotic (e.g., using an antibiotic described herein). In some embodiments, the Lachnospiraceae bacteria are killed using UV irradiation.
  • In some embodiments, the EVs described herein are purified from one or more other bacterial components. Methods for purifying EVs from bacteria are known in the art. In some embodiments EVs are prepared from bacterial cultures using methods described in S. Bin Park, et al. PLoS ONE. 6(3):e17629 (2011) or G. Norheim, et al. PLoS ONE. 10(9): e0134353 (2015), each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, the bacteria are cultured to high optical density and then centrifuged to pellet bacteria (e.g., at 10,000×g for 30 min at 4° C., at 15,500×g for 15 min at 4° C.). In some embodiments, the culture supernatants are then passed through filters to exclude intact bacterial cells (e.g., a 0.22 μm filter). In some embodiments, the supernatants are then subjected to tangential flow filtration, during which the supernatant is concentrated, species smaller than 100 kDa are removed, and the media is partially exchanged with PBS. In some embodiments, filtered supernatants are centrifuged to pellet bacterial EVs (e.g., at 100,000-150,000×g for 1-3 hours at 4° C., at 200,000×g for 1-3 hours at 4° C.). In some embodiments, the EVs are further purified by resuspending the resulting EV pellets (e.g., in PBS), and applying the resuspended EVs to an Optiprep (iodixanol) gradient or gradient (e.g., a 30-60% discontinuous gradient, a 0-45% discontinuous gradient), followed by centrifugation (e.g., at 200,000×g for 4-20 hours at 4° C.). EV bands can be collected, diluted with PBS, and centrifuged to pellet the EVs (e.g., at 150,000×g for 3 hours at 4° C., at 200,000×g for 1 hour at 4° C.). The purified EVs can be stored, for example, at −80° C. or −20° C. until use. In some embodiments, the EVs are further purified by treatment with DNase and/or proteinase K.
  • For example, in some embodiments, cultures of disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria disclosed herein can be centrifuged at 11,000×g for 20-40 min at 4° C. to pellet bacteria. Culture supernatants may be passed through a 0.22 μm filter to exclude intact bacterial cells. Filtered supernatants may then be concentrated using methods that may include, but are not limited to, ammonium sulfate precipitation, ultracentrifugation, or filtration. For example, for ammonium sulfate precipitation, 1.5-3 M ammonium sulfate can be added to filtered supernatant slowly, while stirring at 4° C. Precipitations can be incubated at 4° C. for 8-48 hours and then centrifuged at 11,000×g for 20-40 min at 4° C. The resulting pellets contain disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs and other debris. Using ultracentrifugation, filtered supernatants can be centrifuged at 100,000-200,000×g for 1-16 hours at 4° C. The pellet of this centrifugation contains disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria EVs and other debris such as large protein complexes. In some embodiments, using a filtration technique, such as through the use of an Amicon Ultra spin filter or by tangential flow filtration, supernatants can be filtered so as to retain species of molecular weight >50 or 100 kDa.
  • Alternatively, EVs can be obtained from disease modulating Lachnospiraceae bacteria cultures continuously during growth, or at selected time points during growth, for example, by connecting a bioreactor to an alternating tangential flow (ATF) system (e.g., XCell ATF from Repligen). The ATF system retains intact cells (>0.22 um) in the bioreactor, and allows smaller components (e.g., EVs, free proteins) to pass through a filter for collection. For example, the system may be configured so that the <0.22 um filtrate is then passed through a second filter of 100 kDa, allowing species such as EVs between 0.22 um and 100 kDa to be collected, and species smaller than 100 kDa to be pumped back into the bioreactor. Alternatively, the system may be configured to allow for medium in the bioreactor to be replenished and/or modified during growth of the culture. EVs collected by this method may be further purified and/or concentrated by ultracentrifugation or filtration as described above for filtered supernatants.
  • EVs obtained by methods provided herein may be further purified by size-based column chromatography, by affinity chromatography, by ion-exchange chromatography, and by gradient ultracentrifugation, using methods that may include, but are not limited to, use of a sucrose gradient or Optiprep gradient. Briefly, using a sucrose gradient method, if ammonium sulfate precipitation or ultracentrifugation were used to concentrate the filtered supernatants, pellets are resuspended in 60% sucrose, 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0. If filtration was used to concentrate the filtered supernatant, the concentrate is buffer exchanged into 60% sucrose, 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0, using an Amicon Ultra column. Samples are applied to a 35-60% discontinuous sucrose gradient and centrifuged at 200,000×g for 3-24 hours at 4° C. Briefly, using an Optiprep gradient method, if ammonium sulfate precipitation or ultracentrifugation were used to concentrate the filtered supernatants, pellets are resuspended in PBS and 3 volumes of 60% Optiprep are added to the sample. In some embodiments, if filtration was used to concentrate the filtered supernatant, the concentrate is diluted using 60% Optiprep to a final concentration of 35% Optiprep. Samples are applied to a 0-45% discontinuous Optiprep gradient and centrifuged at 200,000×g for 3-24 hours at 4° C., e.g. 4-24 hours at 4° C.
  • In some embodiments, to confirm sterility and isolation of the EV preparations, EVs are serially diluted onto agar medium used for routine culture of the bacteria being tested, and incubated using routine conditions. Non-sterile preparations are passed through a 0.22 um filter to exclude intact cells. To further increase purity, isolated EVs may be DNase or proteinase K treated.
  • In some embodiments, for preparation of EVs used for in vivo injections, purified EVs are processed as described previously (G. Norheim, et al. PLoS ONE. 10(9): e0134353 (2015)). Briefly, after sucrose gradient centrifugation, bands containing EVs are resuspended to a final concentration of 50 μg/mL in a solution containing 3% sucrose or other solution suitable for in vivo injection known to one skilled in the art. This solution may also contain adjuvant, for example aluminum hydroxide at a concentration of 0-0.5% (w/v). In some embodiments, for preparation of EVs used for in vivo injections, EVs in PBS are sterile-filtered to <0.22 um.
  • In certain embodiments, to make samples compatible with further testing (e.g. to remove sucrose prior to TEM imaging or in vitro assays), samples are buffer exchanged into PBS or 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0 using filtration (e.g. Amicon Ultra columns), dialysis, or ultracentrifugation (200,000×g, ≥3 hours, 4° C.) and resuspension.
  • In some embodiments, the sterility of the EV preparations can be confirmed by plating a portion of the EVs onto agar medium used for standard culture of the bacteria used in the generation of the EVs and incubating using standard conditions.
  • In some embodiments select EVs are isolated and enriched by chromatography and binding surface moieties on EVs. In other embodiments, select EVs are isolated and/or enriched by fluorescent cell sorting by methods using affinity reagents, chemical dyes, recombinant proteins or other methods known to one skilled in the art.
    • Bacterial Compositions
  • In certain aspects, provided herein are bacterial compositions comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacteria and/or a product of such bacteria (e.g., extracellular vesicles (EVs) and/or pharmaceutically active biomasses (PhABs)). In some embodiments, the bacteria is a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacteria is a strain comprising at least 90%, at least 91%, at least 92%, at least 93%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, or at least 99% sequence identity (e.g., at least 99.5% sequence identity, at least 99.6% sequence identity, at least 99.7% sequence identity, at least 99.8% sequence identity, at least 99.9% sequence identity) to the nucleotide sequence of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1. In some embodiments, the bacterial formulation comprises a bacterium and/or a combination of bacteria described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier (e.g., a pharmaceutical composition).
  • In certain embodiments, at least 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the bacterial composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1. In certain embodiments, substantially all of the bacteria in the bacterial composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1. In certain embodiments, the bacterial composition comprises at least 1×103 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×104 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×105 colony forming units (CFUs), 5×105 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 2×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 3×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 4×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 5×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 6×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 7×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 8×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 9×106 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 2×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 3×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 4×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 5×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 6×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 7×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 8×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 9×107 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 2×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 3×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 4×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 5×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 6×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 7×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 8×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 9×108 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×109 colony forming units (CFUs), 5×109 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×1010 colony forming units (CFUs) 5×1010 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×1011 colony forming units (CFUs) 5×1011 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×1012 colony forming units (CFUs) 5×1012 colony forming units (CFUs), 1×1013 colony forming units (CFUs) of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
  • In some embodiments, at least 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the composition are selected from among the bacterial species described herein. 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the bacteria in the composition are selected from among the bacterial strains described herein.
  • In some embodiments, the compositions described herein may include only one species of bacteria described herein or may include two or more species of the bacteria described herein. For example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20 of the species described herein, in any combination, can be included in the compositions provided herein.
  • In some embodiments, the bacterial composition comprises a killed bacterium, a live bacterium and/or an attenuated bacterium. Bacteria may be heat-killed by pasteurization, sterilization, high temperature treatment, spray cooking and/or spray drying (heat treatments can be performed at 500 C, 650 C, 850 C or a variety of other temperatures and/or a varied amount of time). Bacteria may also be killed or inactivated using γ-irradiation (gamma irradiation), exposure to UV light, formalin-inactivation, and/or freezing methods, or a combination thereof. For example, the bacteria may be exposed to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, or 50 kGy of radiation prior to administration. In some embodiments, bacteria are killed using gamma irradiation. In some embodiments, the bacteria are killed or inactivated using electron irradiation (e.g., beta radiation) or x-ray irradiation.
  • In some embodiments, the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using a method that leaves the disease modulating activity of the bacteria intact and the resulting bacterial components are used in the methods and compositions described herein. In some embodiments, the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using an antibiotic (e.g., using an antibiotic described herein). In some embodiments, the bacteria in the composition described herein are killed using UV irradiation.
  • Bacteria may be grown to various growth phases and tested for efficacy at different dilutions and at different points during the growth phase. For example, bacteria may be tested for efficacy following administration at stationary phase (including early or late stationary phase), or at various timepoints during exponential phase. In addition to inactivation by various methods, bacteria may be tested for efficacy using different ratios of live versus inactivated cells, or different ratios of cells at various growth phases.
  • In certain embodiments, provided herein are pharmaceutical compositions comprising Lachnospiraceae EVs and/or Lachnospiraceae bacteria, provided herein (e.g., an EV composition), such as those disclosed in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/578,559, hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, the EV composition comprises an EV and/or a combination of EVs described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions comprise Lachnospiraceae EVs substantially or entirely free of bacteria. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions comprise both Lachnospiraceae EVs and whole Lachnospiraceae bacteria (e.g., live bacteria, killed bacteria, attenuated bacteria). In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions comprise Lachnospiraceae bacteria that is substantially or entirely free of EVs.
  • In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8. 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8. 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8. 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8. 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae EV particles.
  • In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8. 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8. 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8. 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8. 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae EV particles.
  • In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises a certain ratio of Lachnospiraceae bacteria particles to Lachnospiraceae EV particles. The number of Lachnospiraceae bacteria particles can be based on actual particle number or (if the bacteria is live) the number of CFUs. The particle number can be established by combining a set number of purified Lachnospiraceae EVs with a set number of purified Lachnospiraceae bacterium, by modifying the growth conditions under which the Lachnospiraceae bacteria are cultured, or by modifying the Lachnospiraceae bacteria itself to produce more or fewer Lachnospiraceae EVs.
  • In some embodiments, to quantify the numbers of Lachnospiraceae EVs and/or Lachnospiraceae bacteria present in a bacterial sample, electron microscopy (e.g., EM of ultrathin frozen sections) can be used to visualize the vesicles and bacteria and count their relative numbers. Alternatively, combinations of nanoparticle tracking analysis (NTA), Coulter counting, and dynamic light scattering (DLS) or a combination of these techniques can be used. NTA and the Coulter counter count particles and show their sizes. DLS gives the size distribution of particles, but not the concentration. Bacteria frequently have diameters of 1-2 m. The full range is 0.2-20 um. Combined results from Coulter counting and NTA can reveal the numbers of bacteria in a given sample. Coulter counting reveals the numbers of particles with diameters of 0.7-10 um. NTA reveals the numbers of particles with diameters of 50-1400 nm. For most bacterial samples, the Coulter counter alone can reveal the number of bacteria in a sample. EVs are 20-250 nm in diameter. NTA will allow us to count the numbers of particles that are 50-250 nm in diameter. DLS reveals the distribution of particles of different diameters within an approximate range of 1 nm-3 um.
  • In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises no more than 1 Lachnospiraceae bacterium for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8. 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8. 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8. 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8. 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae EV particles.
  • In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8. 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8. 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8. 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8. 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae bacterium.
  • In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises about 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8. 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8. 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8. 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8. 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×10m, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae bacterium. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprises no more than 1 Lachnospiraceae EV particle for every 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8. 1.9, 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8. 2.9, 3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8. 3.9, 4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8. 4.9, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 5.7, 5.8. 5.9, 6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8. 6.9, 7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.7, 7.8. 7.9, 8, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 8.8. 8.9, 9, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8. 9.9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28. 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38. 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48. 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68. 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78. 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88. 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98. 99, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 950, 1×103, 2×103, 3×103, 4×103, 5×103, 6×103, 7×103, 8×103, 9×103, 1×104, 2×104, 3×104, 4×104, 5×104, 6×104, 7×104, 8×104, 9×104, 1×105, 2×105, 3×105, 4×105, 5×105, 6×105, 7×105, 8×105, 9×105, 1×106, 2×106, 3×106, 4×106, 5×106, 6×106, 7×106, 8×106, 9×106, 1×107, 2×107, 3×107, 4×107, 5×107, 6×107, 7×107, 8×107, 9×107, 1×108, 2×108, 3×108, 4×108, 5×108, 6×108, 7×108, 8×108, 9×108, 1×109, 2×109, 3×109, 4×109, 5×109, 6×109, 7×109, 8×109, 9×109, 1×1010, 2×1010, 3×1010, 4×1010, 5×1010, 6×1010, 7×1010, 8×1010, 9×1010, 1×1011, 2×1011, 3×1011, 4×1011, 5×1011, 6×1011, 7×1011, 8×1011, 9×1011, and/or 1×1012 Lachnospiraceae bacterium.
  • In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the particles in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae EVs.
  • In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the particles in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae bacteria.
  • In some embodiments, no more than 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the particles in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae EVs.
  • In some embodiments, no more than 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the particles in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae bacteria.
  • In some embodiments, about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the particles in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae EVs.
  • In some embodiments, about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the particles in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae bacteria.
  • In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the protein in the pharmaceutical composition is Lachnospiraceae EV protein.
  • In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the protein in the pharmaceutical composition is Lachnospiraceae bacteria protein.
  • In some embodiments, no more than 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the protein in the pharmaceutical composition is Lachnospiraceae EV protein.
  • In some embodiments, no more than 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the protein in the pharmaceutical composition is Lachnospiraceae bacteria protein.
  • In some embodiments, about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the protein in the pharmaceutical composition is Lachnospiraceae EV protein.
  • In some embodiments, about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the protein in the pharmaceutical composition is Lachnospiraceae bacteria protein.
  • In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the lipids in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae EV lipids.
  • In some embodiments, at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the lipids in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae bacteria lipids.
  • In some embodiments, no more than 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the lipids in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae EV lipids.
  • In some embodiments, no more than 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the lipids in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae bacteria lipids.
  • In some embodiments, about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the lipids in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae EV lipids.
  • In some embodiments, about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98% or 99% of the lipids in the pharmaceutical composition are Lachnospiraceae bacteria lipids.
  • In some embodiments, the Lachnospiraceae EVs in the pharmaceutical composition are purified from one or more other bacterial components. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition further comprises other bacterial components. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition comprise bacteria cells.
  • As described in detail below, the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for oral or rectal administration.
  • In some embodiments, the composition described herein may be a pharmaceutical composition, a dietary supplement, or a food product (e.g., a food or beverage). In some embodiments, the food product is an animal feed.
  • In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition for oral administration described herein comprises an additional component that enables efficient delivery of the bacteria to the colon. In some embodiments, pharmaceutical preparation that enables the delivery of the bacteria to the colon can be used. Examples of such formulations include pH sensitive compositions, such as buffered sachet formulations or enteric polymers that release their contents when the pH becomes alkaline after the enteric polymers pass through the stomach. When a pH sensitive composition is used for formulating the pharmaceutical preparation, the pH sensitive composition can be a polymer whose pH threshold of the decomposition of the composition is between about 6.8 and about 7.5.
  • Another embodiment of a pharmaceutical composition useful for delivery of the bacteria to the colon is one that ensures the delivery to the colon by delaying the release of the bacteria by approximately 3 to 5 hours, which corresponds to the small intestinal transit time. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition for delayed release includes a hydrogel shell. The hydrogel is hydrated and swells upon contact with gastrointestinal fluid, with the result that the contents are effectively released (released predominantly in the colon). Delayed release dosage units include bacteria-containing compositions having a material which coats or selectively coats the bacteria. Examples of such a selective coating material include in vivo degradable polymers, gradually hydrolyzable polymers, gradually water-soluble polymers, and/or enzyme degradable polymers. A wide variety of coating materials for efficiently delaying the release is available and includes, for example, cellulose-based polymers such as hydroxypropyl cellulose, acrylic acid polymers and copolymers such as methacrylic acid polymers and copolymers, and vinyl polymers and copolymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone.
  • Examples of composition enabling the delivery to the colon further include bioadhesive compositions which specifically adhere to the colonic mucosal membrane (for example, a polymer described in the specification of U.S. Pat. No. 6,368,586, hereby incorporated by reference) and compositions into which a protease inhibitor is incorporated for protecting particularly a biopharmaceutical preparation in the gastrointestinal tracts from decomposition due to an activity of a protease.
  • An example of a system enabling the delivery to the colon is a system of delivering a composition to the colon by pressure change in such a way that the contents are released by utilizing pressure change caused by generation of gas in bacterial fermentation at a distal portion of the stomach. Such a system is not particularly limited, and a more specific example thereof is a capsule which has contents dispersed in a suppository base and which is coated with a hydrophobic polymer (for example, ethyl cellulose).
  • Another example of the system enabling the delivery to the colon is a system of delivering a composition to the colon, the system being specifically decomposed by an enzyme (for example, a carbohydrate hydrolase or a carbohydrate reductase) present in the colon. Such a system is not particularly limited, and more specific examples thereof include systems which use food components such as non-starch polysaccharides, amylose, xanthan gum, and azopolymers.
  • In some embodiments, Probiotic formulations containing a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 are provided as encapsulated, enteric coated, or powder forms, with doses ranging up to 1011 cfu (e.g., up to 1010 cfu). In some embodiments, the composition comprises 5×1011 cfu of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 and 10% (w/w) corn starch in a capsule. The capsule is enteric coated for duodenal release at pH5.5 In some embodiments, the capsule is enteric coated for duodenal release at pH 5.5. In some embodiments, the composition comprises a powder of freeze-dried bacteria of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1 which is deemed “Qualified Presumption of Safety” (QPS) status. In some embodiments, the composition is stable at frozen or refrigerated temperature.
  • Methods for producing microbial compositions may include three main processing steps. The steps are: organism banking, organism production, and preservation. In certain embodiments, a sample that contains an abundance of the bacterial strain (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1) may be cultured by avoiding an isolation step.
  • For banking, the strains included in the microbial composition may be (1) isolated directly from a specimen or taken from a banked stock, (2) optionally cultured on a nutrient agar or broth that supports growth to generate viable biomass, and (3) the biomass optionally preserved in multiple aliquots in long-term storage.
  • In embodiments using a culturing step, the agar or broth may contain nutrients that provide essential elements and specific factors that enable growth. An example would be a medium composed of 20 g/L glucose, 10 g/L yeast extract, 10 g/L soy peptone, 2 g/L citric acid, 1.5 g/L sodium phosphate monobasic, 100 mg/L ferric ammonium citrate, 80 mg/L magnesium sulfate, 10 mg/L hemin chloride, 2 mg/L calcium chloride, 1 mg/L menadione. Alternatively, the medium is composed of 10 g/L beef extract, 10 g/L peptone, 5 g/L sodium chloride, 5 g/L dextrose, 3 g/L yeast extract, 3 g/L sodium acetate, 1 g/L soluble starch, and 0.5 g/L L-cysteine HCl, at pH 6.8. A variety of microbiological media and variations are well known in the art (e.g., R. M. Atlas, Handbook of Microbiological Media (2010) CRC Press). Culture media can be added to the culture at the start, may be added during the culture, or may be intermittently/continuously flowed through the culture. The strains in the bacterial composition may be cultivated alone, as a subset of the microbial composition, or as an entire collection comprising the microbial composition. As an example, a first strain may be cultivated together with a second strain in a mixed continuous culture, at a dilution rate lower than the maximum growth rate of either cell to prevent the culture from washing out of the cultivation.
  • The inoculated culture is incubated under favorable conditions for a time sufficient to build biomass. For microbial compositions for human use this is often at 37° C. temperature, pH, and other parameter with values similar to the normal human niche. The environment may be actively controlled, passively controlled (e.g., via buffers), or allowed to drift. For example, for anaerobic bacterial compositions, an anoxic/reducing environment may be employed. This can be accomplished by addition of reducing agents such as cysteine to the broth, and/or stripping it of oxygen. As an example, a culture of a bacterial composition may be grown at 37° C., pH 7, in the medium above, pre-reduced with 1 g/L cysteine-HCl.
  • When the culture has generated sufficient biomass, it may be preserved for banking. The organisms may be placed into a chemical milieu that protects from freezing (adding ‘cryoprotectants’), drying (‘lyoprotectants’), and/or osmotic shock (‘osmoprotectants’), dispensing into multiple (optionally identical) containers to create a uniform bank, and then treating the culture for preservation. Containers are generally impermeable and have closures that assure isolation from the environment. Cryopreservation treatment is accomplished by freezing a liquid at ultra-low temperatures (e.g., at or below −80° C.). Dried preservation removes water from the culture by evaporation (in the case of spray drying or ‘cool drying’) or by sublimation (e.g., for freeze drying, spray freeze drying). Removal of water improves long-term microbial composition storage stability at temperatures elevated above cryogenic conditions. If the microbial composition comprises, for example, spore forming species and results in the production of spores, the final composition may be purified by additional means such as density gradient centrifugation and preserved using the techniques [?]described above[?]. Microbial composition banking may be done by culturing and preserving the strains individually, or by mixing the strains together to create a combined bank. As an example of cryopreservation, a microbial composition culture may be harvested by centrifugation to pellet the cells from the culture medium, the supernatant decanted and replaced with fresh culture broth containing 15% glycerol. The culture can then be aliquoted into 1 mL cryotubes, sealed, and placed at −80° C. for long-term viability retention. This procedure achieves acceptable viability upon recovery from frozen storage.
  • Microbial production may be conducted using similar culture steps to banking, including medium composition and culture conditions described above. It may be conducted at larger scales of operation, especially for clinical development or commercial production. At larger scales, there may be several subcultivations of the microbial composition prior to the final cultivation. At the end of cultivation, the culture is harvested to enable further formulation into a dosage form for administration. This can involve concentration, removal of undesirable medium components, and/or introduction into a chemical milieu that preserves the microbial composition and renders it acceptable for administration via the chosen route. For example, a microbial composition may be cultivated to a concentration of 1010 CFU/mL, then concentrated 20-fold by tangential flow microfiltration; the spent medium may be exchanged by diafiltering with a preservative medium consisting of 2% gelatin, 100 mM trehalose, and 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer. The suspension can then be freeze-dried to a powder and titrated.
  • After drying, the powder may be blended to an appropriate potency, and mixed with other cultures and/or a filler such as microcrystalline cellulose for consistency and ease of handling, and the bacterial composition formulated as provided herein.
  • In certain aspects, provided are bacterial compositions for administration subjects. In some embodiments, the bacterial compositions are combined with additional active and/or inactive materials in order to produce a final product, which may be in single dosage unit or in a multi-dose format.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least one carbohydrate. A “carbohydrate” refers to a sugar or polymer of sugars. The terms “saccharide,” “polysaccharide,” “carbohydrate,” and “oligosaccharide” may be used interchangeably. Most carbohydrates are aldehydes or ketones with many hydroxyl groups, usually one on each carbon atom of the molecule. Carbohydrates generally have the molecular formula CnH2nOn. A carbohydrate may be a monosaccharide, a disaccharide, trisaccharide, oligosaccharide, or polysaccharide. The most basic carbohydrate is a monosaccharide, such as glucose, sucrose, galactose, mannose, ribose, arabinose, xylose, and fructose. Disaccharides are two joined monosaccharides. Exemplary disaccharides include sucrose, maltose, cellobiose, and lactose. Typically, an oligosaccharide includes between three and six monosaccharide units (e.g., raffinose, stachyose), and polysaccharides include six or more monosaccharide units. Exemplary polysaccharides include starch, glycogen, and cellulose. Carbohydrates may contain modified saccharide units such as 2′-deoxyribose wherein a hydroxyl group is removed, 2′-fluororibose wherein a hydroxyl group is replaced with a fluorine, or N-acetylglucosamine, a nitrogen-containing form of glucose (e.g., 2′-fluororibose, deoxyribose, and hexose). Carbohydrates may exist in many different forms, for example, conformers, cyclic forms, acyclic forms, stereoisomers, tautomers, anomers, and isomers.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least one lipid. As used herein, a “lipid” includes fats, oils, triglycerides, cholesterol, phospholipids, fatty acids in any form including free fatty acids. Fats, oils and fatty acids can be saturated, unsaturated (cis or trans) or partially unsaturated (cis or trans). In some embodiments the lipid comprises at least one fatty acid selected from lauric acid (12:0), myristic acid (14:0), palmitic acid (16:0), palmitoleic acid (16:1), margaric acid (17:0), heptadecenoic acid (17:1), stearic acid (18:0), oleic acid (18:1), linoleic acid (18:2), linolenic acid (18:3), octadecatetraenoic acid (18:4), arachidic acid (20:0), eicosenoic acid (20:1), eicosadienoic acid (20:2), eicosatetraenoic acid (20:4), eicosapentaenoic acid (20:5) (EPA), docosanoic acid (22:0), docosenoic acid (22:1), docosapentaenoic acid (22:5), docosahexaenoic acid (22:6) (DHA), and tetracosanoic acid (24:0). In some embodiments the composition comprises at least one modified lipid, for example a lipid that has been modified by cooking.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least one supplemental mineral or mineral source. Examples of minerals include, without limitation: chloride, sodium, calcium, iron, chromium, copper, iodine, zinc, magnesium, manganese, molybdenum, phosphorus, potassium, and selenium. Suitable forms of any of the foregoing minerals include soluble mineral salts, slightly soluble mineral salts, insoluble mineral salts, chelated minerals, mineral complexes, non-reactive minerals such as carbonyl minerals, and reduced minerals, and combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises at least one supplemental vitamin. The at least one vitamin can be fat-soluble or water soluble vitamins. Suitable vitamins include but are not limited to vitamin C, vitamin A, vitamin E, vitamin B12, vitamin K, riboflavin, niacin, vitamin D, vitamin B6, folic acid, pyridoxine, thiamine, pantothenic acid, and biotin. Suitable forms of any of the foregoing are salts of the vitamin, derivatives of the vitamin, compounds having the same or similar activity of the vitamin, and metabolites of the vitamin.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises an excipient. Non-limiting examples of suitable excipients include a buffering agent, a preservative, a stabilizer, a binder, a compaction agent, a lubricant, a dispersion enhancer, a disintegration agent, a flavoring agent, a sweetener, and a coloring agent.
  • In some embodiments, the excipient is a buffering agent. Non-limiting examples of suitable buffering agents include sodium citrate, magnesium carbonate, magnesium bicarbonate, calcium carbonate, and calcium bicarbonate.
  • In some embodiments, the excipient comprises a preservative. Non-limiting examples of suitable preservatives include antioxidants, such as alpha-tocopherol and ascorbate, and antimicrobials, such as parabens, chlorobutanol, and phenol.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises a binder as an excipient. Non-limiting examples of suitable binders include starches, pregelatinized starches, gelatin, polyvinylpyrolidone, cellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, ethylcellulose, polyacrylamides, polyvinyloxoazolidone, polyvinylalcohols, C12-C18 fatty acid alcohol, polyethylene glycol, polyols, saccharides, oligosaccharides, and combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises a lubricant as an excipient. Non-limiting examples of suitable lubricants include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, zinc stearate, hydrogenated vegetable oils, sterotex, polyoxyethylene monostearate, talc, polyethyleneglycol, sodium benzoate, sodium lauryl sulfate, magnesium lauryl sulfate, and light mineral oil.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises a dispersion enhancer as an excipient. Non-limiting examples of suitable dispersants include starch, alginic acid, polyvinylpyrrolidones, guar gum, kaolin, bentonite, purified wood cellulose, sodium starch glycolate, isoamorphous silicate, and microcrystalline cellulose as high HLB emulsifier surfactants.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises a disintegrant as an excipient. In some embodiments the disintegrant is a non-effervescent disintegrant. Non-limiting examples of suitable non-effervescent disintegrants include starches such as corn starch, potato starch, pregelatinized and modified starches thereof, sweeteners, clays, such as bentonite, micro-crystalline cellulose, alginates, sodium starch glycolate, gums such as agar, guar, locust bean, karaya, pectin, and tragacanth. In some embodiments the disintegrant is an effervescent disintegrant. Non-limiting examples of suitable effervescent disintegrants include sodium bicarbonate in combination with citric acid, and sodium bicarbonate in combination with tartaric acid.
  • In some embodiments, the bacterial formulation comprises an enteric coating or micro encapsulation. In certain embodiments, the enteric coating or micro encapsulation improves targeting to a desired region of the gastrointestinal tract. For example, in certain embodiments, the bacterial composition comprises an enteric coating and/or microcapsules that dissolves at a pH associated with a particular region of the gastrointestinal tract. In some embodiments, the enteric coating and/or microcapsules dissolve at a pH of about 5.5-6.2 to release in the duodenum, at a pH value of about 7.2-7.5 to release in the ileum, and/or at a pH value of about 5.6-6.2 to release in the colon. Exemplary enteric coatings and microcapsules are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2016/0022592, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • In some embodiments, the composition is a food product (e.g., a food or beverage) such as a health food or beverage, a food or beverage for infants, a food or beverage for pregnant women, athletes, senior citizens or other specified group, a functional food, a beverage, a food or beverage for specified health use, a dietary supplement, a food or beverage for patients, or an animal feed. Specific examples of the foods and beverages include various beverages such as juices, refreshing beverages, tea beverages, drink preparations, jelly beverages, and functional beverages; alcoholic beverages such as beers; carbohydrate-containing foods such as rice food products, noodles, breads, and pastas; paste products such as fish hams, sausages, paste products of seafood; retort pouch products such as curries, food dressed with a thick starchy sauces, and Chinese soups; soups; dairy products such as milk, dairy beverages, ice creams, cheeses, and yogurts; fermented products such as fermented soybean pastes, yogurts, fermented beverages, and pickles; bean products; various confectionery products, including biscuits, cookies, and the like, candies, chewing gums, gummies, cold desserts including jellies, cream caramels, and frozen desserts; instant foods such as instant soups and instant soy-bean soups; microwavable foods; and the like. Further, the examples also include health foods and beverages prepared in the forms of powders, granules, tablets, capsules, liquids, pastes, and jellies.
  • In certain embodiments, the bacteria disclosed herein are administered in conjunction with a prebiotic to the subject. Prebiotics are carbohydrates which are generally indigestible by a host animal and are selectively fermented or metabolized by bacteria. Prebiotics may be short-chain carbohydrates (e.g., oligosaccharides) and/or simple sugars (e.g., mono- and di-saccharides) and/or mucins (heavily glycosylated proteins) that alter the composition or metabolism of a microbiome in the host. The short chain carbohydrates are also referred to as oligosaccharides, and usually contain from 2 or 3 and up to 8, 9, 10, 15 or more sugar moieties. When prebiotics are introduced to a host, the prebiotics affect the bacteria within the host and do not directly affect the host. In certain aspects, a prebiotic composition can selectively stimulate the growth and/or activity of one of a limited number of bacteria in a host. Prebiotics include oligosaccharides such as fructooligosaccharides (FOS) (including inulin), galactooligosaccharides (GOS), trans-galactooligosaccharides, xylooligosaccharides (XOS), chitooligosaccharides (COS), soy oligosaccharides (e.g., stachyose and raffinose) gentiooligosaccharides, isomaltooligosaccharides, mannooligosaccharides, maltooligosaccharides and mannanoligosaccharides. Oligosaccharides are not necessarily single components, and can be mixtures containing oligosaccharides with different degrees of oligomerization, sometimes including the parent disaccharide and the monomeric sugars. Various types of oligosaccharides are found as natural components in many common foods, including fruits, vegetables, milk, and honey. Specific examples of oligosaccharides are lactulose, lactosucrose, palatinose, glycosyl sucrose, guar gum, gum Arabic, tagalose, amylose, amylopectin, pectin, xylan, and cyclodextrins. Prebiotics may also be purified or chemically or enzymatically synthesized.
    • Production of PhABs
  • In certain aspects, the PhABs described herein can be prepared using any method known in the art.
  • In some embodiments, the PhABs described herein are prepared by fractionation. Bacterial cells and/or supernatants from cultured bacteria cells are fractionated into various pharmacologically active biomass (PhABs) and/or products derived therefrom. Bacterial cells and/or supernatants are fractionated using materials and methods known in the art (see e.g. Sandrini et al. Fractionation by ultracentrifugation of gram negative cytoplasmic and membrane proteins. 2014. Bio-Protocol. 4(21); Scholler et al. Protoplast and cytoplasmic membrane preparations from Streptococcus sanguis and Streptococcus mutans. 1983. J Gen Micro. 129: 3271-3279; Thein et al. Efficient subfractionation of gram-negative bacteria for proteomics studies. 2010. Am Chem Society. 9: 6135-6147; Hobb et al. Evaluation of procedures for outer membrane isolation from Campylobacter jejuni. 2009. 155(Pt. 3): 979-988).
  • Additionally, PhABs obtained by methods provided herein may be further purified by size based column chromatography, by affinity chromatography, and by gradient ultracentrifugation, using methods that may include, but are not limited to, use of a sucrose gradient or Optiprep gradient. Briefly, using a sucrose gradient method, if ammonium sulfate precipitation or ultracentrifugation were used to concentrate the filtered supernatants, pellets are resuspended in 60% sucrose, 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0. If filtration was used to concentrate the filtered supernatant, the concentrate is buffer exchanged into 60% sucrose, 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0, using an Amicon Ultra column. Samples are applied to a 35-60% discontinuous sucrose gradient and centrifuged at 200,000×g for 3-24 hours at 4° C. Briefly, using an Optiprep gradient method, if ammonium sulfate precipitation or ultracentrifugation were used to concentrate the filtered supernatants, pellets are resuspended in 35% Optiprep in PBS. In some embodiments, if filtration was used to concentrate the filtered supernatant, the concentrate is diluted using 60% Optiprep to a final concentration of 35% Optiprep. Samples are applied to a 35-60% discontinuous sucrose gradient and centrifuged at 200,000×g for 3-24 hours at 4° C.
  • In some embodiments, to confirm sterility and isolation of the PhAB preparations, PhABs are serially diluted onto agar medium used for routine culture of the bacteria being tested, and incubated using routine conditions. Non-sterile preparations are passed through a 0.22 um filter to exclude intact cells. To further increase purity, isolated PhABs may be DNase or proteinase K treated.
  • In some embodiments, for preparation of PhABs used for in vivo injections, purified PhABs are processed as described previously (G. Norheim, et al. PLoS ONE. 10(9): e0134353 (2015)). Briefly, after sucrose gradient centrifugation, bands containing PhABs are resuspended to a final concentration of 50 μg/mL in a solution containing 3% sucrose or other solution suitable for in vivo injection known to one skilled in the art. This solution may also contain adjuvant, for example aluminum hydroxide at a concentration of 0-0.5% (w/v).
  • In certain embodiments, to make samples compatible with further testing (e.g. to remove sucrose prior to TEM imaging or in vitro assays), samples are buffer exchanged into PBS or 30 mM Tris, pH 8.0 using filtration (e.g. Amicon Ultra columns), dialysis, or ultracentrifugation (200,000×g, ≥3 hours, 4° C.) and resuspension.
  • In some embodiments, the sterility of the PhAB preparations can be confirmed by plating a portion of the PhABs onto agar medium used for standard culture of the bacteria used in the generation of the PhABs and incubating using standard conditions.
  • In some embodiments select PhABs are isolated and enriched by chromatography and binding surface moieties on PhABs. In other embodiments, select PhABs are isolated and/or enriched by fluorescent cell sorting by methods using affinity reagents, chemical dyes, recombinant proteins or other methods known to one skilled in the art.
    • Administration
  • In certain aspects, provided herein is a method of delivering a bacterium and/or a bacterial composition described herein to a subject. In some embodiments of the methods provided herein, the bacteria are administered in conjunction with the administration of an additional therapeutic. In some embodiments, the bacteria is co-formulated in a pharmaceutical composition with the additional therapeutic. In some embodiments, the bacteria is co-administered with the additional therapeutic. In some embodiments, the additional therapeutic is administered to the subject before administration of the bacteria (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 or 55 minutes before, about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23 hours before, or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14 days before). In some embodiments, the additional therapeutic is administered to the subject after administration of the bacteria (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 or 55 minutes after, about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 or 23 hours after, or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14 days after). In some embodiments, the same mode of delivery is used to deliver both the bacteria and the additional therapeutic. In some embodiments different modes of delivery are used to administer the bacteria and the additional therapeutic. For example, in some embodiments, the bacteria is administered orally while the additional therapeutic is administered via injection (e.g., an intravenous, intramuscular and/or intratumoral injection).
  • In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions, dosage forms, and kits described herein can be administered in conjunction with any other conventional anti-immune disorder treatment. These treatments may be applied as necessary and/or as indicated and may occur before, concurrent with or after administration of the pharmaceutical compositions, dosage forms, and kits described herein.
  • The dosage regimen can be any of a variety of methods and amounts, and can be determined by one skilled in the art according to known clinical factors. As is known in the medical arts, dosages for any one patient can depend on many factors, including the subject's species, size, body surface area, age, sex, immunocompetence, and general health, the particular microorganism to be administered, duration and route of administration, the kind and stage of the disease, for example, tumor size, and other compounds such as drugs being administered concurrently. In addition to the above factors, such levels can be affected by the infectivity of the microorganism, and the nature of the microorganism, as can be determined by one skilled in the art. In the present methods, appropriate minimum dosage levels of microorganisms can be levels sufficient for the microorganism to survive, grow and replicate. The methods of treatment described herein may be suitable for the treatment of an immune disorder (e.g., an autoimmune disease, an inflammatory disease, an allergy). The dose of the pharmaceutical compositions described herein may be appropriately set or adjusted in accordance with the dosage form, the route of administration, the degree or stage of a target disease, and the like. For example, the general effective dose of the agents may range between 0.01 mg/kg body weight/day and 1000 mg/kg body weight/day, between 0.1 mg/kg body weight/day and 1000 mg/kg body weight/day, 0.5 mg/kg body weight/day and 500 mg/kg body weight/day, 1 mg/kg body weight/day and 100 mg/kg body weight/day, or between 5 mg/kg body weight/day and 50 mg/kg body weight/day. The effective dose may be 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 500, or 1000 mg/kg body weight/day or more, but the dose is not limited thereto.
  • In some embodiments, the dose administered to a subject is sufficient to prevent the immune disorder, delay its onset, or slow or stop its progression or prevent a relapse of the immune disorder. One skilled in the art will recognize that dosage will depend upon a variety of factors including the strength of the particular compound employed, as well as the age, species, condition, and body weight of the subject. The size of the dose will also be determined by the route, timing, and frequency of administration as well as the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects that might accompany the administration of a particular compound and the desired physiological effect.
  • Suitable doses and dosage regimens can be determined by conventional range-finding techniques known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Generally, treatment is initiated with smaller dosages, which are less than the optimum dose of the compound. Thereafter, the dosage is increased by small increments until the optimum effect under the circumstances is reached. An effective dosage and treatment protocol can be determined by routine and conventional means, starting e.g., with a low dose in laboratory animals and then increasing the dosage while monitoring the effects, and systematically varying the dosage regimen as well. Animal studies are commonly used to determine the maximal tolerable dose (“MTD”) of bioactive agent per kilogram weight. Those skilled in the art regularly extrapolate doses for efficacy, while avoiding toxicity, in other species, including humans.
  • In accordance with the above, in therapeutic applications, the dosages of the active agents used in accordance with the invention vary depending on the active agent, the age, weight, and clinical condition of the recipient patient, and the experience and judgment of the clinician or practitioner administering therapy, among other factors affecting the selected dosage. Generally, the dose should be sufficient to result in slowing, and preferably regressing, the advancement of an immune disorder. Separate administrations can include any number of two or more administrations (e.g., doses), including two, three, four, five or six administrations. One skilled in the art can readily determine the number of administrations to perform, or the desirability of performing one or more additional administrations, according to methods known in the art for monitoring therapeutic methods and other monitoring methods provided herein. In some embodiments, the doses may be separated by at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days or 1, 2, 3, or 4 weeks. Accordingly, the methods provided herein include methods of providing to the subject one or more administrations of a bacterium, where the number of administrations can be determined by monitoring the subject, and, based on the results of the monitoring, determining whether or not to provide one or more additional administrations. Deciding on whether or not to provide one or more additional administrations can be based on a variety of monitoring results, including, but not limited to, indication of tumor growth or inhibition of tumor growth, appearance of new metastases or inhibition of metastasis, the subject's anti-bacterium antibody titer, the subject's anti-tumor antibody titer, the overall health of the subject and/or the weight of the subject.
  • The time period between administrations can be any of a variety of time periods. The time period between administrations can be a function of any of a variety of factors, including monitoring steps, as described in relation to the number of administrations, the time period for a subject to mount an immune response and/or the time period for a subject to clear the bacteria from normal tissue. In one example, the time period can be a function of the time period for a subject to mount an immune response; for example, the time period can be more than the time period for a subject to mount an immune response, such as more than about one week, more than about ten days, more than about two weeks, or more than about a month; in another example, the time period can be less than the time period for a subject to mount an immune response, such as less than about one week, less than about ten days, less than about two weeks, or less than about a month. In another example, the time period can be a function of the time period for a subject to clear the bacteria from normal tissue; for example, the time period can be more than the time period for a subject to clear the bacteria from normal tissue, such as more than about a day, more than about two days, more than about three days, more than about five days, or more than about a week.
  • In some embodiments, the delivery of an immune disorder therapeutic in combination with the bacteria described herein reduces the adverse effects and/or improves the efficacy of the immune disorder therapeutic.
  • The effective dose of an immune disorder therapeutic described herein is the amount of therapeutic agent that is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, with the least toxicity to the patient. The effective dosage level can be identified using the methods described herein and will depend upon a variety of pharmacokinetic factors including the activity of the particular compositions administered, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular compound being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compositions employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts. In general, an effective dose of an immune disorder therapy will be the amount of therapeutic agent, which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above.
  • The toxicity of an immune disorder therapy is the level of adverse effects experienced by the subject during and following treatment. Adverse events associated with immune disorder therapy toxicity include, but are not limited to, abdominal pain, acid indigestion, acid reflux, allergic reactions, alopecia, anaphylaxis, anemia, anxiety, lack of appetite, arthralgias, asthenia, ataxia, azotemia, loss of balance, bone pain, bleeding, blood clots, low blood pressure, elevated blood pressure, difficulty breathing, bronchitis, bruising, low white blood cell count, low red blood cell count, low platelet count, cardiotoxicity, cystitis, hemorrhagic cystitis, arrhythmias, heart valve disease, cardiomyopathy, coronary artery disease, cataracts, central neurotoxicity, cognitive impairment, confusion, conjunctivitis, constipation, coughing, cramping, cystitis, deep vein thrombosis, dehydration, depression, diarrhea, dizziness, dry mouth, dry skin, dyspepsia, dyspnea, edema, electrolyte imbalance, esophagitis, fatigue, loss of fertility, fever, flatulence, flushing, gastric reflux, gastroesophageal reflux disease, genital pain, granulocytopenia, gynecomastia, glaucoma, hair loss, hand-foot syndrome, headache, hearing loss, heart failure, heart palpitations, heartburn, hematoma, hemorrhagic cystitis, hepatotoxicity, hyperamylasemia, hypercalcemia, hyperchloremia, hyperglycemia, hyperkalemia, hyperlipasemia, hypermagnesemia, hypernatremia, hyperphosphatemia, hyperpigmentation, hypertriglyceridemia, hyperuricemia, hypoalbuminemia, hypocalcemia, hypochloremia, hypoglycemia, hypokalemia, hypomagnesemia, hyponatremia, hypophosphatemia, impotence, infection, injection site reactions, insomnia, iron deficiency, itching, joint pain, kidney failure, leukopenia, liver dysfunction, memory loss, menopause, mouth sores, mucositis, muscle pain, myalgias, myelosuppression, myocarditis, neutropenic fever, nausea, nephrotoxicity, neutropenia, nosebleeds, numbness, ototoxicity, pain, palmar-plantar erythrodysesthesia, pancytopenia, pericarditis, peripheral neuropathy, pharyngitis, photophobia, photosensitivity, pneumonia, pneumonitis, proteinuria, pulmonary embolus, pulmonary fibrosis, pulmonary toxicity, rash, rapid heart beat, rectal bleeding, restlessness, rhinitis, seizures, shortness of breath, sinusitis, thrombocytopenia, tinnitus, urinary tract infection, vaginal bleeding, vaginal dryness, vertigo, water retention, weakness, weight loss, weight gain, and xerostomia. In general, toxicity is acceptable if the benefits to the subject achieved through therapy outweigh the adverse events experienced by the subject due to therapy.
  • In some embodiments, the administration of the bacterial composition treats the immune disorder.
    • Therapeutic Agents
  • In certain aspects, the methods provided herein include the administration to a subject of a bacterium and/or a bacterial composition described herein (e.g., a bacterial composition comprising a bacterial strain listed in Table 1) either alone or in combination with another therapeutic. In some embodiments, the bacterial composition and the other therapy can be administered to the subject in any order. In some embodiments, the bacterial composition and the other therapy are administered conjointly.
  • In some embodiments the bacterium is administered to the subject before the additional therapeutic is administered (e.g., at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 hours before or at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days before). In some embodiments the bacterium is administered to the subject after the additional therapeutic is administered (e.g., at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 hours after or at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days after). In some embodiments, the bacterium and the additional therapeutic are administered to the subject simultaneously or nearly simultaneously (e.g., administrations occur within an hour of each other). In some embodiments, the subject is administered an antibiotic before the bacterium is administered to the subject (e.g., at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 hours before or at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days before). In some embodiments, the subject is administered an antibiotic after the bacterium is administered to the subject (e.g., at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 hours before or at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 days after). In some embodiments, the bacterium and the antibiotic are administered to the subject simultaneously or nearly simultaneously (e.g., administrations occur within an hour of each other).
  • In certain embodiments, the subject may undergo surgery. Types of surgery include but are not limited to preventative, diagnostic or staging, curative and palliative surgery.
  • In some embodiments, the additional therapeutic is an antibiotic. For example, if the presence of a immune-disorder-associated bacteria and/or an immune-disorder-associated microbiome profile is detected according to the methods provided herein, antibiotics can be administered to eliminate the immune-disorder-associated bacteria from the subject. “Antibiotics” broadly refers to compounds capable of inhibiting or preventing a bacterial infection. Antibiotics can be classified in a number of ways, including their use for specific infections, their mechanism of action, their bioavailability, or their spectrum of target microbe (e.g., Gram-negative vs. Gram-positive bacteria, aerobic vs. anaerobic bacteria, etc.) and these may be used to kill specific bacteria in specific areas of the host (“niches”) (Leekha, et al 2011. General Principles of Antimicrobial Therapy. Mayo Clin Proc. 86(2): 156-167). In certain embodiments, antibiotics can be used to selectively target bacteria of a specific niche. In some embodiments, antibiotics known to treat a particular infection that includes an immune disorder niche may be used to target immune-disorder-associated microbes, including immune-disorder-associated bacteria in that niche. In other embodiments, antibiotics are administered after the bacterial treatment. In some embodiments, antibiotics are administered after the bacterial treatment to remove the engraftment.
  • In some aspects, antibiotics can be selected based on their bactericidal or bacteriostatic properties. Bactericidal antibiotics include mechanisms of action that disrupt the cell wall (e.g., β-lactams), the cell membrane (e.g., daptomycin), or bacterial DNA (e.g., fluoroquinolones). Bacteriostatic agents inhibit bacterial replication and include sulfonamides, tetracyclines, and macrolides, and act by inhibiting protein synthesis. Furthermore, while some drugs can be bactericidal in certain organisms and bacteriostatic in others, knowing the target organism allows one skilled in the art to select an antibiotic with the appropriate properties. In certain treatment conditions, bacteriostatic antibiotics inhibit the activity of bactericidal antibiotics. Thus, in certain embodiments, bactericidal and bacteriostatic antibiotics are not combined.
  • Antibiotics include, but are not limited to aminoglycosides, ansamycins, carbacephems, carbapenems, cephalosporins, glycopeptides, lincosamides, lipopeptides, macrolides, monobactams, nitrofurans, oxazolidonones, penicillins, polypeptide antibiotics, quinolones, fluoroquinolone, sulfonamides, tetracyclines, and anti-mycobacterial compounds, and combinations thereof.
  • Aminoglycosides include, but are not limited to Amikacin, Gentamicin, Kanamycin, Neomycin, Netilmicin, Tobramycin, Paromomycin, and Spectinomycin. Aminoglycosides are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria, such as Escherichia coli, Klebsiella, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, and Francisella tularensis, and against certain aerobic bacteria but less effective against obligate/facultative anaerobes Aminoglycosides are believed to bind to the bacterial 30S or 50S ribosomal subunit thereby inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis.
  • Ansamycins include, but are not limited to, Geldanamycin, Herbimycin, Rifamycin, and Streptovaricin. Geldanamycin and Herbimycin are believed to inhibit or alter the function of Heat Shock Protein 90.
  • Carbacephems include, but are not limited to, Loracarbef. Carbacephems are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis.
  • Carbapenems include, but are not limited to, Ertapenem, Doripenem, Imipenem/Cilastatin, and Meropenem. Carbapenems are bactericidal for both Gram-positive and Gram-negative bacteria as broad-spectrum antibiotics. Carbapenems are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis.
  • Cephalosporins include, but are not limited to, Cefadroxil, Cefazolin, Cefalotin, Cefalothin, Cefalexin, Cefaclor, Cefamandole, Cefoxitin, Cefprozil, Cefuroxime, Cefixime, Cefdinir, Cefditoren, Cefoperazone, Cefotaxime, Cefpodoxime, Ceftazidime, Ceftibuten, Ceftizoxime, Ceftriaxone, Cefepime, Ceftaroline fosamil, and Ceftobiprole. Selected Cephalosporins are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria and against Gram-positive bacteria, including Pseudomonas, certain Cephalosporins are effective against methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA). Cephalosporins are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis by disrupting synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • Glycopeptides include, but are not limited to, Teicoplanin, Vancomycin, and Telavancin. Glycopeptides are effective, e.g., against aerobic and anaerobic Gram-positive bacteria including MRSA and Clostridium difficile. Glycopeptides are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis by disrupting synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • Lincosamides include, but are not limited to, Clindamycin and Lincomycin. Lincosamides are effective, e.g., against anaerobic bacteria, as well as Staphylococcus, and Streptococcus. Lincosamides are believed to bind to the bacterial 50S ribosomal subunit thereby inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis.
  • Lipopeptides include, but are not limited to, Daptomycin. Lipopeptides are effective, e.g., against Gram-positive bacteria. Lipopeptides are believed to bind to the bacterial membrane and cause rapid depolarization.
  • Macrolides include, but are not limited to, Azithromycin, Clarithromycin, Dirithromycin, Erythromycin, Roxithromycin, Troleandomycin, Telithromycin, and Spiramycin. Macrolides are effective, e.g., against Streptococcus and Mycoplasma. Macrolides are believed to bind to the bacterial or 50S ribosomal subunit, thereby inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis.
  • Monobactams include, but are not limited to, Aztreonam. Monobactams are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria. Monobactams are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis by disrupting synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • Nitrofurans include, but are not limited to, Furazolidone and Nitrofurantoin.
  • Oxazolidonones include, but are not limited to, Linezolid, Posizolid, Radezolid, and Torezolid. Oxazolidonones are believed to be protein synthesis inhibitors.
  • Penicillins include, but are not limited to, Amoxicillin, Ampicillin, Azlocillin, Carbenicillin, Cloxacillin, Dicloxacillin, Flucloxacillin, Mezlocillin, Methicillin, Nafcillin, Oxacillin, Penicillin G, Penicillin V, Piperacillin, Temocillin and Ticarcillin. Penicillins are effective, e.g., against Gram-positive bacteria, facultative anaerobes, e.g., Streptococcus, Borrelia, and Treponema. Penicillins are believed to inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis by disrupting synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls.
  • Penicillin combinations include, but are not limited to, Amoxicillin/clavulanate, Ampicillin/sulbactam, Piperacillin/tazobactam, and Ticarcillin/clavulanate.
  • Polypeptide antibiotics include, but are not limited to, Bacitracin, Colistin, and Polymyxin B and E. Polypeptide Antibiotics are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria. Certain polypeptide antibiotics are believed to inhibit isoprenyl pyrophosphate involved in synthesis of the peptidoglycan layer of bacterial cell walls, while others destabilize the bacterial outer membrane by displacing bacterial counter-ions.
  • Quinolones and Fluoroquinolone include, but are not limited to, Ciprofloxacin, Enoxacin, Gatifloxacin, Gemifloxacin, Levofloxacin, Lomefloxacin, Moxifloxacin, Nalidixic acid, Norfloxacin, Ofloxacin, Trovafloxacin, Grepafloxacin, Sparfloxacin, and Temafloxacin. Quinolones/Fluoroquinolone are effective, e.g., against Streptococcus and Neisseria. Quinolones/Fluoroquinolone are believed to inhibit the bacterial DNA gyrase or topoisomerase IV, thereby inhibiting DNA replication and transcription.
  • Sulfonamides include, but are not limited to, Mafenide, Sulfacetamide, Sulfadiazine, Silver sulfadiazine, Sulfadimethoxine, Sulfamethizole, Sulfamethoxazole, Sulfanilimide, Sulfasalazine, Sulfisoxazole, Trimethoprim-Sulfamethoxazole (Co-trimoxazole), and Sulfonamidochrysoidine. Sulfonamides are believed to inhibit folate synthesis by competitive inhibition of dihydropteroate synthetase, thereby inhibiting nucleic acid synthesis.
  • Tetracyclines include, but are not limited to, Demeclocycline, Doxycycline, Minocycline, Oxytetracycline, and Tetracycline. Tetracyclines are effective, e.g., against Gram-negative bacteria. Tetracyclines are believed to bind to the bacterial 30S ribosomal subunit thereby inhibiting bacterial protein synthesis.
  • Anti-mycobacterial compounds include, but are not limited to, Clofazimine, Dapsone, Capreomycin, Cycloserine, Ethambutol, Ethionamide, Isoniazid, Pyrazinamide, Rifampicin, Rifabutin, Rifapentine, and Streptomycin.
  • Suitable antibiotics also include arsphenamine, chloramphenicol, fosfomycin, fusidic acid, metronidazole, mupirocin, platensimycin, quinupristin/dalfopristin, tigecycline, tinidazole, trimethoprim amoxicillin/clavulanate, ampicillin/sulbactam, amphomycin ristocetin, azithromycin, bacitracin, buforin II, carbomycin, cecropin Pl, clarithromycin, erythromycins, furazolidone, fusidic acid, Na fusidate, gramicidin, imipenem, indolicidin, josamycin, magainan II, metronidazole, nitroimidazoles, mikamycin, mutacin B-Ny266, mutacin B-JH1 140, mutacin J-T8, nisin, nisin A, novobiocin, oleandomycin, ostreogrycin, piperacillin/tazobactam, pristinamycin, ramoplanin, ranalexin, reuterin, rifaximin, rosamicin, rosaramicin, spectinomycin, spiramycin, staphylomycin, streptogramin, streptogramin A, synergistin, taurolidine, teicoplanin, telithromycin, ticarcillin/clavulanic acid, triacetyloleandomycin, tylosin, tyrocidin, tyrothricin, vancomycin, vemamycin, and virginiamycin.
  • In some embodiments, the additional therapeutic is an immunosuppressive agent, a DMARD, a pain-control drug, a steroid, a non-steroidal antiinflammatory drug (NSAID), or a cytokine antagonist, and combinations thereof. Representative agents include, but are not limited to, cyclosporin, retinoids, corticosteroids, propionic acid derivative, acetic acid derivative, enolic acid derivatives, fenamic acid derivatives, Cox-2 inhibitors, lumiracoxib, ibuprophen, cholin magnesium salicylate, fenoprofen, salsalate, difunisal, tolmetin, ketoprofen, flurbiprofen, oxaprozin, indomethacin, sulindac, etodolac, ketorolac, nabumetone, naproxen, valdecoxib, etoricoxib, MK0966; rofecoxib, acetominophen, Celecoxib, Diclofenac, tramadol, piroxicam, meloxicam, tenoxicam, droxicam, lornoxicam, isoxicam, mefanamic acid, meclofenamic acid, flufenamic acid, tolfenamic, valdecoxib, parecoxib, etodolac, indomethacin, aspirin, ibuprophen, firocoxib, methotrexate (MTX), antimalarial drugs (e.g., hydroxychloroquine and chloroquine), sulfasalazine, Leflunomide, azathioprine, cyclosporin, gold salts, minocycline, cyclophosphamide, D-penicillamine, minocycline, auranofin, tacrolimus, myocrisin, chlorambucil, TNF alpha antagonists (e.g., TNF alpha antagonists or TNF alpha receptor antagonists), e.g., ADALIMUMAB (Humira®), ETANERCEPT (Enbrel®), INFLIXIMAB (Remicade®; TA-650), CERTOLIZUMAB PEGOL (Cimzia®; CDP870), GOLIMUMAB (Simpom®; CNTO 148), ANAKINRA (Kineret®), RITUXIMAB (Rituxan®; MabThera®), ABATACEPT (Orencia®), TOCILIZUMAB (RoActemra/Actemra®), integrin antagonists (TYSABRI® (natalizumab)), IL-1 antagonists (ACZ885 (Ilaris)), Anakinra (Kineret®)), CD4 antagonists, IL-23 antagonists, IL-20 antagonists, IL-6 antagonists, BLyS antagonists (e.g., Atacicept, Benlysta®/LymphoStat-B® (belimumab)), p38 Inhibitors, CD20 antagonists (Ocrelizumab, Ofatumumab (Arzerra®)), interferon gamma antagonists (Fontolizumab), prednisolone, Prednisone, dexamethasone, Cortisol, cortisone, hydrocortisone, methylprednisolone, betamethasone, triamcinolone, beclometasome, fludrocortisone, deoxycorticosterone, aldosterone, Doxycycline, vancomycin, pioglitazone, SBI-087, SCIO-469, Cura-100, Oncoxin+Viusid, TwHF, Methoxsalen, Vitamin D—ergocalciferol, Milnacipran, Paclitaxel, rosig tazone, Tacrolimus (Prograf®), RADOO1, rapamune, rapamycin, fostamatinib, Fentanyl, XOMA 052, Fostamatinib disodium, rosightazone, Curcumin (Longvida™), Rosuvastatin, Maraviroc, ramipnl, Milnacipran, Cobiprostone, somatropin, tgAAC94 gene therapy vector, MK0359, GW856553, esomeprazole, everolimus, trastuzumab, JAK1 and JAK2 inhibitors, pan JAK inhibitors, e.g., tetracyclic pyridone 6 (P6), 325, PF-956980, denosumab, IL-6 antagonists, CD20 antagonistis, CTLA4 antagonists, IL-8 antagonists, IL-21 antagonists, IL-22 antagonist, integrin antagonists (Tysarbri® (natalizumab)), VGEF antagnosits, CXCL antagonists, MMP antagonists, defensin antagonists, IL-1 antagonists (including IL-1 beta antagonsits), and IL-23 antagonists (e.g., receptor decoys, antagonistic antibodies, etc.).
  • In some embodiments, the agent is an immunosuppressive agent. Examples of immunosuppressive agents include, but are not limited to, corticosteroids, mesalazine, mesalamine, sulfasalazine, sulfasalazine derivatives, immunosuppressive drugs, cyclosporin A, mercaptopurine, azathiopurine, prednisone, methotrexate, antihistamines, glucocorticoids, epinephrine, theophylline, cromolyn sodium, anti-leukotrienes, anti-cholinergic drugs for rhinitis, TLR antagonists, inflammasome inhibitors, anti-cholinergic decongestants, mast-cell stabilizers, monoclonal anti-IgE antibodies, vaccines (e.g., vaccines used for vaccination where the amount of an allergen is gradually increased), cytokine inhibitors, such as anti-IL-6 antibodies, TNF inhibitors such as infliximab, adalimumab, certolizumab pegol, golimumab, or etanercept, and combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the immune disorder therapy comprises administering a therapeutic bacteria and/or a therapeutic combination of bacteria to the subject so a healthy microbiome can be reconstituted in the subject. In some embodiments, therapeutic bacteria is a non-immune-disorder-associated bacteria. In some embodiments therapeutic bacteria is a probiotic bacteria.
  • In some embodiments, the additional therapeutic is a cancer therapeutic. In some embodiments, the cancer therapeutic is a chemotherapeutic agent. Examples of such chemotherapeutic agents include, but are not limited to, alkylating agents such as thiotepa and cyclosphosphamide; alkyl sulfonates such as busulfan, improsulfan and piposulfan; aziridines such as benzodopa, carboquone, meturedopa, and uredopa; ethylenimines and methylamelamines including altretamine, triethylenemelamine, trietylenephosphoramide, triethiylenethiophosphoramide and trimethylolomelamine; acetogenins (especially bullatacin and bullatacinone); a camptothecin (including the synthetic analogue topotecan); bryostatin; callystatin; CC-1065 (including its adozelesin, carzelesin and bizelesin synthetic analogues); cryptophycins (particularly cryptophycin 1 and cryptophycin 8); dolastatin; duocarmycin (including the synthetic analogues, KW-2189 and CB1-TM1); eleutherobin; pancratistatin; a sarcodictyin; spongistatin; nitrogen mustards such as chlorambucil, chlornaphazine, cholophosphamide, estramustine, ifosfamide, mechlorethamine, mechlorethamine oxide hydrochloride, melphalan, novembichin, phenesterine, prednimustine, trofosfamide, uracil mustard; nitrosureas such as carmustine, chlorozotocin, fotemustine, lomustine, nimustine, and ranimnustine; antibiotics such as the enediyne antibiotics (e.g., calicheamicin, especially calicheamicin gammall and calicheamicin omegall; dynemicin, including dynemicin A; bisphosphonates, such as clodronate; an esperamicin; as well as neocarzinostatin chromophore and related chromoprotein enediyne antibiotic chromophores, aclacinomysins, actinomycin, authrarnycin, azaserine, bleomycins, cactinomycin, carabicin, caminomycin, carzinophilin, chromomycinis, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, detorubicin, 6-diazo-5-oxo-L-norleucine, doxorubicin (including morpholino-doxorubicin, cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin, 2-pyrrolino-doxorubicin and deoxydoxorubicin), epirubicin, esorubicin, idarubicin, marcellomycin, mitomycins such as mitomycin C, mycophenolic acid, nogalamycin, olivomycins, peplomycin, potfiromycin, puromycin, quelamycin, rodorubicin, streptonigrin, streptozocin, tubercidin, ubenimex, zinostatin, zorubicin; anti-metabolites such as methotrexate and 5-fluorouracil (5-FU); folic acid analogues such as denopterin, methotrexate, pteropterin, trimetrexate; purine analogs such as fludarabine, 6-mercaptopurine, thiamiprine, thioguanine; pyrimidine analogs such as ancitabine, azacitidine, 6-azauridine, carmofur, cytarabine, dideoxyuridine, doxifluridine, enocitabine, floxuridine; androgens such as calusterone, dromostanolone propionate, epitiostanol, mepitiostane, testolactone; anti-adrenals such as aminoglutethimide, mitotane, trilostane; folic acid replenisher such as frolinic acid; aceglatone; aldophosphamide glycoside; aminolevulinic acid; eniluracil; amsacrine; bestrabucil; bisantrene; edatraxate; defofamine; demecolcine; diaziquone; elformithine; elliptinium acetate; an epothilone; etoglucid; gallium nitrate; hydroxyurea; lentinan; lonidainine; maytansinoids such as maytansine and ansamitocins; mitoguazone; mitoxantrone; mopidanmol; nitraerine; pentostatin; phenamet; pirarubicin; losoxantrone; podophyllinic acid; 2-ethylhydrazide; procarbazine; PSK polysaccharide complex); razoxane; rhizoxin; sizofuran; spirogermanium; tenuazonic acid; triaziquone; 2,2′,2″-trichlorotriethylamine; trichothecenes (especially T-2 toxin, verracurin A, roridin A and anguidine); urethan; vindesine; dacarbazine; mannomustine; mitobronitol; mitolactol; pipobroman; gacytosine; arabinoside (“Ara-C”); cyclophosphamide; thiotepa; taxoids, e.g., paclitaxel and doxetaxel; chlorambucil; gemcitabine; 6-thioguanine; mercaptopurine; methotrexate; platinum coordination complexes such as cisplatin, oxaliplatin and carboplatin; vinblastine; platinum; etoposide (VP-16); ifosfamide; mitoxantrone; vincristine; vinorelbine; novantrone; teniposide; edatrexate; daunomycin; aminopterin; xeloda; ibandronate; irinotecan (e.g., CPT-11); topoisomerase inhibitor RFS 2000; difluoromethylomithine (DMFO); retinoids such as retinoic acid; capecitabine; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of the above.
  • In some embodiments, the cancer therapeutic is a cancer immunotherapy agent Immunotherapy refers to a treatment that uses a subject's immune system to treat cancer, e.g., checkpoint inhibitors, cancer vaccines, cytokines, cell therapy, CAR-T cells, and dendritic cell therapy. Non-limiting examples of immunotherapies are checkpoint inhibitors include Nivolumab (BMS, anti-PD-1), Pembrolizumab (Merck, anti-PD-1), Ipilimumab (BMS, anti-CTLA-4), MEDI4736 (AstraZeneca, anti-PD-L1), and MPDL3280A (Roche, anti-PD-L1). Other immunotherapies may be tumor vaccines, such as Gardail, Cervarix, BCG, sipulencel-T, Gp100:209-217, AGS-003, DCVax-L, Algenpantucel-L, Tergenpantucel-L, TG4010, ProstAtak, Prostvac-V/R-TRICOM, Rindopepimul, E75 peptide acetate, IMA901, POL-103A, Belagenpumatucel-L, GSK1572932A, MDX-1279, GV1001, and Tecemotide. Immunotherapy may be administered via injection (e.g., intravenously, intratumorally, subcutaneously, or into lymph nodes), but may also be administered orally, topically, or via aerosol Immunotherapies may comprise adjuvants such as cytokines.
  • In some embodiments, the immunotherapy agent is an immune checkpoint inhibitor Immune checkpoint inhibition broadly refers to inhibiting the checkpoints that cancer cells can produce to prevent or downregulate an immune response. Examples of immune checkpoint proteins include, but are not limited to, CTLA4, PD-1, PD-L1, PD-L2, A2AR, B7-H3, B7-H4, BTLA, KIR, LAG3, TIM-3 or VISTA Immune checkpoint inhibitors can be antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof that bind to and inhibit an immune checkpoint protein. Examples of immune checkpoint inhibitors include, but are not limited to, nivolumab, pembrolizumab, pidilizumab, AMP-224, AMP-514, STI-A1110, TSR-042, RG-7446, BMS-936559, MEDI-4736, MSB-0020718C, AUR-012 and STI-A1010.
  • In some embodiments, the immunotherapy agent is an antibody or antigen binding fragment thereof that, for example, binds to a cancer-associated antigen. Examples of cancer-associated antigens include, but are not limited to, adipophilin, AIM-2, ALDH1A1, alpha-actinin-4, alpha-fetoprotein (“AFP”), ARTC1, B-RAF, BAGE-1, BCLX (L), BCR-ABL fusion protein b3a2, beta-catenin, BING-4, CA-125, CALCA, carcinoembryonic antigen (“CEA”), CASP-5, CASP-8, CD274, CD45, Cdc27, CDK12, CDK4, CDKN2A, CEA, CLPP, COA-1, CPSF, CSNK1A1, CTAG1, CTAG2, cyclin D1, Cyclin-AL dek-can fusion protein, DKK1, EFTUD2, Elongation factor 2, ENAH (hMena), Ep-CAM, EpCAM, EphA3, epithelial tumor antigen (“ETA”), ETV6-AML1 fusion protein, EZH2, FGFS, FLT3-ITD, FN1, G250/MN/CAIX, GAGE-1,2,8, GAGE-3,4,5,6,7, GAS7, glypican-3, GnTV, gp100/Pme117, GPNMB, HAUS3, Hepsin, HER-2/neu, HERV-K-MEL, HLA-A11, HLA-A2, HLA-DOB, hsp70-2, IDO1, IGF2B3, IL13Ralpha2, Intestinal carboxyl esterase, K-ras, Kallikrein 4, KIF20A, KK-LC-1, KKLC1, KM-HN-1, KMHN1 also known as CCDC110, LAGE-1, LDLR-fucosyltransferaseAS fusion protein, Lengsin, M-CSF, MAGE-A1, MAGE-A10, MAGE-A12, MAGE-A2, MAGE-A3, MAGE-A4, MAGE-A6, MAGE-A9, MAGE-C1, MAGE-C2, malic enzyme, mammaglobin-A, MART2, MATN, MC1R, MCSP, mdm-2, MEL Melan-A/MART-1, Meloe, Midkine, MMP-2, MMP-7, MUC1, MUCSAC, mucin, MUM-1, MUM-2, MUM-3, Myosin, Myosin class I, N-raw, NA88-A, neo-PAP, NFYC, NY-BR-1, NY-ESO-1/LAGE-2, OAL OGT, OS-9, P polypeptide, p53, PAP, PAXS, PBF, pml-RARalpha fusion protein, polymorphic epithelial mucin (“PEM”), PPP1R3B, PRAME, PRDXS, PSA, PSMA, PTPRK, RAB38/NY-MEL-1, RAGE-1, RBAF600, RGSS, RhoC, RNF43, RU2AS, SAGE, secernin 1, SIRT2, SNRPD1, SOX10, Sp17, SPA17, SSX-2, SSX-4, STEAP1, survivin, SYT-SSX1 or -SSX2 fusion protein, TAG-1, TAG-2, Telomerase, TGF-betaRll, TPBG, TRAG-3, Triosephosphate isomerase, TRP-1/gp75, TRP-2, TRP2-INT2, tyrosinase, tyrosinase (“TYR”), VEGF, WT1, XAGE-1b/GAGED2a. In some embodiments, the antigen is a neo-antigen.
  • In some embodiments, the immunotherapy agent is a cancer vaccine and/or a component of a cancer vaccine (e.g., an antigenic peptide and/or protein). The cancer vaccine can be a protein vaccine, a nucleic acid vaccine or a combination thereof. For example, in some embodiments, the cancer vaccine comprises a polypeptide comprising an epitope of a cancer-associated antigen. In some embodiments, the cancer vaccine comprises a nucleic acid (e.g., DNA or RNA, such as mRNA) that encodes an epitope of a cancer-associated antigen. Examples of cancer-associated antigens include, but are not limited to, adipophilin, AIM-2, ALDH1A1, alpha-actinin-4, alpha-fetoprotein (“AFP”), ARTC1, B-RAF, BAGE-1, BCLX (L), BCR-ABL fusion protein b3a2, beta-catenin, BING-4, CA-125, CALCA, carcinoembryonic antigen (“CEA”), CASP-5, CASP-8, CD274, CD45, Cdc27, CDK12, CDK4, CDKN2A, CEA, CLPP, COA-1, CPSF, CSNK1A1, CTAG1, CTAG2, cyclin D1, Cyclin-A1, dek-can fusion protein, DKK1, EFTUD2, Elongation factor 2, ENAH (hMena), Ep-CAM, EpCAM, EphA3, epithelial tumor antigen (“ETA”), ETV6-AML1 fusion protein, EZH2, FGFS, FLT3-ITD, FN1, G250/MN/CAIX, GAGE-1,2,8, GAGE-3,4,5,6,7, GAS7, glypican-3, GnTV, gp100/Pme117, GPNMB, HAUS3, Hepsin, HER-2/neu, HERV-K-MEL, HLA-A11, HLA-A2, HLA-DOB, hsp70-2, IDO1, IGF2B3, IL13Ralpha2, Intestinal carboxyl esterase, K-ras, Kallikrein 4, KIF20A, KK-LC-1, KKLC1, KM-HN-1, KMHN1 also known as CCDC110, LAGE-1, LDLR-fucosyltransferaseAS fusion protein, Lengsin, M-CSF, MAGE-A1, MAGE-A10, MAGE-A12, MAGE-A2, MAGE-A3, MAGE-A4, MAGE-A6, MAGE-A9, MAGE-C1, MAGE-C2, malic enzyme, mammaglobin-A, MART2, MATN, MC1R, MCSP, mdm-2, MEL Melan-A/MART-1, Meloe, Midkine, MMP-2, MMP-7, MUC1, MUCSAC, mucin, MUM-1, MUM-2, MUM-3, Myosin, Myosin class I, N-raw, NA88-A, neo-PAP, NFYC, NY-BR-1, NY-ESO-1/LAGE-2, OAL OGT, OS-9, P polypeptide, p53, PAP, PAXS, PBF, pml-RARalpha fusion protein, polymorphic epithelial mucin (“PEM”), PPP1R3B, PRAME, PRDXS, PSA, PSMA, PTPRK, RAB38/NY-MEL-1, RAGE-1, RBAF600, RGSS, RhoC, RNF43, RU2AS, SAGE, secernin 1, SIRT2, SNRPD1, SOX10, Sp17, SPA17, SSX-2, SSX-4, STEAP1, survivin, SYT-SSX1 or -SSX2 fusion protein, TAG-1, TAG-2, Telomerase, TGF-betaRll, TPBG, TRAG-3, Triosephosphate isomerase, TRP-1/gp75, TRP-2, TRP2-INT2, tyrosinase, tyrosinase (“TYR”), VEGF, WT1, XAGE-lb/GAGED2a. In some embodiments, the antigen is a neo-antigen. In some embodiments, the cancer vaccine is administered with an adjuvant. Examples of adjuvants include, but are not limited to, an immune modulatory protein, Adjuvant 65, α-GalCer, aluminum phosphate, aluminum hydroxide, calcium phosphate, β-Glucan Peptide, CpG ODN DNA, GPI-0100, lipid A, lipopolysaccharide, Lipovant, Montanide, N-acetyl-muramyl-L-alanyl-D-isoglutamine, Pam3CSK4, quil A, cholera toxin (CT) and heat-labile toxin from enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli (LT) including derivatives of these (CTB, mmCT, CTA1-DD, LTB, LTK63, LTR72, dmLT) and trehalose dimycolate.
  • In some embodiments, the immunotherapy agent is an immune modulating protein to the subject. In some embodiments, the immune modulatory protein is a cytokine or chemokine. Examples of immune modulating proteins include, but are not limited to, B lymphocyte chemoattractant (“BLC”), C-C motif chemokine 11 (“Eotaxin-1”), Eosinophil chemotactic protein 2 (“Eotaxin-2”), Granulocyte colony-stimulating factor (“G-CSF”), Granulocyte macrophage colony-stimulating factor (“GM-CSF”), 1-309, Intercellular Adhesion Molecule 1 (“ICAM-1”), Interferon alpha (“IFN-alpha”), Interferon beta (“IFN-beta”) Interferon gamma (“IFN-gamma”), Interlukin-1 alpha (“IL-1 alpha”), Interlukin-1 beta (“IL-1 beta”), Interleukin 1 receptor antagonist (“IL-1 ra”), Interleukin-2 (“IL-2”), Interleukin-4 (“IL-4”), Interleukin-5 (“IL-5”), Interleukin-6 (“IL-6”), Interleukin-6 soluble receptor (“IL-6 sR”), Interleukin-7 (“IL-7”), Interleukin-8 (“IL-8”), Interleukin-10 (“IL-10”), Interleukin-11 (“IL-11”), Subunit beta of Interleukin-12 (“IL-12 p40” or “IL-12 p70”), Interleukin-13 (“IL-13”), Interleukin-15 (“IL-15”), Interleukin-16 (“IL-16”), Interleukin-17A-F (“IL-17A-F”), Interleukin-18 (“IL-18”), Interleukin-21 (“IL-21”), Interleukin-22 (“IL-22”), Interleukin-23 (“IL-23”), Interleukin-33 (“IL-33”), Chemokine (C-C motif) Ligand 2 (“MCP-1”), Macrophage colony-stimulating factor (“M-CSF”), Monokine induced by gamma interferon (“MIG”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 2 (“MIP-1 alpha”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 4 (“MIP-1 beta”), Macrophage inflammatory protein-1-delta (“MIP-1 delta”), Platelet-derived growth factor subunit B (“PDGF-BB”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 5, Regulated on Activation, Normal T cell Expressed and Secreted (“RANTES”), TIMP metallopeptidase inhibitor 1 (“TIMP-1”), TIMP metallopeptidase inhibitor 2 (“TIMP-2”), Tumor necrosis factor, lymphotoxin-alpha (“TNF alpha”), Tumor necrosis factor, lymphotoxin-beta (“TNF beta”), Soluble TNF receptor type 1 (“sTNFRI”), sTNFRIIAR, Brain-derived neurotrophic factor (“BDNF”), Basic fibroblast growth factor (“bFGF”), Bone morphogenetic protein 4 (“BMP-4”), Bone morphogenetic protein 5 (“BMP-5”), Bone morphogenetic protein 7 (“BMP-7”), Nerve growth factor (“b-NGF”), Epidermal growth factor (“EGF”), Epidermal growth factor receptor (“EGFR”), Endocrine-gland-derived vascular endothelial growth factor (“EG-VEGF”), Fibroblast growth factor 4 (“FGF-4”), Keratinocyte growth factor (“FGF-7”), Growth differentiation factor 15 (“GDF-15”), Glial cell-derived neurotrophic factor (“GDNF”), Growth Hormone, Heparin-binding EGF-like growth factor (“HB-EGF”), Hepatocyte growth factor (“HGF”), Insulin-like growth factor binding protein 1 (“IGFBP-1”), Insulin-like growth factor binding protein 2 (“IGI-BP-2”), Insulin-like growth factor binding protein 3 (“IGFBP-3”), Insulin-like growth factor binding protein 4 (“IGFBP-4”), Insulin-like growth factor binding protein 6 (“IGFBP-6”), Insulin-like growth factor 1 (“IGF-1”), Insulin, Macrophage colony-stimulating factor (“M-CSF R”), Nerve growth factor receptor (“NGF R”), Neurotrophin-3 (“NT-3”), Neurotrophin-4 (“NT-4”), Osteoclastogenesis inhibitory factor (“Osteoprotegerin”), Platelet-derived growth factor receptors (“PDGF-AA”), Phosphatidylinositol-glycan biosynthesis (“PIGF”), Skp, Cullin, F-box containing comples (“SCF”), Stem cell factor receptor (“SCF R”), Transforming growth factor alpha (“TGFalpha”), Transforming growth factor beta-1 (“TGF beta 1”), Transforming growth factor beta-3 (“TGF beta 3”), Vascular endothelial growth factor (“VEGF”), Vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 2 (“VEGFR2”), Vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 3 (“VEGFR3”), VEGF-D 6Ckine, Tyrosine-protein kinase receptor UFO (“Axl”), Betacellulin (“BTC”), Mucosae-associated epithelial chemokine (“CCL28”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 27 (“CTACK”), Chemokine (C-X-C motif) ligand 16 (“CXCL16”), C-X-C motif chemokine 5 (“ENA-78”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 26 (“Eotaxin-3”), Granulocyte chemotactic protein 2 (“GCP-2”), GRO, Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 14 (“HCC-1”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 16 (“HCC-4”), Interleukin-9 (“IL-9”), Interleukin-17 F (“IL-17F”), Interleukin-18-binding protein (“IL-18 BPa”), Interleukin-28 A (“IL-28A”), Interleukin 29 (“IL-29”), Interleukin 31 (“IL-31”), C-X-C motif chemokine 10 (“IP-10”), Chemokine receptor CXCR3 (“I-TAC”), Leukemia inhibitory factor (“LIF”), Light, Chemokine (C motif) ligand (“Lymphotactin”), Monocyte chemoattractant protein 2 (“MCP-2”), Monocyte chemoattractant protein 3 (“MCP-3”), Monocyte chemoattractant protein 4 (“MCP-4”), Macrophage-derived chemokine (“MDC”), Macrophage migration inhibitory factor (“MIF”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 20 (“MIP-3 alpha”), C-C motif chemokine 19 (“MIP-3 beta”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 23 (“MPIF-1”), Macrophage stimulating protein alpha chain (“MSPalpha”), Nucleosome assembly protein 1-like 4 (“NAP-2”), Secreted phosphoprotein 1 (“Osteopontin”), Pulmonary and activation-regulated cytokine (“PARC”), Platelet factor 4 (“PF4”), Stroma cell-derived factor-1 alpha (“SDF-1 alpha”), Chemokine (C-C motif) ligand 17 (“TARC”), Thymus-expressed chemokine (“TECK”), Thymic stromal lymphopoietin (“TSLP 4-IBB”), CD 166 antigen (“ALCAM”), Cluster of Differentiation 80 (“B7-1”), Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 17 (“BCMA”), Cluster of Differentiation 14 (“CD14”), Cluster of Differentiation 30 (“CD30”), Cluster of Differentiation 40 (“CD40 Ligand”), Carcinoembryonic antigen-related cell adhesion molecule 1 (biliary glycoprotein) (“CEACAM-1”), Death Receptor 6 (“DR6”), Deoxythymidine kinase (“Dtk”), Type 1 membrane glycoprotein (“Endoglin”), Receptor tyrosine-protein kinase erbB-3 (“ErbB3”), Endothelial-leukocyte adhesion molecule 1 (“E-Selectin”), Apoptosis antigen 1 (“Fas”), Fms-like tyrosine kinase 3 (“Flt-3L”), Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 1 (“GITR”), Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 14 (“HVEM”), Intercellular adhesion molecule 3 (“ICAM-3”), IL-1 R4, IL-1 RI, IL-10 Rbeta, IL-17R, IL-2Rgamma, IL-21R, Lysosome membrane protein 2 (“LIMPII”), Neutrophil gelatinase-associated lipocalin (“Lipocalin-2”), CD62L (“L-Selectin”), Lymphatic endothelium (“LYVE-1”), MHC class I polypeptide-related sequence A (“MICA”), MHC class I polypeptide-related sequence B (“MICB”), NRG1-betal, Beta-type platelet-derived growth factor receptor (“PDGF Rbeta”), Platelet endothelial cell adhesion molecule (“PECAM-1”), RAGE, Hepatitis A virus cellular receptor 1 (“TIM-1”), Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member IOC (“TRAIL R3”), Trappin protein transglutaminase binding domain (“Trappin-2”), Urokinase receptor (“uPAR”), Vascular cell adhesion protein 1 (“VCAM-1”), XEDARActivin A, Agouti-related protein (“AgRP”), Ribonuclease 5 (“Angiogenin”), Angiopoietin 1, Angiostatin, Catheprin S, CD40, Cryptic family protein IB (“Cripto-1”), DAN, Dickkopf-related protein 1 (“DKK-1”), E-Cadherin, Epithelial cell adhesion molecule (“EpCAM”), Fas Ligand (FasL or CD95L), Fcg RIIB/C, FoUistatin, Galectin-7, Intercellular adhesion molecule 2 (“ICAM-2”), IL-13 R1, IL-13R2, IL-17B, IL-2 Ra, IL-2 Rb, IL-23, LAP, Neuronal cell adhesion molecule (“NrCAM”), Plasminogen activator inhibitor-1 (“PAI-1”), Platelet derived growth factor receptors (“PDGF-AB”), Resistin, stromal cell-derived factor 1 (“SDF-1 beta”), sgp130, Secreted frizzled-related protein 2 (“ShhN”), Sialic acid-binding immunoglobulin-type lectins (“Siglec-5”), ST2, Transforming growth factor-beta 2 (“TGF beta 2”), Tie-2, Thrombopoietin (“TPO”), Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 10D (“TRAIL R4”), Triggering receptor expressed on myeloid cells 1 (“TREM-1”), Vascular endothelial growth factor C (“VEGF-C”), VEGFR1Adiponectin, Adipsin (“AND”), Alpha-fetoprotein (“AFP”), Angiopoietin-like 4 (“ANGPTL4”), Beta-2-microglobulin (“B2M”), Basal cell adhesion molecule (′SCAM″), Carbohydrate antigen 125 (“CA125”), Cancer Antigen 15-3 (“CA15-3”), Carcinoembryonic antigen (“CEA”), cAMP receptor protein (“CRP”), Human Epidermal Growth Factor Receptor 2 (“ErbB2”), Follistatin, Follicle-stimulating hormone (“FSH”), Chemokine (C-X-C motif) ligand 1 (“GRO alpha”), human chorionic gonadotropin (“beta HCG”), Insulin-like growth factor 1 receptor (“IGF-1 sR”), IL-1 sRII, IL-3, IL-18 Rb, IL-21, Leptin, Matrix metalloproteinase-1 (“MMP-1”), Matrix metalloproteinase-2 (“MMP-2”), Matrix metalloproteinase-3 (“MMP-3”), Matrix metalloproteinase-8 (“MMP-8”), Matrix metalloproteinase-9 (“MMP-9”), Matrix metalloproteinase-10 (“MMP-10”), Matrix metalloproteinase-13 (“MMP-13”), Neural Cell Adhesion Molecule (“NCAM-1”), Entactin (“Nidogen-1”), Neuron specific enolase (“NSE”), Oncostatin M (“OSM”), Procalcitonin, Prolactin, Prostate specific antigen (“PSA”), Sialic acid-binding Ig-like lectin 9 (“Siglec-9”), ADAM 17 endopeptidase (“TACE”), Thyroglobulin, Metalloproteinase inhibitor 4 (“TIMP-4”), TSH2B4, Disintegrin and metalloproteinase domain-containing protein 9 (“ADAM-9”), Angiopoietin 2, Tumor necrosis factor ligand superfamily member 13/Acidic leucine-rich nuclear phosphoprotein 32 family member B (“APRIL”), Bone morphogenetic protein 2 (“BMP-2”), Bone morphogenetic protein 9 (“BMP-9”), Complement component 5a (“C5a”), Cathepsin L, CD200, CD97, Chemerin, Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 6B (“DcR3”), Fatty acid-binding protein 2 (“FABP2”), Fibroblast activation protein, alpha (“FAP”), Fibroblast growth factor 19 (“FGF-19”), Galectin-3, Hepatocyte growth factor receptor (“HGF R”), IFN-gammalpha/beta R2, Insulin-like growth factor 2 (“IGF-2”), Insulin-like growth factor 2 receptor (“IGF-2 R”), Interleukin-1 receptor 6 (“IL-1R6”), Interleukin 24 (“IL-24”), Interleukin 33 (“IL-33”, Kallikrein 14, Asparaginyl endopeptidase (“Legumain”), Oxidized low-density lipoprotein receptor 1 (“LOX-1”), Mannose-binding lectin (“MBL”), Neprilysin (“NEP”), Notch homolog 1, translocation-associated (Drosophila) (“Notch-1”), Nephroblastoma overexpressed (“NOV”), Osteoactivin, Programmed cell death protein 1 (“PD-1”), N-acetylmuramoyl-L-alanine amidase (“PGRP-5”), Serpin A4, Secreted frizzled related protein 3 (“sFRP-3”), Thrombomodulin, Tolllike receptor 2 (“TLR2”), Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 10A (“TRAIL R1”), Transferrin (“TRF”), WIF-1ACE-2, Albumin, AMICA, Angiopoietin 4, B-cell activating factor (“BA1-1-”), Carbohydrate antigen 19-9 (“CA19-9”), CD 163, Clusterin, CRT AM, Chemokine (C-X-C motif) ligand 14 (“CXCL14”), Cystatin C, Decorin (“DCN”), Dickkopf-related protein 3 (“Dkk-3”), Delta-like protein 1 (“DLL1”), Fetuin A, Heparin-binding growth factor 1 (“aFGF”), Folate receptor alpha (“FOLR1”), Furin, GPCR-associated sorting protein 1 (“GASP-1”), GPCR-associated sorting protein 2 (“GASP-2”), Granulocyte colony-stimulating factor receptor (“GCSF R”), Serine protease hepsin (“HAI-2”), Interleukin-17B Receptor (“IL-17B R”), Interleukin 27 (“IL-27”), Lymphocyte-activation gene 3 (“LAG-3”), Apolipoprotein A-V (“LDL R”), Pepsinogen I, Retinol binding protein 4 (“RBP4”), SOST, Heparan sulfate proteoglycan (“Syndecan-1”), Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 13B (“TACI”), Tissue factor pathway inhibitor (“TFPI”), TSP-1, Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily, member 10b (“TRAIL R2”), TRANCE, Troponin I, Urokinase Plasminogen Activator (“uPA”), Cadherin 5, type 2 or VE-cadherin (vascular endothelial) also known as CD144 (“VE-Cadherin”), WNTl-inducible-signaling pathway protein 1 (“WISP-1”), and Receptor Activator of Nuclear Factor κ B (“RANK”).
  • In some embodiments, the cancer therapeutic agent is an anti-cancer compound. Exemplary anti-cancer compounds include, but are not limited to, Alemtuzumab (Campath®), Alitretinoin (Panretin®), Anastrozole (Arimidex®), Bevacizumab (Avastin®), Bexarotene (Targretin®), Bortezomib (Velcade®), Bosutinib (Bosulif®), Brentuximab vedotin (Adcetris®), Cabozantinib (Cometrig™) Carfilzomib (Kyprolis™), Cetuximab (Erbitux®), Crizotinib (Xalkori®), Dasatinib (Sprycel®), Denileukin diftitox (Ontak®), Erlotinib hydrochloride (Tarceva®), Everolimus (Afinitor®), Exemestane (Aromasin®), Fulvestrant (Faslodex®), Gefitinib (Iressa®), Ibritumomab tiuxetan (Zevalin®), Imatinib mesylate (Gleevec®), Ipilimumab (Yervoy™), Lapatinib ditosylate (Tykerb®), Letrozole (Ferrara®), Nilotinib (Tasigna®), Ofatumumab (Arzerra®), Panitumumab (Vectibix®), Pazopanib hydrochloride (Votrient®), Pertuzumab (Perjeta™), Pralatrexate (Folotyn®), Regorafenib (Stivarga®), Rituximab (Rituxan®), Romidepsin (Istodax®), Sorafenib tosylate (Nexavar®), Sunitinib malate (Sutent®), Tamoxifen, Temsirolimus (Torisel®), Toremifene (Fareston®), Tositumomab and 131I-tositumomab (Bexxar®), Trastuzumab (Herceptin®), Tretinoin (Vesanoid®), Vandetanib (Caprelsa®), Vemurafenib (Zelboraf®), Vorinostat (Zolinza®), and Ziv-aflibercept (Zaltrap®).
  • Exemplary anti-cancer compounds that modify the function of proteins that regulate gene expression and other cellular functions (e.g., HDAC inhibitors, retinoid receptor ligants) are Vorinostat (Zolinza®), Bexarotene (Targretin®) and Romidepsin (Istodax®), Alitretinoin (Panretin®), and Tretinoin (Vesanoid®).
  • Exemplary anti-cancer compounds that induce apoptosis (e.g., proteasome inhibitors, antifolates) are Bortezomib (Velcade®), Carfilzomib (Kyprolis™), and Pralatrexate (Folotyn®).
  • Exemplary anti-cancer compounds that increase anti-tumor immune response (e.g., anti CD20, anti CD52; anti-cytotoxic T-lymphocyte-associated antigen-4) are Rituximab (Rituxan®), Alemtuzumab (Campath®), Ofatumumab (Arzerra®), and Ipilimumab (Yervoy™).
  • Exemplary anti-cancer compounds that deliver toxic agents to cancer cells (e.g., anti-CD20-radionuclide fusions; IL-2-diphtheria toxin fusions; anti-CD30-monomethylauristatin E (MMAE)-fusions) are Tositumomab and 131I-tositumomab (Bexxar®) and Ibritumomab tiuxetan (Zevalin®), Denileukin diftitox (Ontak®), and Brentuximab vedotin (Adcetris®).
  • Other exemplary anti-cancer compounds are small molecule inhibitors and conjugates thereof of, e.g., Janus kinase, ALK, Bcl-2, PARP, PI3K, VEGF receptor, Braf, MEK, CDK, and HSP90.
  • Exemplary platinum-based anti-cancer compounds include, for example, cisplatin, carboplatin, oxaliplatin, satraplatin, picoplatin, Nedaplatin, Triplatin, and Lipoplatin. Other metal-based drugs suitable for treatment include, but are not limited to ruthenium-based compounds, ferrocene derivatives, titanium-based compounds, and gallium-based compounds.
  • In some embodiments, the cancer therapeutic is a radioactive moiety that comprises a radionuclide. Exemplary radionuclides include, but are not limited to Cr-51, Cs-131, Ce-134, Se-75, Ru-97, I-125, Eu-149, Os-189m, Sb-119, 1-123, Ho-161, Sb-117, Ce-139, In-111, Rh-103m, Ga-67, Tl-201, Pd-103, Au-195, Hg-197, Sr-87m, Pt-191, P-33, Er-169, Ru-103, Yb-169, Au-199, Sn-121, Tm-167, Yb-175, In-113m, Sn-113, Lu-177, Rh-105, Sn-117m, Cu-67, Sc-47, Pt-195m, Ce-141, 1-131, Tb-161, As-77, Pt-197, Sm-153, Gd-159, Tm-173, Pr-143, Au-198, Tm-170, Re-186, Ag-111, Pd-109, Ga-73, Dy-165, Pm-149, Sn-123, Sr-89, Ho-166, P-32, Re-188, Pr-142, Ir-194, In-114m/In-114, and Y-90.
  • In some embodiments, the cancer therapeutic is an antibiotic. For example, if the presence of a cancer-associated bacteria and/or a cancer-associated microbiome profile is detected according to the methods provided herein, antibiotics can be administered to eliminate the cancer-associated bacteria from the subject. “Antibiotics” broadly refers to compounds capable of inhibiting or preventing a bacterial infection. Antibiotics can be classified in a number of ways, including their use for specific infections, their mechanism of action, their bioavailability, or their spectrum of target microbe (e.g., Gram-negative vs. Gram-positive bacteria, aerobic vs. anaerobic bacteria, etc.) and these may be used to kill specific bacteria in specific areas of the host (“niches”) (Leekha, et al 2011. General Principles of Antimicrobial Therapy. Mayo Clin Proc. 86(2): 156-167). In certain embodiments, antibiotics can be used to selectively target bacteria of a specific niche. In some embodiments, antibiotics known to treat a particular infection that includes a cancer niche may be used to target cancer-associated microbes, including cancer-associated bacteria in that niche. In other embodiments, antibiotics are administered after the bacterial treatment. In some embodiments, antibiotics are administered after the bacterial treatment to remove the engraftment.
    • Immune Disorders
  • In some embodiments, the methods and compositions described herein relate to the treatment or prevention of a disease or disorder associated with a pathological immune response, such as an autoimmune disease, an allergic reaction and/or an inflammatory disease. In some embodiments, the disease or disorder is an inflammatory bowel disease (e.g., Crohn's disease or ulcerative colitis). In some embodiments, the methods and compositions described herein relate to the treatment or prevention of delayed-type hypersensitivity, autoimmune myocarditis, granulomas, peripheral neuropathies, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, inflammation of the colon, colitis, microscopic colitis, collagenous colitis, diversion colitis, chemical colitis, ischemic colitis, indeterminate colitis, atypical colitis.
  • The methods described herein can be used to treat any subject in need thereof. As used herein, a “subject in need thereof” includes any subject that has a disease or disorder associated with a pathological immune response (e.g., an inflammatory bowel disease), as well as any subject with an increased likelihood of acquiring a such a disease or disorder.
  • The compositions described herein can be used, for example, as a pharmaceutical composition for preventing or treating (reducing, partially or completely, the adverse effects of) an autoimmune disease, such as chronic inflammatory bowel disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, psoriasis, muckle-wells syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, or Hashimoto's disease; an allergic disease, such as a food allergy, pollenosis, or asthma; an infectious disease, such as an infection with Clostridium difficile; an inflammatory disease such as a TNF-mediated inflammatory disease (e.g., an inflammatory disease of the gastrointestinal tract, such as pouchitis, a cardiovascular inflammatory condition, such as atherosclerosis, or an inflammatory lung disease, such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease); a pharmaceutical composition for suppressing rejection in organ transplantation or other situations in which tissue rejection might occur; a supplement, food, or beverage for improving immune functions; or a reagent for suppressing the proliferation or function of immune cells.
  • In some embodiments, the methods provided herein are useful for the treatment of inflammation. In certain embodiments, the inflammation of any tissue and organs of the body, including musculoskeletal inflammation, vascular inflammation, neural inflammation, digestive system inflammation, ocular inflammation, inflammation of the reproductive system, and other inflammation, as discussed below.
  • Immune disorders of the musculoskeletal system include, but are not limited, to those conditions affecting skeletal joints, including joints of the hand, wrist, elbow, shoulder, jaw, spine, neck, hip, knew, ankle, and foot, and conditions affecting tissues connecting muscles to bones such as tendons. Examples of such immune disorders, which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, arthritis (including, for example, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, acute and chronic infectious arthritis, arthritis associated with gout and pseudogout, and juvenile idiopathic arthritis), tendonitis, synovitis, tenosynovitis, bursitis, fibrositis (fibromyalgia), epicondylitis, myositis, and osteitis (including, for example, Paget's disease, osteitis pubis, and osteitis fibrosa cystic).
  • Ocular immune disorders refers to an immune disorder that affects any structure of the eye, including the eye lids. Examples of ocular immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, blepharitis, blepharochalasis, conjunctivitis, dacryoadenitis, keratitis, keratoconjunctivitis sicca (dry eye), scleritis, trichiasis, and uveitis Examples of nervous system immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, encephalitis, Guillain-Barre syndrome, meningitis, neuromyotonia, narcolepsy, multiple sclerosis, myelitis and schizophrenia. Examples of inflammation of the vasculature or lymphatic system which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, arthrosclerosis, arthritis, phlebitis, vasculitis, and lymphangitis.
  • Examples of digestive system immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, cholangitis, cholecystitis, enteritis, enterocolitis, gastritis, gastroenteritis, inflammatory bowel disease, ileitis, and proctitis. Inflammatory bowel diseases include, for example, certain art-recognized forms of a group of related conditions. Several major forms of inflammatory bowel diseases are known, with Crohn's disease (regional bowel disease, e.g., inactive and active forms) and ulcerative colitis (e.g., inactive and active forms) the most common of these disorders. In addition, the inflammatory bowel disease encompasses irritable bowel syndrome, microscopic colitis, lymphocytic-plasmocytic enteritis, coeliac disease, collagenous colitis, lymphocytic colitis and eosinophilic enterocolitis. Other less common forms of IBD include indeterminate colitis, pseudomembranous colitis (necrotizing colitis), ischemic inflammatory bowel disease, Behcet's disease, sarcoidosis, scleroderma, IBD-associated dysplasia, dysplasia associated masses or lesions, and primary sclerosing cholangitis.
  • Examples of reproductive system immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, cervicitis, chorioamnionitis, endometritis, epididymitis, omphalitis, oophoritis, orchitis, salpingitis, tubo-ovarian abscess, urethritis, vaginitis, vulvitis, and vulvodynia.
  • The methods and compositions described herein may be used to treat autoimmune conditions having an inflammatory component. Such conditions include, but are not limited to, acute disseminated alopecia universalise, Behcet's disease, Chagas' disease, chronic fatigue syndrome, dysautonomia, encephalomyelitis, ankylosing spondylitis, aplastic anemia, hidradenitis suppurativa, autoimmune hepatitis, autoimmune oophoritis, celiac disease, Crohn's disease, diabetes mellitus type 1, giant cell arteritis, goodpasture's syndrome, Grave's disease, Guillain-Barre syndrome, Hashimoto's disease, Henoch-Schonlein purpura, Kawasaki's disease, lupus erythematosus, microscopic colitis, microscopic polyarteritis, mixed connective tissue disease, Muckle-Wells syndrome, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, opsoclonus myoclonus syndrome, optic neuritis, ord's thyroiditis, pemphigus, polyarteritis nodosa, polymyalgia, rheumatoid arthritis, Reiter's syndrome, Sjogren's syndrome, temporal arteritis, Wegener's granulomatosis, warm autoimmune haemolytic anemia, interstitial cystitis, Lyme disease, morphea, psoriasis, sarcoidosis, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, and vitiligo.
  • The methods and compositions described herein may be used to treat T-cell mediated hypersensitivity diseases having an inflammatory component. Such conditions include, but are not limited to, contact hypersensitivity, contact dermatitis (including that due to poison ivy), uticaria, skin allergies, respiratory allergies (hay fever, allergic rhinitis, house dustmite allergy) and gluten-sensitive enteropathy (Celiac disease).
  • Other immune disorders which may be treated with the methods and compositions include, for example, appendicitis, dermatitis, dermatomyositis, endocarditis, fibrositis, gingivitis, glossitis, hepatitis, hidradenitis suppurativa, iritis, laryngitis, mastitis, myocarditis, nephritis, otitis, pancreatitis, parotitis, percarditis, peritonoitis, pharyngitis, pleuritis, pneumonitis, prostatistis, pyelonephritis, and stomatisi, transplant rejection (involving organs such as kidney, liver, heart, lung, pancreas (e.g., islet cells), bone marrow, cornea, small bowel, skin allografts, skin homografts, and heart valve xengrafts, sewrum sickness, and graft vs host disease), acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, acute respiratory distress syndrome, Sexary's syndrome, congenital adrenal hyperplasis, nonsuppurative thyroiditis, hypercalcemia associated with cancer, pemphigus, bullous dermatitis herpetiformis, severe erythema multiforme, exfoliative dermatitis, seborrheic dermatitis, seasonal or perennial allergic rhinitis, bronchial asthma, contact dermatitis, atopic dermatitis, drug hypersensistivity reactions, allergic conjunctivitis, keratitis, herpes zoster ophthalmicus, iritis and oiridocyclitis, chorioretinitis, optic neuritis, symptomatic sarcoidosis, fulminating or disseminated pulmonary tuberculosis chemotherapy, idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura in adults, secondary thrombocytopenia in adults, acquired (autoimmune) haemolytic anemia, leukaemia and lymphomas in adults, acute leukaemia of childhood, regional enteritis, autoimmune vasculitis, multiple sclerosis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, solid organ transplant rejection, sepsis. Preferred treatments include treatment of transplant rejection, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, multiple sclerosis, Type 1 diabetes, asthma, inflammatory bowel disease, systemic lupus erythematosus, psoriasis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and inflammation accompanying infectious conditions (e.g., sepsis).
    • Cancer
  • In some embodiments, the methods and compositions described herein relate to the treatment of cancer. In some embodiments, any cancer can be treated using the methods described herein. Examples of cancers that may treated by methods and compositions described herein include, but are not limited to, cancer cells from the bladder, blood, bone, bone marrow, brain, breast, colon, esophagus, gastrointestine, gum, head, kidney, liver, lung, nasopharynx, neck, ovary, prostate, skin, stomach, testis, tongue, or uterus. In addition, the cancer may specifically be of the following histological type, though it is not limited to these: neoplasm, malignant; carcinoma; carcinoma, undifferentiated; giant and spindle cell carcinoma; small cell carcinoma; papillary carcinoma; squamous cell carcinoma; lymphoepithelial carcinoma; basal cell carcinoma; pilomatrix carcinoma; transitional cell carcinoma; papillary transitional cell carcinoma; adenocarcinoma; gastrinoma, malignant; cholangiocarcinoma; hepatocellular carcinoma; combined hepatocellular carcinoma and cholangiocarcinoma; trabecular adenocarcinoma; adenoid cystic carcinoma; adenocarcinoma in adenomatous polyp; adenocarcinoma, familial polyposis coli; solid carcinoma; carcinoid tumor, malignant; branchiolo-alveolar adenocarcinoma; papillary adenocarcinoma; chromophobe carcinoma; acidophil carcinoma; oxyphilic adenocarcinoma; basophil carcinoma; clear cell adenocarcinoma; granular cell carcinoma; follicular adenocarcinoma; papillary and follicular adenocarcinoma; nonencapsulating sclerosing carcinoma; adrenal cortical carcinoma; endometroid carcinoma; skin appendage carcinoma; apocrine adenocarcinoma; sebaceous adenocarcinoma; ceruminous adenocarcinoma; mucoepidermoid carcinoma; cystadenocarcinoma; papillary cystadenocarcinoma; papillary serous cystadenocarcinoma; mucinous cystadenocarcinoma; mucinous adenocarcinoma; signet ring cell carcinoma; infiltrating duct carcinoma; medullary carcinoma; lobular carcinoma; inflammatory carcinoma; paget's disease, mammary; acinar cell carcinoma; adenosquamous carcinoma; adenocarcinoma w/squamous metaplasia; thymoma, malignant; ovarian stromal tumor, malignant; thecoma, malignant; granulosa cell tumor, malignant; and roblastoma, malignant; sertoli cell carcinoma; leydig cell tumor, malignant; lipid cell tumor, malignant; paraganglioma, malignant; extra-mammary paraganglioma, malignant; pheochromocytoma; glomangiosarcoma; malignant melanoma; amelanotic melanoma; superficial spreading melanoma; malig melanoma in giant pigmented nevus; epithelioid cell melanoma; blue nevus, malignant; sarcoma; fibrosarcoma; fibrous histiocytoma, malignant; myxosarcoma; liposarcoma; leiomyosarcoma; rhabdomyosarcoma; embryonal rhabdomyosarcoma; alveolar rhabdomyosarcoma; stromal sarcoma; mixed tumor, malignant; mullerian mixed tumor; nephroblastoma; hepatoblastoma; carcinosarcoma; mesenchymoma, malignant; brenner tumor, malignant; phyllodes tumor, malignant; synovial sarcoma; mesothelioma, malignant; dysgerminoma; embryonal carcinoma; teratoma, malignant; struma ovarii, malignant; choriocarcinoma; mesonephroma, malignant; hemangiosarcoma; hemangioendothelioma, malignant; kaposi's sarcoma; hemangiopericytoma, malignant; lymphangiosarcoma; osteosarcoma; juxtacortical osteosarcoma; chondrosarcoma; chondroblastoma, malignant; mesenchymal chondrosarcoma; giant cell tumor of bone; ewing's sarcoma; odontogenic tumor, malignant; ameloblastic odontosarcoma; ameloblastoma, malignant; ameloblastic fibrosarcoma; pinealoma, malignant; chordoma; glioma, malignant; ependymoma; astrocytoma; protoplasmic astrocytoma; fibrillary astrocytoma; astroblastoma; glioblastoma; oligodendroglioma; oligodendroblastoma; primitive neuroectodermal; cerebellar sarcoma; ganglioneuroblastoma; neuroblastoma; retinoblastoma; olfactory neurogenic tumor; meningioma, malignant; neurofibrosarcoma; neurilemmoma, malignant; granular cell tumor, malignant; malignant lymphoma; Hodgkin's disease; Hodgkin's lymphoma; paragranuloma; malignant lymphoma, small lymphocytic; malignant lymphoma, large cell, diffuse; malignant lymphoma, follicular; mycosis fungoides; other specified non-Hodgkin's lymphomas; malignant histiocytosis; multiple myeloma; mast cell sarcoma; immunoproliferative small intestinal disease; leukemia; lymphoid leukemia; plasma cell leukemia; erythroleukemia; lymphosarcoma cell leukemia; myeloid leukemia; basophilic leukemia; eosinophilic leukemia; monocytic leukemia; mast cell leukemia; megakaryoblastic leukemia; myeloid sarcoma; hairy cell leukemia, plasmacytoma, colorectal cancer, rectal cancer, Merkel Cell carcinoma, and salivary gland carcinoma.
  • In some embodiments, the methods and compositions provided herein relate to the treatment of a leukemia. The term “leukemia” is meant broadly progressive, malignant diseases of the hematopoietic organs/systems and is generally characterized by a distorted proliferation and development of leukocytes and their precursors in the blood and bone marrow. Non-limiting examples of leukemia diseases include, acute nonlymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, acute granulocytic leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, adult T-cell leukemia, aleukemic leukemia, a leukocythemic leukemia, basophilic leukemia, blast cell leukemia, bovine leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia, leukemia cutis, embryonal leukemia, eosinophilic leukemia, Gross' leukemia, Rieder cell leukemia, Schilling's leukemia, stem cell leukemia, subleukemic leukemia, undifferentiated cell leukemia, hairy-cell leukemia, hemoblastic leukemia, hemocytoblastic leukemia, histiocytic leukemia, stem cell leukemia, acute monocytic leukemia, leukopenic leukemia, lymphatic leukemia, lymphoblastic leukemia, lymphocytic leukemia, lymphogenous leukemia, lymphoid leukemia, lymphosarcoma cell leukemia, mast cell leukemia, megakaryocytic leukemia, micromyeloblastic leukemia, monocytic leukemia, myeloblastic leukemia, myelocytic leukemia, myeloid granulocytic leukemia, myelomonocytic leukemia, Naegeli leukemia, plasma cell leukemia, plasmacytic leukemia, and promyelocytic leukemia.
  • In some embodiments, the methods and compositions provided herein relate to the treatment of a carcinoma. The term “carcinoma” refers to a malignant growth made up of epithelial cells tending to infiltrate the surrounding tissues, and/or resist physiological and non-physiological cell death signals and gives rise to metastases. Non-limiting exemplary types of carcinomas include, acinar carcinoma, acinous carcinoma, adenocystic carcinoma, adenoid cystic carcinoma, carcinoma adenomatosum, carcinoma of adrenal cortex, alveolar carcinoma, alveolar cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, carcinoma basocellulare, basaloid carcinoma, basosquamous cell carcinoma, bronchioalveolar carcinoma, bronchiolar carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, cerebriform carcinoma, cholangiocellular carcinoma, chorionic carcinoma, colloid carcinoma, comedo carcinoma, corpus carcinoma, cribriform carcinoma, carcinoma en cuirasse, carcinoma cutaneum, cylindrical carcinoma, cylindrical cell carcinoma, duct carcinoma, carcinoma durum, embryonal carcinoma, encephaloid carcinoma, epiennoid carcinoma, carcinoma epitheliale adenoides, exophytic carcinoma, carcinoma ex ulcere, carcinoma fibrosum, gelatiniform carcinoma, gelatinous carcinoma, giant cell carcinoma, signet-ring cell carcinoma, carcinoma simplex, small-cell carcinoma, solanoid carcinoma, spheroidal cell carcinoma, spindle cell carcinoma, carcinoma spongiosum, squamous carcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, string carcinoma, carcinoma telangiectaticum, carcinoma telangiectodes, transitional cell carcinoma, carcinoma tuberosum, tuberous carcinoma, verrucous carcinoma, carcinoma villosum, carcinoma gigantocellulare, glandular carcinoma, granulosa cell carcinoma, hair-matrix carcinoma, hematoid carcinoma, hepatocellular carcinoma, Hurthle cell carcinoma, hyaline carcinoma, hypernephroid carcinoma, infantile embryonal carcinoma, carcinoma in situ, intraepidermal carcinoma, intraepithelial carcinoma, Krompecher's carcinoma, Kulchitzky-cell carcinoma, large-cell carcinoma, lenticular carcinoma, carcinoma lenticulare, lipomatous carcinoma, lymphoepithelial carcinoma, carcinoma medullare, medullary carcinoma, melanotic carcinoma, carcinoma molle, mucinous carcinoma, carcinoma muciparum, carcinoma mucocellulare, mucoepidermoid carcinoma, carcinoma mucosum, mucous carcinoma, carcinoma myxomatodes, naspharyngeal carcinoma, oat cell carcinoma, carcinoma ossificans, osteoid carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, periportal carcinoma, preinvasive carcinoma, prickle cell carcinoma, pultaceous carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma of kidney, reserve cell carcinoma, carcinoma sarcomatodes, schneiderian carcinoma, scirrhous carcinoma, and carcinoma scroti.
  • In some embodiments, the methods and compositions provided herein relate to the treatment of a sarcoma. The term “sarcoma” generally refers to a tumor which is made up of a substance like the embryonic connective tissue and is generally composed of closely packed cells embedded in a fibrillar, heterogeneous, or homogeneous substance. Sarcomas include, but are not limited to, chondrosarcoma, fibrosarcoma, lymphosarcoma, melanosarcoma, myxosarcoma, osteosarcoma, endometrial sarcoma, stromal sarcoma, Ewing's sarcoma, fascial sarcoma, fibroblastic sarcoma, giant cell sarcoma, Abemethy's sarcoma, adipose sarcoma, liposarcoma, alveolar soft part sarcoma, ameloblastic sarcoma, botryoid sarcoma, chloroma sarcoma, chorio carcinoma, embryonal sarcoma, Wilms' tumor sarcoma, granulocytic sarcoma, Hodgkin's sarcoma, idiopathic multiple pigmented hemorrhagic sarcoma, immunoblastic sarcoma of B cells, lymphoma, immunoblastic sarcoma of T-cells, Jensen's sarcoma, Kaposi's sarcoma, Kupffer cell sarcoma, angiosarcoma, leukosarcoma, malignant mesenchymoma sarcoma, parosteal sarcoma, reticulocytic sarcoma, Rous sarcoma, serocystic sarcoma, synovial sarcoma, and telangiectaltic sarcoma.
  • Additional exemplary neoplasias that can be treated using the methods and compositions described herein include Hodgkin's Disease, Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma, multiple myeloma, neuroblastoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, lung cancer, rhabdomyosarcoma, primary thrombocytosis, primary macroglobulinemia, small-cell lung tumors, primary brain tumors, stomach cancer, colon cancer, malignant pancreatic insulanoma, malignant carcinoid, premalignant skin lesions, testicular cancer, lymphomas, thyroid cancer, neuroblastoma, esophageal cancer, genitourinary tract cancer, malignant hypercalcemia, cervical cancer, endometrial cancer, and adrenal cortical cancer.
  • In some embodiments, the cancer treated is a melanoma. The term “melanoma” is taken to mean a tumor arising from the melanocytic system of the skin and other organs. Non-limiting examples of melanomas are Harding-Passey melanoma, juvenile melanoma, lentigo maligna melanoma, malignant melanoma, acral-lentiginous melanoma, amelanotic melanoma, benign juvenile melanoma, Cloudman's melanoma, S91 melanoma, nodular melanoma subungal melanoma, and superficial spreading melanoma.
  • Particular categories of tumors that can be treated using methods and compositions described herein include lymphoproliferative disorders, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, cervical cancer, endometrial cancer, bone cancer, liver cancer, stomach cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, cancer of the thyroid, head and neck cancer, cancer of the central nervous system, cancer of the peripheral nervous system, skin cancer, kidney cancer, as well as metastases of all the above. Particular types of tumors include hepatocellular carcinoma, hepatoma, hepatoblastoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, esophageal carcinoma, thyroid carcinoma, ganglioblastoma, fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, Ewing's tumor, leimyosarcoma, rhabdotheliosarcoma, invasive ductal carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinoma, melanoma, pulmonary squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma (well differentiated, moderately differentiated, poorly differentiated or undifferentiated), bronchioloalveolar carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hypernephroma, hypernephroid adenocarcinoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma including small cell, non-small and large cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, glioma, astrocyoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, retinoblastoma, neuroblastoma, colon carcinoma, rectal carcinoma, hematopoietic malignancies including all types of leukemia and lymphoma including: acute myelogenous leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, mast cell leukemia, multiple myeloma, myeloid lymphoma, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma.
  • Cancers treated in certain embodiments also include precancerous lesions, e.g., actinic keratosis (solar keratosis), moles (dysplastic nevi), acitinic chelitis (farmer's lip), cutaneous horns, Barrett's esophagus, atrophic gastritis, dyskeratosis congenita, sideropenic dysphagia, lichen planus, oral submucous fibrosis, actinic (solar) elastosis and cervical dysplasia.
  • Cancers treated in some embodiments include non-cancerous or benign tumors, e.g., of endodermal, ectodermal or mesenchymal origin, including, but not limited to cholangioma, colonic polyp, adenoma, papilloma, cystadenoma, liver cell adenoma, hydatidiform mole, renal tubular adenoma, squamous cell papilloma, gastric polyp, hemangioma, osteoma, chondroma, lipoma, fibroma, lymphangioma, leiomyoma, rhabdomyoma, astrocytoma, nevus, meningioma, and ganglioneuroma.
    • EXAMPLES Example 1: Immune Modulation of Human Commensal Bacteria in a KLH-Based Delayed Type Hypersensitivity Model
  • Delayed-type hypersensitivity (DTH) is an animal model of atopic dermatitis (or allergic contact dermatitis), as reviewed by Petersen et al. (In vivo pharmacological disease models for psoriasis and atopic dermatitis in drug discovery. Basic & Clinical Pharm & Toxicology. 2006. 99(2): 104-115; see also Irving C. Allen (ed.) Mouse Models of Innate Immunity: Methods and Protocols, Methods in Molecular Biology, 2013. vol. 1031, DOI 10.1007/978-1-62703-481-4_13). It can be induced in a variety of mouse and rat strains using various haptens or antigens, for example an antigen emulsified with an adjuvant. DTH is characterized by sensitization as well as an antigen-specific T cell-mediated reaction that results in erythema, edema, and cellular infiltration—especially infiltration of antigen presenting cells (APCs), eosinophils, activated CD4+ T cells, and cytokine-expressing Th2 cells.
  • The test formulations were prepared for KLH-based delayed type hypersensitivity model. The delayed-type hypersensitivity (DTH) model provides an in vivo mechanism to study the cell-mediated immune response, and resulting inflammation, following exposure to a specific antigen to which the mice have been sensitized. Several variations of the DTH model have been used and are well known in the art (Irving C. Allen (ed.). Mouse Models of Innate Immunity: Methods and Protocols, Methods in Molecular Biology. Vol. 1031, DOI 10.1007/978-1-62703-481-4_13, Springer Science+Business Media, LLC 2013). For example, the emulsion of Keyhole Limpet Hemocyanin (KLH) and Complete Freund's Adjuvant (CFA) are prepared freshly on the day of immunization (day 0). To this end, 8 mg of KLH powder is weighed and is thoroughly re-suspended in 16 mL saline. An emulsion is prepared by mixing the KLH/saline with an equal volume of CFA solution (e.g. 10 mL KLH/saline+10 mL CFA solution) using syringes and a luer lock connector. KLH and CFA is mixed vigorously for several minutes to form a white-colored emulsion to obtain maximum stability. A drop test is performed to check if a homogenous emulsion is obtained, mixing is continued until an intact drop remains visible in the water.
  • On day 0, C57Bl/6J female mice, approximately 7 weeks old, were primed with KLH antigen in CFA by subcutaneous immunization (4 sites, 50 μL per site).
  • Dexamethasone, a corticosteroid, is a known anti-inflammatory that ameliorates DTH reactions in mice, and serves as a positive control for suppressing inflammation in this model (Taube and Carlsten, Action of dexamethasone in the suppression of delayed-type hypersensitivity in reconstituted SCID mice. Inflamm Res. 2000. 49(10): 548-52). For the positive control group, a stock solution of 17 mg/mL of Dexamethasone was prepared on by diluting 6.8 mg Dexamethasone in 400 μL 96% ethanol. For each day of dosing, a working solution is prepared by diluting the stock solution 100× in sterile PBS to obtain a final concentration of 0.17 mg/mL in a septum vial for intraperitoneal dosing. Dexamethasone-treated mice received 100 μL Dexamethasone i.p. (5 mL/kg of a 0.17 mg/mL solution). Frozen sucrose served as the negative control (vehicle). Bacteria are dosed at 100 ul of bacterial cells at 1×10{circumflex over ( )}10 CFU/ml p.o. daily. Dexamethasone (positive control), vehicle (negative control), and bacteria of the bacterial strain were dosed daily.
  • On day 8, mice are challenged intradermally (i.d.) with 10 μg KLH in saline (in a volume of 10 μL) in the right ear and a control in the left ear. Inflammatory response are measured using methods known in the art. Ear pinna thickness was measured at 48 hours following antigen challenge.
  • The efficacy of the bacteria may be studied further using varied timing and varied doses. For instance, treatment with bacteria of a strain of table containing bacterial composition may be initiated at some point, either around the time of priming or around the time of DTH challenge. For example, bacteria (1×109 CFU per mouse per day) may be administered at the same time as the subcutaneous injections (day 0), or they may be administered prior to, or upon, intradermal injection. The bacterial composition is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with a bacterial composition at a range of between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. While some mice receive the bacteria through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacteria through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, topical administration, intradermal (i.d.) injection, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacteria every day (e.g. starting on day 0), while others may receive the bacteria at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strains listed in table 1. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1) administrated. As with the bacterial strain (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1), bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, i.d. injection, topical administration, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with anti-inflammatory agent(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • In addition, some mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment. For example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment. Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • Study animals may be sacrificed by exsanguination from the orbital plexus under CO2/O2 anesthesia, followed by cervical dislocation on day 10. For serum preparation, the blood samples are allowed to clot before centrifuging. The sera are transferred into clean tubes, each animal in a separate tube. Following exsanguination, of all animals both ears (each ear in a separate vial), the spleen, the mesenteric lymph nodes (MLN), the entire small intestine, and the colon are collected in cryovials, snap frozen and stored at <−70° C.
  • Tissues may be dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103. Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80). In addition to immunophenotyping, serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
    • Example 2: An Evaluation of Test Articles in the Modulation of DSS-Induced Colitis in C57BL/6 Mice
  • Dextran sulfate sodium (DSS)-induced colitis is a well-studied animal model of colitis, as reviewed by Randhawa et al. (A review on chemical-induced inflammatory bowel disease models in rodents. Korean J Physiol Pharmacol. 2014. 18(4): 279-288; see also Chassaing et al. Dextran sulfate sodium (DSS)-induced colitis in mice. Curr Protoc Immunol. 2014 Feb. 4; 104: Unit 15.25). In this model, mice are treated with DSS in drinking water, resulting in diarrhea and weight loss.
  • Groups of mice were treated with DSS to induce colitis as known in the art (Randhawa et al. 2014; Chassaing et al. 2014; see also Kim et al. Investigating intestinal inflammation in DSS-induced model of IBD. J Vis Exp. 2012. 60: 3678). For example, colitis was induced in mice by exposure to 3% DSS-treated drinking water from Day 0 to Day 5. One group did not receive DSS and served as naive controls. Animals were dosed with sucrose vehicle (negative control), bacterial strain (1×109 CFU per mouse per day), or anti-p40 positive control (administered i.p. on days 0, 3, 7, and 10). All animals were weighed daily.
  • In other studies, treatment with a bacterial strain (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1)-containing bacterial composition may be initiated at some point, either on day 1 of DSS administration, or sometime thereafter. For example, the bacterial strain A may be administered at the same time as DSS initiation (day 1), or they may be administered upon the first signs of disease (e.g. weight loss or diarrhea), or during the stages of severe colitis. Mice may be observed daily for weight, morbidity, survival, presence of diarrhea and/or bloody stool.
  • The bacterial strain is administered at varied doses, varied intervals, and/or varied routes of administration. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a dose of between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • The bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions may be tested for their efficacy in a mouse model of DSS-induced colitis, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory agents.
  • For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain, bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • In addition, some mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment. For example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment. Some mice receive DSS without receiving antibiotics beforehand.
  • At various timepoints, mice undergo video endoscopy using a small animal endoscope (Karl Storz Endoskipe, Germany) under isoflurane anesthesia. Still images and video are recorded to evaluate the extent of colitis and the response to treatment. Colitis is scored using criteria known in the art. Fecal material is collected for study.
  • The gastrointestinal (GI) tract, lymph nodes, and/or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art. For example, tissues are harvested and may be dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art. Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103. Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80). In addition to immunophenotyping, serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+GI tract-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be rechallenged with a disease trigger. Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to colitis severity following rechallenge.
  • Following sacrifice, the colon, small intestine, spleen, and mesenteric lymph nodes may be collected from all animals, and blood collected for analysis.
    • Example 3: A Mouse Model of Experimental Autoimmune Encephalomyelitis (EAE)
  • EAE is a well-studied animal model of multiple sclerosis, as reviewed by Constantinescu et al. (Experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE) as a model for multiple sclerosis (MS). Br J Pharmacol. 2011 October; 164(4): 1079-1106). It can be induced in a variety of mouse and rat strains using different myelin-associated peptides, by the adoptive transfer of activated encephalitogenic T cells, or the use of TCR transgenic mice susceptible to EAE, as discussed in Mangalam et al. (Two discreet subsets of CD8+ T cells modulate PLP91-110 induced experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis in HLA-DR3 transgenic mice. J Autoimmun 2012 June; 38(4): 344-353).
  • The bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in the rodent model of EAE, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory treatments. For example, female 6-8 week old C57Bl/6 mice are obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). Groups of mice are administered two subcutaneous (s.c.) injections at two sites on the back (upper and lower) of 0.1 ml myelin oligodentrocyte glycoprotein 35-55 (MOG35-55; 100 ug per injection; 200 ug per mouse (total 0.2 ml per mouse)), emulsified in Complete Freund's Adjuvant (CFA; 2-5 mg killed Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra/ml emulsion). Approximately 1-2 hours after the above, mice are intraperitoneally (i.p.) injected with 200 ng Pertussis toxin (PTx) in 0.1 ml PBS (2 ug/ml). An additional IP injection of PTx is administered on day 2. Alternatively, an appropriate amount of an alternative myelin peptide (e.g. proteolipid protein (PLP)) is used to induce EAE. Some animals serve as naïve controls. EAE severity is assessed and a disability score is assigned daily beginning on day 4 according to methods known in the art (Mangalam et al. 2012).
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain-containing bacterial composition is initiated at some point, either around the time of immunization or following EAE immunization. For example, the bacterial strain-containing bacterial composition may be administered at the same time as immunization (day 1), or they may be administered upon the first signs of disability (e.g. limp tail), or during severe EAE. The bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with effective doses of the bacterial strain. For example, mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain (e.g., a strain of bacteria listed in Table 1), bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) or EAE therapeutic(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, Vitamin D, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various time points and at effective doses.
  • In addition, some mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment. For example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment. Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • At various time points, mice are sacrificed and sites of inflammation (e.g. brain and spinal cord), lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art. For example, tissues are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103. Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80). In addition to immunophenotyping, serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ central nervous system (CNS)-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be rechallenged with a disease trigger (e.g. activated encephalitogenic T cells or re-injection of EAE-inducing peptides). Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to disease and EAE severity following rechallenge.
    • Example 4: A Mouse Model of Collagen-Induced Arthritis (CIA)
  • Collagen-induced arthritis (CIA) is an animal model commonly used to study rheumatoid arthritis (RA), as described by Caplazi et al. (Mouse models of rheumatoid arthritis. Veterinary Pathology. Sep. 1, 2015. 52(5): 819-826) (see also Brand et al. Collagen-induced arthritis. Nature Protocols. 2007. 2: 1269-1275; Pietrosimone et al. Collagen-induced arthritis: a model for murine autoimmune arthritis. Bio Protoc. 2015 Oct. 20; 5(20): e1626).
  • Among other versions of the CIA rodent model, one model involves immunizing HLA-DQ8 Tg mice with chick type II collagen as described by Tanej a et al. (J. Immunology. 2007. 56: 69-78; see also Taneja et al. J. Immunology 2008. 181: 2869-2877; and Taneja et al. Arthritis Rheum., 2007. 56: 69-78). Purification of chick CII has been described by Taneja et al. (Arthritis Rheum., 2007. 56: 69-78). Mice are monitored for CIA disease onset and progression following immunization, and severity of disease is evaluated and “graded” as described by Wooley, J. Exp. Med. 1981. 154: 688-700.
  • Mice are immunized for CIA induction and separated into various treatment groups. The bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in CIA, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory treatments.
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain-containing bacterial composition is initiated either around the time of immunization with collagen or post-immunization. For example, in some groups, the bacterial strain may be administered at the same time as immunization (day 1), or the bacterial strain may be administered upon first signs of disease, or upon the onset of severe symptoms. The bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals.
  • For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a dose of between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other groups of mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain, bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, intradermal (i.d.) injection, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with additional anti-inflammatory agent(s) or CIA therapeutic(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, Vitamin D, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various time points and at effective doses.
  • In addition, some mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment. For example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment. Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • At various time points, serum samples are obtained to assess levels of anti-chick and anti-mouse CII IgG antibodies using a standard ELISA (Batsalova et al. Comparative analysis of collagen type II-specific immune responses during development of collagen-induced arthritis in two B10 mouse strains. Arthritis Res Ther. 2012. 14(6): R237). Also, some mice are sacrificed and sites of inflammation (e.g. synovium), lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art. The synovium and synovial fluid are analyzed for plasma cell infiltration and the presence of antibodies using techniques known in the art. In addition, tissues are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions to examine the profiles of the cellular infiltrates. Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art. Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103. Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80). In addition to immunophenotyping, serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ synovium-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be rechallenged with a disease trigger (e.g. activated re-injection with CIA-inducing peptides). Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to disease and CIA severity following rechallenge.
    • Example 5: A Mouse Model of Type 1 Diabetes (T1D)
  • Type 1 diabetes (T1D) is an autoimmune disease in which the immune system targets the islets of Langerhans of the pancreas, thereby destroying the body's ability to produce insulin.
  • There are various models of animal models of T1D, as reviewed by Belle et al. (Mouse models for type 1 diabetes. Drug Discov Today Dis Models. 2009; 6(2): 41-45; see also Aileen J F King. The use of animal models in diabetes research. Br J Pharmacol. 2012 June; 166(3): 877-894. There are models for chemically-induced T1D, pathogen-induced T1D, as well as models in which the mice spontaneously develop T1D.
  • The bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in a mouse model of T1D, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory treatments.
  • Depending on the method of T1D induction and/or whether T1D development is spontaneous, treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either around the time of induction or following induction, or prior to the onset (or upon the onset) of spontaneously-occurring T1D. The bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a dose of between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, or 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day, while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain, bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with additional treatments and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • In addition, some mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment. For example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment. Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • Blood glucose is monitored biweekly prior to the start of the experiment. At various timepoints thereafter, nonfasting blood glucose is measured. At various timepoints, mice are sacrificed and site the pancreas, lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art. For example, tissues are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art. Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103. Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80). In addition to immunophenotyping, serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified tissue-infiltrating immune cells obtained ex vivo. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression. Antibody production may also be assessed by ELISA.
  • In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be rechallenged with a disease trigger, or assessed for susceptibility to relapse. Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to diabetes onset and severity following rechallenge (or spontaneously-occurring relapse).
    • Example 6: A Mouse Model of Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis (PSC)
  • Primary Sclerosing Cholangitis (PSC) is a chronic liver disease that slowly damages the bile ducts and leads to end-stage cirrhosis. It is associated with inflammatory bowel disease (IBD).
  • There are various animal models for PSC, as reviewed by Fickert et al. (Characterization of animal models for primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC). J Hepatol. 2014 June 60(6): 1290-1303; see also Pollheimer and Fickert. Animal models in primary biliary cirrhosis and primary sclerosing cholangitis. Clin Rev Allergy Immunol. 2015 June 48(2-3): 207-17). Induction of disease in PSC models includes chemical induction (e.g. 3,5-diethoxycarbonyl-1,4-dihydrocollidine (DDC)-induced cholangitis), pathogen-induced (e.g. Cryptosporidium parvum), experimental biliary obstruction (e.g. common bile duct ligation (CBDL)), and transgenic mouse model of antigen-driven biliary injury (e.g. Ova-Bil transgenic mice). For example, bile duct ligation is performed as described by Georgiev et al. (Characterization of time-related changes after experimental bile duct ligation. Br J Surg. 2008. 95(5): 646-56), or disease is induced by DCC exposure as described by Fickert et al. (A new xenobiotic-induced mouse model of sclerosing cholangitis and biliary fibrosis. Am J Path. Vol 171(2): 525-536.
  • The bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in a mouse model of PSC, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of some other therapeutic agent.
    • DCC-Induced Cholangitis
  • For example, 6-8 week old C57b1/6 mice are obtained from Taconic or other vendor. Mice are fed a 0.1% DCC-supplemented diet for various durations. Some groups receive DCC-supplement food for 1 week, others for 4 weeks, others for 8 weeks. Some groups of mice may receive a DCC-supplemented diet for a length of time and then be allowed to recover, thereafter receiving a normal diet. These mice may be studied for their ability to recover from disease and/or their susceptibility to relapse upon subsequent exposure to DCC. Treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either around the time of DCC-feeding or subsequent to initial exposure to DCC. For example, the bacterial strain may be administered on day 1, or they may be administered sometime thereafter. The bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a range between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through i.p. injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen), and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration. For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain, bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration. Some groups of mice may be treated with additional agents and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • In addition, some mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment. For example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment. Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics. At various timepoints, serum samples are analyzed for ALT, AP, bilirubin, and serum bile acid (BA) levels.
  • At various timepoints, mice are sacrificed, body and liver weight are recorded, and sites of inflammation (e.g. liver, small and large intestine, spleen), lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histolomorphological characterization, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art (see Fickert et al. Characterization of animal models for primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC)). J Hepatol. 2014. 60(6): 1290-1303). For example, bile ducts are stained for expression of ICAM-1, VCAM-1, MadCAM-1. Some tissues are stained for histological examination, while others are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art. Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103. Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80), as well as adhesion molecule expression (ICAM-1, VCAM-1, MadCAM-1). In addition to immunophenotyping, serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ bile duct-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • Liver tissue is prepared for histological analysis, for example, using Sirius-red staining followed by quantification of the fibrotic area. At the end of the treatment, blood is collected for plasma analysis of liver enzymes, for example, AST or ALT, and to determine Bilirubin levels. The hepatic content of Hydroxyproline can be measured using established protocols. Hepatic gene expression analysis of inflammation and fibrosis markers may be performed by qRT-PCR using validated primers. These markers may include, but are not limited to, MCP-1, alpha-SMA, Coll1a1, and TIMP-. Metabolite measurements may be performed in plasma, tissue and fecal samples using established metabolomics methods. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on liver sections to measure neutrophils, T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, or other immune cell infiltrates.
  • In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be rechallenged with DCC at a later time. Mice are analyzed for susceptibility to cholangitis and cholangitis severity following rechallenge.
    • BDL-Induced Cholangitis
  • Alternatively, the bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in BDL-induced cholangitis. For example, 6-8 week old C57Bl/6J mice are obtained from Taconic or other vendor. After an acclimation period the mice are subjected to a surgical procedure to perform a bile duct ligation (BDL). Some control animals receive a sham surgery. The BDL procedure leads to liver injury, inflammation and fibrosis within 7-21 days.
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either around the time of surgery or some time following the surgery. The bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a range between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, or 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through i.p. injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. They bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen), and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration. For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain, bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration. Some groups of mice may be treated with additional agents and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • In addition, some mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment. For example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment. Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics. At various timepoints, serum samples are analyzed for ALT, AP, bilirubin, and serum bile acid (BA) levels.
  • At various timepoints, mice are sacrificed, body and liver weight are recorded, and sites of inflammation (e.g. liver, small and large intestine, spleen), lymph nodes, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histolomorphological characterization, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art (see Fickert et al. Characterization of animal models for primary sclerosing cholangitis (PSC)). J Hepatol. 2014. 60(6): 1290-1303). For example, bile ducts are stained for expression of ICAM-1, VCAM-1, MadCAM-1. Some tissues are stained for histological examination, while others are dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cells are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art. Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103. Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80), as well as adhesion molecule expression (ICAM-1, VCAM-1, MadCAM-1). In addition to immunophenotyping, serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ bile duct-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo.
  • Liver tissue is prepared for histological analysis, for example, using Sirius-red staining followed by quantification of the fibrotic area. At the end of the treatment, blood is collected for plasma analysis of liver enzymes, for example, AST or ALT, and to determine Bilirubin levels. The hepatic content of Hydroxyproline can be measured using established protocols. Hepatic gene expression analysis of inflammation and fibrosis markers may be performed by qRT-PCR using validated primers. These markers may include, but are not limited to, MCP-1, alpha-SMA, Coll1a1, and TIMP-. Metabolite measurements may be performed in plasma, tissue and fecal samples using established metabolomics methods. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on liver sections to measure neutrophils, T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, or other immune cell infiltrates.
  • In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be analyzed for recovery.
    • Example 7: A Mouse Model of Nonalcoholic Steatohepatitis (NASH)
  • Nonalcoholic Steatohepatitis (NASH) is a severe form of Nonalcoholic Fatty Liver Disease (NAFLD), where buildup of hepatic fat (steatosis) and inflammation lead to liver injury and hepatocyte cell death (ballooning).
  • There are various animal models of NASH, as reviewed by Ibrahim et al. (Animal models of Nonalcoholic steatohepatitis: Eat, Delete, and Inflame Dig Dis Sci. 2016 May. 61(5): 1325-1336; see also Lau et al. Animal models of non-alcoholic fatty liver disease: current perspectives and recent advances 2017 January 241(1): 36-44).
  • The bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in a mouse model of NASH, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of another therapeutic agent. For example, 8-10 week old C57Bl/6J mice, obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.), or other vendor, are placed on a methionine choline deficient (MCD) diet for a period of 4-8 weeks during which NASH features develop, including steatosis, inflammation, ballooning and fibrosis.
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either at the beginning of the diet, or at some point following diet initiation (for example, one week after). For example, the bacterial strain may be administered starting in the same day as the initiation of the MCD diet. The bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at doses between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, or 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain, bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route administration. Some groups of mice may be treated with additional NASH therapeutic(s) (e.g., FXR agonists, PPAR agonists, CCR2/5 antagonists or other treatment) and/or appropriate control at various timepoints and effective doses.
  • At various timepoints and/or at the end of the treatment, mice are sacrificed and liver, intestine, blood, feces, or other tissues may be removed for ex vivo histological, biochemical, molecular or cytokine and/or flow cytometry analysis using methods known in the art. For example, liver tissues are weighed and prepared for histological analysis, which may comprise staining with H&E, Sirius Red, and determination of NASH activity score (NAS). At various timepoints, blood is collected for plasma analysis of liver enzymes, for example, AST or ALT, using standards assays. In addition, the hepatic content of cholesterol, triglycerides, or fatty acid acids can be measured using established protocols. Hepatic gene expression analysis of inflammation, fibrosis, steatosis, ER stress, or oxidative stress markers may be performed by qRT-PCR using validated primers. These markers may include, but are not limited to, IL-6, MCP-1, alpha-SMA, Coll1a1, CHOP, and NRF2. Metabolite measurements may be performed in plasma, tissue and fecal samples using established biochemical and mass-spectrometry-based metabolomics methods. Serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ bile duct-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on liver or intestine sections to measure neutrophils, T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, or other immune cell infiltrates.
  • In order to examine the impact and longevity of disease protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be analyzed for recovery.
    • Example 8: A Mouse Model of Psoriasis
  • Psoriasis is a T-cell-mediated chronic inflammatory skin disease. So-called “plaque-type” psoriasis is the most common form of psoriasis and is typified by dry scales, red plaques, and thickening of the skin due to infiltration of immune cells into the dermis and epidermis. Several animal models have contributed to the understanding of this disease, as reviewed by Gudjonsson et al. (Mouse models of psoriasis. J Invest Derm. 2007. 127: 1292-1308; see also van der Fits et al. Imiquimod-induced psoriasis-like skin inflammation in mice is mediated via the IL-23/IL-17 axis. J. Immunol. 2009 May 1. 182(9): 5836-45).
  • Psoriasis can be induced in a variety of mouse models, including those that use transgenic, knockout, or xenograft models, as well as topical application of imiquimod (IMQ), a TLR7/8 ligand.
  • The bacterial strain-containing bacterial compositions are tested for their efficacy in the mouse model of psoriasis, either alone or in combination with whole bacterial cells, with or without the addition of other anti-inflammatory treatments. For example, 6-8 week old C57Bl/6 or Balb/c mice are obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.), or other vendor. Mice are shaved on the back and the right ear. Groups of mice receive a daily topical dose of 62.5 mg of commercially available IMQ cream (5%) (Aldara; 3M Pharmaceuticals). The dose is applied to the shaved areas for 5 or 6 consecutive days. At regular intervals, mice are scored for erythema, scaling, and thickening on a scale from 0 to 4, as described by van der Fits et al. (2009). Mice are monitored for ear thickness using a Mitutoyo micrometer.
  • Treatment with the bacterial strain is initiated at some point, either around the time of the first application of IMQ, or something thereafter. For example, the bacterial strain may be administered at the same time as the subcutaneous injections (day 0), or they may be administered prior to, or upon, application. The bacterial strain is administered at varied doses and at defined intervals. For example, some mice are intravenously injected with the bacterial strain at a dose of between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells per mouse. Other mice may receive 25, 50, or 100 mg of the bacterial strain per mouse. While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, topical administration, intradermal (i.d.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 0), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). Additional groups of mice may receive some ratio of bacterial cells to the bacterial strain. The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration.
  • For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain, bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, i.d. injection, s.c. injection, topical administration, or nasal route administration.
  • Some groups of mice may be treated with anti-inflammatory agent(s) (e.g. anti-CD154, blockade of members of the TNF family, or other treatment), and/or an appropriate control (e.g. vehicle or control antibody) at various timepoints and at effective doses.
  • In addition, some mice are treated with antibiotics prior to treatment. For example, vancomycin (0.5 g/L), ampicillin (1.0 g/L), gentamicin (1.0 g/L) and amphotericin B (0.2 g/L) are added to the drinking water, and antibiotic treatment is halted at the time of treatment or a few days prior to treatment. Some immunized mice are treated without receiving antibiotics.
  • At various timepoints, samples from back and ear skin are taken for cryosection staining analysis using methods known in the art. Other groups of mice are sacrificed and lymph nodes, spleen, mesenteric lymph nodes (MLN), the small intestine, colon, and other tissues may be removed for histology studies, ex vivo histological, cytokine and/or flow cytometric analysis using methods known in the art. Some tissues may be dissociated using dissociation enzymes according to the manufacturer's instructions. Cryosection samples, tissue samples, or cells obtained ex vivo are stained for analysis by flow cytometry using techniques known in the art. Staining antibodies can include anti-CD11c (dendritic cells), anti-CD80, anti-CD86, anti-CD40, anti-MHCII, anti-CD8a, anti-CD4, and anti-CD103. Other markers that may be analyzed include pan-immune cell marker CD45, T cell markers (CD3, CD4, CD8, CD25, Foxp3, T-bet, Gata3, Roryt, Granzyme B, CD69, PD-1, CTLA-4), and macrophage/myeloid markers (CD11b, MHCII, CD206, CD40, CSF1R, PD-L1, Gr-1, F4/80). In addition to immunophenotyping, serum cytokines are analyzed including, but not limited to, TNFa, IL-17, IL-13, IL-12p70, IL12p40, IL-10, IL-6, IL-5, IL-4, IL-2, IL-lb, IFNy, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, MIG, IP10, MIP1b, RANTES, and MCP-1. Cytokine analysis may be carried out on immune cells obtained from lymph nodes or other tissue, and/or on purified CD45+ skin-infiltrated immune cells obtained ex vivo. Finally, immunohistochemistry is carried out on various tissue sections to measure T cells, macrophages, dendritic cells, and checkpoint molecule protein expression.
  • In order to examine the impact and longevity of psoriasis protection, rather than being sacrificed, some mice may be studied to assess recovery, or they may be rechallenged with IMQ. The groups of rechallenged mice are analyzed for susceptibility to psoriasis and severity of response.
    • Example 9: Mouse Tumor Models
  • A mouse model of cancer is generated by subcutaneously injecting a tumor cell line or patient derived tumor sample and allowing it to engraft into C57BL/6, female mice at ages 6-8 weeks old. The methods provided herein are replicated using several tumor cell lines including: B16-F10 or B16-F10-SIY cells as an orthotopic model of melanoma, Panc02 cells as an orthotopic model of pancreatic cancer, injected at a concentration of 1×106 cells into the right flank (Maletzki et al 2008. Gut 57:483-491), LLC1 cells as an orthotopic model of lung cancer, CT-26 as an orthotopic model of colorectal cancer, and RM-1 as an orthotopic model of prostate cancer. As an example, methods for the B16-F10 model are provided in depth herein.
  • A syngeneic mouse model of spontaneous melanoma with a very high metastatic frequency is used to test the ability of bacteria to reduce tumor growth and the spread of metastases. The mouse melanoma cell line B16-F10 is obtained from ATCC. The cells are cultured in vitro as a monolayer in RPMI medium, supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum and 1% penicillin/streptomycin at 37° C. in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 in air. The exponentially growing tumor cells are harvested by trypsinization, washed three times with cold 1×PBS, and a suspension of 5E6 cells/ml is prepared for administration. Female C57BL/6 mice are used for this experiment. The mice are 6-8 weeks old and weigh approximately 16-20 g. For tumor development, each mouse is injected SC into the flank with 100 μl of the B16-F10 cell suspension. The mice are anesthetized by ketamine and xylazine prior to the cell transplantation. The animals used in the experiment may be started on an antibiotic treatment via instillation of a cocktail of kanamycin (0.4 mg/ml), gentamicin, (0.035 mg/ml), colistin (850 U/ml), metronidazole (0.215 mg/ml) and vancomycin (0.045 mg/ml) in the drinking water from day 2 to 5 and an intraperitoneal injection of clindamycin (10 mg/kg) on day 7 after tumor injection.
  • The size of the primary flank tumor is measured with a caliper every 2-3 days and the tumor volume is calculated using the following formula: tumor volume=the tumor width2×tumor length×0.5. After the primary tumor reaches approximately 100 mm3, the animals are sorted into several groups based on their body weight. The mice are then randomly taken from each group and assigned to a treatment group. The mice are orally inoculated with the bacterial strains disclosed herein (e.g. a bacterial strain of Table 1). Mice are orally gavaged with the same amount of bacteria daily, weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, bi-monthly, or on any other dosing schedule throughout the treatment period. Mice are IV injected in the tail vein or directly injected into the tumor. Mice can be injected with bacteria or inactivated bacteria. Mice can be injected weekly or once a month. All mice are housed under specific pathogen-free conditions following approved protocols. Tumor size, mouse weight, and body temperature are monitored every 3-4 days and the mice are humanely sacrificed 6 weeks after the B16-F10 mouse melanoma cell injection or when the volume of the primary tumor reaches 1000 mm3. Blood draws are taken weekly and a full necropsy under sterile conditions is performed at the termination of the protocol.
  • Cancer cells can be easily visualized in the mouse B16-F10 melanoma model due to their melanin production. Following standard protocols, tissue samples from lymph nodes and organs from the neck and chest region are collected and the presence of micro- and macro-metastases is analyzed using the following classification rule. An organ is classified as positive for metastasis if at least two micro-metastatic and one macro-metastatic lesion per lymph node or organ are found. Micro-metastases are detected by staining the paraffin-embedded lymphoid tissue sections with hematoxylin-eosin following standard protocols known to one skilled in the art. The total number of metastases is correlated to the volume of the primary tumor and it is found that the tumor volume correlates significantly with tumor growth time and the number of macro- and micro-metastases in lymph nodes and visceral organs and also with the sum of all observed metastases. Twenty-five different metastatic sites are identified as previously described (Bobek V., et al., Syngeneic lymph-node-targeting model of green fluorescent protein-expressing Lewis lung carcinoma, Clin. Exp. Metastasis, 2004; 21(8):705-8).
  • The tumor tissue samples are further analyzed for tumor infiltrating lymphocytes. The CD8+ cytotoxic T cells can be isolated by FACS (see Example 17) and can then be further analyzed using customized p/MHC class I microarrays to reveal their antigen specificity (see e.g. Deviren G., et al., Detection of antigen-specific T cells on p/MHC microarrays, J. Mol. Recognit., 2007 January-February; 20(1):32-8). CD4+ T cells can be analyzed using customized p/MHC class II microarrays.
  • The same experiment is also performed with a mouse model of multiple pulmonary melanoma metastases. The mouse melanoma cell line B16-BL6 is obtained from ATCC and the cells are cultured in vitro as described above. Female C57BL/6 mice are used for this experiment. The mice are 6-8 weeks old and weigh approximately 16-20 g. For tumor development, each mouse is injected into the tail vein with 100 μl of a 2E6 cells/ml suspension of B16-BL6 cells. The tumor cells that engraft upon IV injection end up in the lungs.
  • The mice are humanely killed after 9 days. The lungs are weighed and analyzed for the presence of pulmonary nodules on the lung surface. The extracted lungs are bleached with Fekete's solution, which does not bleach the tumor nodules because of the melanin in the B16 cells though a small fraction of the nodules is amelanotic (i.e. white). The number of tumor nodules is carefully counted to determine the tumor burden in the mice. Typically, 200-250 pulmonary nodules are found on the lungs of the control group mice (i.e. PBS gavage).
  • The percentage tumor burden is calculated for the three treatment groups. This measure is defined as the mean number of pulmonary nodules on the lung surfaces of mice that belong to a treatment group divided by the mean number of pulmonary nodules on the lung surfaces of the control group mice.
  • Determining Metabolic Content with H-NMR1
  • Biological triplicates of media and spent media samples after bacterial conditioning and after growth of the tumor are deproteinized using Sartorius Centrisart I filters (cutoff 10 kDa). Before use, the filter is washed twice by centrifugation of water to remove glycerol and a small volume (20 μl) of 20.2 mM trimethylsilyl-2,2,3,3-tetradeuteropropionic acid (TSP, sodium salt) in D20 is added to 700 ul of the ultrafiltrate, providing a chemical shift reference (0.00 ppm) and a deuterium lock signal. 650 ul of the sample is placed in a 5 mm NMR tube. Single pulse 1H-NMR spectra (500 MHz) are obtained on a Bruker DMX-500 spectrometer or comparable instrument as described previously (by Engelke et al. 2006 NMR spectroscopic studies on the late onset form of 3-methylutaconic aciduria type I and other defects in leucine metabolism. NMR Biomed. 19: 271-278). Phase and baseline are corrected manually. All spectra are scaled to TSP and metabolite signals are fitted semi-automatically with a Lorentzian line shape. Metabolite concentrations in the spent media are calculated relative to the known concentration in the standard medium and correspondingly expressed in units of mM. The concentration of a particular metabolite was calculated by the area of the corresponding peak to the area of the valine doublet at 1.04 ppm or an appropriate standard.
  • Determining Metabolic Content with LCMS
  • Metabolic content of a sample is ascertained using liquid chromatography techniques combined with mass spectrometry. A variety of techniques exist to determine metabolomic content of various samples and are known to one skilled in the art involving solvent extraction, chromatographic separation and a variety of ionization techniques coupled to mass determination (Roberts et al 2012 Targeted Metabolomics. Curr Protoc Mol Biol. 30: 1-24; Dettmer et al 2007, Mass spectrometry-based metabolomics. Mass Spectrom Rev. 26(1):51-78). As a non-limiting example, a LC-MS system includes a 4000 QTRAP triple quadrupole mass spectrometer (AB SCIEX) combined with 1100 Series pump (Agilent) and an HTS PAL autosampler (Leap Technologies). Media samples or other complex metabolic mixtures (˜10 μL) are extracted using nine volumes of 74.9:24.9:0.2 (v/v/v) acetonitrile/methanol/formic acid containing stable isotope-labeled internal standards (valine-d8, Isotec; and phenylalanine-d8, Cambridge Isotope Laboratories). Standards may be adjusted or modified depending on the metabolites of interest. The samples are centrifuged (10 mM, 9,000 g, 4° C.), and the supernatants (10 μL) are submitted to LCMS by injecting the solution onto the HILIC column (150×2.1 mm, 3 μm particle size). The column is eluted by flowing a 5% mobile phase [10 mM ammonium formate, 0.1% formic acid in water] for 1 min at a rate of 250 uL/min followed by a linear gradient over 10 min to a solution of 40% mobile phase [acetonitrile with 0.1% formic acid]. The ion spray voltage is set to 4.5 kV and the source temperature is 450° C.
  • The data are analyzed using commercially available software such as Multiquant 1.2 from AB SCIEX for mass spectrum peak integration. Peaks of interest are manually curated and compared to standards to confirm the identity of the peak. Quantitation with appropriate standards is performed to determine the amount of metabolites present in the initial media, after bacterial conditioning and after tumor cell growth.
  • The tumor biopsies and blood samples are submitted for metabolic analysis via LCMS techniques described herein. Differential levels of amino acids, sugars, lactate, among other metabolites, between test groups demonstrate the ability of the microbial composition to disrupt the tumor metabolic state.
  • RNA Seq to Determine Mechanism of Action
  • Dendritic cells are purified from tumors, Peyers patches, and mesenteric lymph nodes as described in Example 12. RNAseq analysis is carried out and analyzed according to standard techniques known to one skilled in the art (Z. Hou. Scientific Reports. 5(9570):doi:10.1038/srep09570 (2015)). In the analysis, specific attention is placed on innate inflammatory pathway genes including TLRs, CLRs, NLRs, and STING, cytokines, chemokines, antigen processing and presentation pathways, cross presentation, and T cell co-stimulation.
    • Example 10: Administering Bacteria to Treat Syngeneic Mouse Tumor Models in Combination with PD-1 or PD-L1 Inhibition
  • To determine the efficacy of the bacterial strains disclosed herein in syngeneic tumor mouse models, colorectal cancer (CT-26) or other cancer model is used. Briefly, CT-26 (CAT #CRL-2638) tumor cells are cultured in vitro as a monolayer in RPMI-1640 or DMEM supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum at 37° C. in an atmosphere of 5% CO2 in air. The exponentially-growing cells are harvested and counted prior to tumor inoculation. 6-8 week old female BALB/c mice are used for this experiment. For tumor development, each mouse is injected subcutaneously in one or both rear flanks with 5×105 CT-26 tumor cells in 0.1 ml of 1×PBS. Some mice may receive antibiotic pre-treatment. Tumor size and mouse weight are monitored at least thrice weekly on nonconsecutive days.
  • The bacterial strains are tested for their efficacy in the mouse tumor model, either with or without anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1. Bacterial cells, and/or anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1 are administered at varied time points and at varied doses. For example, on day 10 after tumor injection, or after the tumor volume reaches 100 mm3, the mice are treated with the bacterial strain alone or in combination with anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1.
  • While some mice receive the bacterial strain through i.v. injection, other mice may receive the bacterial strain through intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, subcutaneous (s.c.) injection, nasal route administration, oral gavage, or other means of administration. Some mice may receive the bacterial strain every day (e.g. starting on day 1), while others may receive the bacterial strain at alternative intervals (e.g. every other day, or once every three days). The bacterial cells may be live, dead, or weakened. The bacterial cells may be harvested fresh (or frozen) and administered, or they may be irradiated or heat-killed prior to administration. For example, some groups of mice may receive between 1×104 and 5×109 bacterial cells in an administration separate from, or comingled with, the bacterial strain administration. As with the bacterial strain, bacterial cell administration may be varied by route of administration, dose, and schedule. This can include oral gavage, i.v. injection, i.p. injection, or nasal route injection. Some groups of mice are also injected with effective doses of checkpoint inhibitor. For example, mice receive 100 μg anti-PD-L1 mAB (clone 10f.9g2, BioXCell) or another anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1 mAB in 100 μl PBS, and some mice receive vehicle and/or other appropriate control (e.g. control antibody). Mice are injected with mABs 3, 6, and 9 days after the initial injection. To assess whether checkpoint inhibition and the bacterial strain immunotherapy have an additive, anti-tumor effect, control mice receiving anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1 mABs are included to the standard control panel. Primary (tumor size) and secondary (tumor infiltrating lymphocytes and cytokine analysis) endpoints are assessed, and some groups of mice are rechallenged with a subsequent tumor cell inoculation to assess the effect of treatment on memory response.
    • Example 11: An Orally Administered RuminococcusGnavus Strain Inhibits Colorectal Carcinoma Tumor Growth
  • Female 6-8 week old Balb/c mice were obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). 100,000 CT-26 colorectal tumor cells (ATCC CRL-2638) were resuspended in sterile PBS and inoculated in the presence of 50% Matrigel. CT-26 tumor cells were subcutaneously injected into one hind flank of each mouse. When tumor volumes reached an average of 100 mm3 (approximately 10-12 days following tumor cell inoculation), animals were distributed into the following groups: 1) Vehicle; 2) anti-PD-1 antibody; and 3) Ruminococcus gnavus. Antibodies were administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) at 200 ug/mouse (100 ul final volume) every four days, starting on day 1, and Ruminococcus gnavus bacteria (6.7×108) were administered by oral gavage (p.o.) daily, starting on day 1 until the conclusion of the study. The Ruminococcus gnavus group showed tumor growth inhibition comparable to that seen in the anti-PD-1 group (FIGS. 1, 2, 3, and 4).
  • The effect of a combination therapy comprising administration of both Ruminococcus gnavus and anti-PD-1 antibody was tested. Female 6-8 week old Balb/c mice were obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). 100,000 CT-26 colorectal tumor cells (ATCC CRL-2638) were resuspended in sterile PBS and inoculated in the presence of 50% Matrigel. CT-26 tumor cells were subcutaneously injected into one hind flank of each mouse. When tumor volumes reached an average of 100 mm3 (approximately 10-12 days following tumor cell inoculation), animals were distributed into the following groups: 1) Vehicle; 2) anti-PD-1 antibody; and 3) Ruminococcus gnavus and anti-PD-1 antibody. Antibodies were administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) at 200 ug/mouse (100 ul final volume) every four days, starting on day 1, and Ruminococcus gnavus bacteria (6.7×108) were administered by oral gavage (p.o.) daily, starting on day 1 until the conclusion of the study. The Ruminococcus gnavus group showed tumor growth inhibition comparable to that seen in the anti-PD-1 group (FIGS. 5 and 6).
    • Example 12: An Orally Administered Tyzzerella nexilis Strain Inhibits Colorectal Carcinoma Tumor Growth
  • Female 6-8 week old Balb/c mice were obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). 100,000 CT-26 colorectal tumor cells (ATCC CRL-2638) were resuspended in sterile PBS and inoculated in the presence of 50% Matrigel. CT-26 tumor cells were subcutaneously injected into one hind flank of each mouse. When tumor volumes reached an average of 100 mm3 (approximately 10-12 days following tumor cell inoculation), animals were distributed into the following groups: 1) Vehicle; 2) anti-PD-1 antibody; and 3) Tyzzerella nexilis. Antibodies were administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) at 200 ug/mouse (100 ul final volume) every four days, starting on day 1, and Tyzzerella nexilis bacteria (6.7×108) were administered by oral gavage (p.o.) daily, starting on day 1 until the conclusion of the study. The Tyzzerella nexilis group showed tumor growth inhibition comparable to that seen in the anti-PD-1 group (FIG. 7).
  • The effect of a combination therapy comprising administration of both Tyzzerella nexilis and anti-PD-1 antibody is tested. Female 6-8 week old Balb/c mice are obtained from Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). 100,000 CT-26 colorectal tumor cells (ATCC CRL-2638) are resuspended in sterile PBS and inoculated in the presence of 50% Matrigel. CT-26 tumor cells are subcutaneously injected into one hind flank of each mouse. When tumor volumes reach an average of 100 mm3 (approximately 10-12 days following tumor cell inoculation), animals are distributed into the following groups: 1) Vehicle; 2) anti-PD-1 antibody; and 3) Tyzzerella nexilis and anti-PD-1 antibody. Antibodies are administered intraperitoneally (i.p.) at 200 ug/mouse (100 ul final volume) every four days, starting on day 1, and Tyzzerella nexilis bacteria (6.7×108) are administered by oral gavage (p.o.) daily, starting on day 1 until the conclusion of the study. The Tyzzerella nexilis group show tumor growth inhibition comparable to that seen in the anti-PD-1 group.
    • Example 13: Manufacturing Conditions
  • Enriched media is used to grow and prepare the bacterium for in vitro and in vivo use. For example, media may contain sugar, yeast extracts, plant based peptones, buffers, salts, trace elements, surfactants, anti-foaming agents, and vitamins Composition of complex components such as yeast extracts and peptones may be undefined or partially defined (including approximate concentrations of amino acids, sugars etc.). Microbial metabolism may be dependent on the availability of resources such as carbon and nitrogen. Various sugars or other carbon sources may be tested. Alternatively, media may be prepared and the selected bacterium grown as shown by Saarela et al., J. Applied Microbiology. 2005. 99: 1330-1339, which is hereby incorporated by reference. Influence of fermentation time, cryoprotectant and neutralization of cell concentrate on freeze-drying survival, storage stability, and acid and bile exposure of the selected bacterium produced without milk-based ingredients.
  • At large scale, the media is sterilized. Sterilization may be by Ultra High Temperature (UHT) processing. The UHT processing is performed at very high temperature for short periods of time. The UHT range may be from 135-180° C. For example, the medium may be sterilized from between 10 to 30 seconds at 135° C.
  • Inoculum can be prepared in flasks or in smaller bioreactors and growth is monitored. For example, the inoculum size may be between approximately 0.5 and 3% of the total bioreactor volume. Depending on the application and need for material, bioreactor volume can be at least 2 L, 10 L, 80 L, 100 L, 250 L, 1000 L, 2500 L, 5000 L, 10,000 L.
  • Before the inoculation, the bioreactor is prepared with medium at desired pH, temperature, and oxygen concentration. The initial pH of the culture medium may be different that the process set-point. pH stress may be detrimental at low cell centration; the initial pH could be between pH 7.5 and the process set-point. For example, pH may be set between 4.5 and 8.0. During the fermentation, the pH can be controlled through the use of sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, or ammonium hydroxide. The temperature may be controlled from 25° C. to 45° C., for example at 37° C. Anaerobic conditions are created by reducing the level of oxygen in the culture broth from around 8 mg/L to 0 mg/L. For example, nitrogen or gas mixtures (N2, CO2, and H2) may be used in order to establish anaerobic conditions. Alternatively, no gases are used and anaerobic conditions are established by cells consuming remaining oxygen from the medium. Depending on strain and inoculum size, the bioreactor fermentation time can vary. For example, fermentation time can vary from approximately 5 hours to 48 hours.
  • Reviving microbes from a frozen state may require special considerations. Production medium may stress cells after a thaw; a specific thaw medium may be required to consistently start a seed train from thawed material. The kinetics of transfer or passage of seed material to fresh medium, for the purposes of increasing the seed volume or maintaining the microbial growth state, may be influenced by the current state of the microbes (ex. exponential growth, stationary growth, unstressed, stressed).
  • Inoculation of the production fermenter(s) can impact growth kinetics and cellular activity. The initial state of the bioreactor system must be optimized to facilitate successful and consistent production. The fraction of seed culture to total medium (e.g. a percentage) has a dramatic impact on growth kinetics. The range may be 1-5% of the fermenter's working volume. The initial pH of the culture medium may be different from the process set-point. pH stress may be detrimental at low cell concentration; the initial pH may be between pH 7.5 and the process set-point. Agitation and gas flow into the system during inoculation may be different from the process set-points. Physical and chemical stresses due to both conditions may be detrimental at low cell concentration.
  • Process conditions and control settings may influence the kinetics of microbial growth and cellular activity. Shifts in process conditions may change membrane composition, production of metabolites, growth rate, cellular stress, etc. Optimal temperature range for growth may vary with strain. The range may be 20-40° C. Optimal pH for cell growth and performance of downstream activity may vary with strain. The range may be pH 5-8. Gasses dissolved in the medium may be used by cells for metabolism. Adjusting concentrations of O2, CO2, and N2 throughout the process may be required. Availability of nutrients may shift cellular growth. Microbes may have alternate kinetics when excess nutrients are available.
  • The state of microbes at the end of a fermentation and during harvesting may impact cell survival and activity. Microbes may be preconditioned shortly before harvest to better prepare them for the physical and chemical stresses involved in separation and downstream processing. A change in temperature (often reducing to 20-5° C.) may reduce cellular metabolism, slowing growth (and/or death) and physiological change when removed from the fermenter. Effectiveness of centrifugal concentration may be influenced by culture pH. Raising pH by 1-2 points can improve effectiveness of concentration but can also be detrimental to cells. Microbes may be stressed shortly before harvest by increasing the concentration of salts and/or sugars in the medium. Cells stressed in this way may better survive freezing and lyophilization during downstream.
  • Separation methods and technology may impact how efficiently microbes are separated from the culture medium. Solids may be removed using centrifugation techniques. Effectiveness of centrifugal concentration can be influenced by culture pH or by the use of flocculating agents. Raising pH by 1-2 points may improve effectiveness of concentration but can also be detrimental to cells. Microbes may be stressed shortly before harvest by increasing the concentration of salts and/or sugars in the medium. Cells stressed in this way may better survive freezing and lyophilization during downstream. Additionally, Microbes may also be separated via filtration. Filtration is superior to centrifugation techniques for purification if the cells require excessive g-minutes to successfully centrifuge. Excipients can be added before after separation. Excipients can be added for cryo protection or for protection during lyophilization. Excipients can include, but are not limited to, sucrose, trehalose, or lactose, and these may be alternatively mixed with buffer and anti-oxidants. Prior to lyophilization, droplets of cell pellets mixed with excipients are submerged in liquid nitrogen.
  • Harvesting can be performed by continuous centrifugation. Product may be resuspended with various excipients to a desired final concentration. Excipients can be added for cryo protection or for protection during lyophilization. Excipients can include, but are not limited to, sucrose, trehalose, or lactose, and these may be alternatively mixed with buffer and anti-oxidants. Prior to lyophilization, droplets of cell pellets mixed with excipients are submerged in liquid nitrogen.
  • Lyophilization of material, including live bacteria, begins with primary drying. During the primary drying phase, the ice is removed. Here, a vacuum is generated and an appropriate amount of heat is supplied to the material for the ice to sublime. During the secondary drying phase, product bound water molecules are removed. Here, the temperature is raised higher than in the primary drying phase to break any physico-chemical interactions that have formed between the water molecules and the product material. The pressure may also be lowered further to enhance desorption during this stage. After the freeze-drying process is complete, the chamber may be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen. The product may be sealed within the freeze dryer under dry conditions, preventing exposure to atmospheric water and contaminants.
    • INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
  • All publications patent applications mentioned herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety as if each individual publication or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. In case of conflict, the present application, including any definitions herein, will control.
    • EQUIVALENTS
  • Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims.

Claims (36)

What is claimed is:
1. A method of treating an immune disorder in a subject comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacterium.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the bacterium is a strain comprising at least 90% genomic, 16S and/or CRISPR sequence identity to the nucleotide sequence of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
3-5. (canceled)
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises Lachnospiraceae extracellular vesicles (EVs) and Lachnospiraceae bacteria.
7-15. (canceled)
16. The method of claim 1, wherein the immune disorder is delayed-type hypersensitivity, allergic contact dermatitis, diabetes mellitus type 1, multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammation of the colon, colitis, digestive diseases, Crohn's disease, primary sclerosing cholangitis, psoriasis, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis, or inflammatory bowel disease.
17. A method of treating cancer in a subject comprising administering to the subject a pharmaceutical composition comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacterium.
18. The method of any claim 17, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of renal cell carcinoma of kidney, lymphoma, Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma, multiple myeloma, lung cancer, small-cell lung tumors, malignant pancreatic insulanoma, bladder cancer, colorectal carcinoma, plasmacytoma, prostate cancer, and pancreatic cancer.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is administered orally, rectally, intravenously, or subcutaneously.
20. The method of claim 1, wherein at least 50% of the bacteria in the pharmaceutical composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
21. (canceled)
22. The method of claim 1, wherein substantially all of the bacteria in the pharmaceutical composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
23. The method of claim 1, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1×106 colony forming units (CFUs) of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
24-28. (canceled)
29. The method of claim 1, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises live bacteria, attenuated bacteria, or killed bacteria.
30-33. (canceled)
34. The method of claim 17, wherein the method further comprises administering to the subject an additional cancer therapeutic.
35-38. (canceled)
39. The method of claim 34, wherein the cancer therapeutic comprises a chemotherapy agent.
40-93. (canceled)
94. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a Lachnospiraceae bacterium and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
95. (canceled)
96. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 94, wherein the bacterium is a strain comprising at least 99.9% genomic, 16S and/or CRISPR sequence identity to the nucleotide sequence of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
97-98. (canceled)
99. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 94, wherein at least 50% of the bacteria in the pharmaceutical composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
100-112. (canceled)
113. A pharmaceutical composition comprising isolated Lachnospiraceae extracellular vesicles (EVs).
114. A pharmaceutical composition comprising Lachnospiraceae extracellular vesicles (EVs) and Lachnospiraceae bacteria.
115-128. (canceled)
129. The method of claim 17, wherein the bacterium is a strain comprising at least 90% genomic, 16S and/or CRISPR sequence identity to the nucleotide sequence of a pharmaceutical strain listed in Table 1.
130. The method of claim 17, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises Lachnospiraceae extracellular vesicles (EVs) and Lachnospiraceae bacteria.
131. The method of claim 17, wherein the pharmaceutical composition is administered orally, intravenously, intratumorally, or subcutaneously.
132. The method of claim 17, wherein at least 50% of the bacteria in the pharmaceutical composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
133. The method of claim 17, wherein substantially all of the bacteria in the pharmaceutical composition are a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
134. The method of claim 17, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 1×106 colony forming units (CFUs) of a bacterial strain listed in Table 1.
135. The method of claim 17, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises live bacteria, attenuated bacteria, or killed bacteria.
US16/965,836 2018-01-31 2019-01-31 Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using lachnospiraceae bacteria Abandoned US20210052669A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/965,836 US20210052669A1 (en) 2018-01-31 2019-01-31 Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using lachnospiraceae bacteria

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201862624504P 2018-01-31 2018-01-31
US201862636539P 2018-02-28 2018-02-28
US201862643515P 2018-03-15 2018-03-15
US16/965,836 US20210052669A1 (en) 2018-01-31 2019-01-31 Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using lachnospiraceae bacteria
PCT/US2019/016080 WO2019152667A1 (en) 2018-01-31 2019-01-31 Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using lachnospiraceae bacteria

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20210052669A1 true US20210052669A1 (en) 2021-02-25

Family

ID=65657513

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/965,836 Abandoned US20210052669A1 (en) 2018-01-31 2019-01-31 Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using lachnospiraceae bacteria

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20210052669A1 (en)
EP (1) EP3746121A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2021512106A (en)
CN (1) CN111712260A (en)
WO (1) WO2019152667A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023192362A1 (en) * 2022-03-31 2023-10-05 Incelldx, Inc. Methods of treating a subject for myalgic encephalomyelitis/chronic fatigue syndrome (me/cfs) and compositions for use in the same

Families Citing this family (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017100420A1 (en) * 2015-12-08 2017-06-15 Mayo Foundation For Medical Education And Research Biomarkers for predicting clostridium difficile infection treatment outcome
EP3436054B2 (en) 2016-09-13 2022-07-27 Allergan, Inc. Stabilized non-protein clostridial toxin compositions
EP3694553A4 (en) 2017-10-12 2021-08-11 Amphivena Therapeutics, Inc. Dosing regimen for cd3 binding proteins
EP3911161A4 (en) * 2019-01-16 2022-09-14 Board of Regents, The University of Texas System Methods and compositions for treating immune checkpoint inhibitor associated colitis
CN114796264A (en) * 2021-01-27 2022-07-29 北京北工大科技园有限公司 Application of gold complex in preparation of medicine for treating novel coronavirus pneumonia
KR20230038476A (en) * 2020-06-11 2023-03-20 에벨로 바이오사이언시즈, 인크. Compositions and methods for treating diseases and disorders using Oscillosspiraceae microbial extracellular vesicles
CN113238060B (en) * 2021-05-08 2022-10-11 迈克生物股份有限公司 Kit for predicting or diagnosing myocarditis
WO2023100977A1 (en) * 2021-12-02 2023-06-08 地方独立行政法人神奈川県立産業技術総合研究所 Establishment of therapy and diagnosis for allergic diseases through control of immunoglobulin-binding protein
CN114225024B (en) * 2021-12-29 2022-08-19 山东健袖生态科技有限公司 Probiotic medicament for treating diseases
CN114917252A (en) * 2021-12-29 2022-08-19 慕恩（广州）生物科技有限公司 Microbe strain of lachnospiraceae, medicine for preventing and/or treating tumor and application
CN114796284A (en) * 2021-12-29 2022-07-29 慕恩（广州）生物科技有限公司 Microbial strain, medicine for preventing or treating tumors and application
CN114748457A (en) * 2022-04-11 2022-07-15 中国医学科学院医学生物学研究所 Pharmaceutical composition for treating cervical cancer and application thereof

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6368586B1 (en) 1996-01-26 2002-04-09 Brown University Research Foundation Methods and compositions for enhancing the bioadhesive properties of polymers
GB0130123D0 (en) * 2001-12-17 2002-02-06 Microbiological Res Agency Outer membrane vesicle vaccine and its preparation
US7491517B2 (en) * 2006-07-19 2009-02-17 Jeeri R Reddy Method of producing meningococcal meningitis vaccine for Neisseria meningitidis serotypes A,C,Y, and W-135
GB2464585B (en) * 2008-10-21 2012-06-13 Blue Marble Energy Corp Systems and methods for anaerobic digestion and collection of products
US8906668B2 (en) * 2012-11-23 2014-12-09 Seres Health, Inc. Synergistic bacterial compositions and methods of production and use thereof
AU2014239883B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2019-01-17 Therabiome, Llc Targeted gastrointestinal tract delivery of probiotic organisms and/or therapeutic agents
MA41020A (en) * 2014-11-25 2017-10-03 Evelo Biosciences Inc PROBIOTIC AND PREBIOTIC COMPOSITIONS, AND THEIR METHODS OF USE FOR MODULATION OF THE MICROBIOME
US9999641B2 (en) * 2016-06-14 2018-06-19 Vedanta Biosciences, Inc. Treatment of clostridium difficile infection
EP3710023A1 (en) * 2017-11-14 2020-09-23 Evelo Biosciences, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating disease using a blautia strain

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023192362A1 (en) * 2022-03-31 2023-10-05 Incelldx, Inc. Methods of treating a subject for myalgic encephalomyelitis/chronic fatigue syndrome (me/cfs) and compositions for use in the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111712260A (en) 2020-09-25
EP3746121A1 (en) 2020-12-09
JP2021512106A (en) 2021-05-13
WO2019152667A1 (en) 2019-08-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10702561B2 (en) Pharmaceutical compositions comprising a Blautia strain
US20230405058A1 (en) Extracellular vesicles from prevotella
US11090341B2 (en) Compositions and methods for treating cancer and immune disorders using Veillonella bacteria
US20220211773A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using immune modulating lactococcus bacteria strains
US20210052669A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treating immune disorders using lachnospiraceae bacteria
US20190192585A1 (en) Compositions and methods of treating cancer using bifidobacterium animalis ssp. lactis
EP3982986A1 (en) Secreted microbial extracellular vesicles
WO2019178487A2 (en) Compositions and methods for treating disease using klebsiella quasipneumoniae subsp. similipneumoniae
WO2019178490A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treating cancer and inflammation using klebsiella oxytoca
WO2019178494A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treating cancer and inflammation using tyzzerella nexilis
WO2019178055A1 (en) Extracellular vesicles from burkholderia
US20230263838A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treating diseases and disorders using oscillospiraceae microbial extracellular vesicles
WO2021252861A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treating diseases and disorders using megasphaera sp
WO2019075452A1 (en) Identification of bacteria for cancer therapy
US20230302061A1 (en) Compositions and methods for treating diseases and disorders using fournierella massiliensis
WO2021252860A2 (en) Compositions and methods for treating diseases and disorders using harryflintia acetispora
WO2020006216A1 (en) Compositions and methods of treating cancer using neisseria bacteria
WO2022221183A1 (en) Fournierella extracellular vesicle preparations

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: APPLICATION DISPATCHED FROM PREEXAM, NOT YET DOCKETED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION COUNTED, NOT YET MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

AS Assignment

Owner name: EVELO BIOSCIENCES, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:SIZOVA, MARIA;BAEZ-GIANGRECO, CAROLINA;GOODMAN, BRIAN;SIGNING DATES FROM 20201014 TO 20201020;REEL/FRAME:056885/0483

Owner name: EVELO BIOSCIENCES, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:PONICHTERA, HOLLY;SANDY, PETER;SIGNING DATES FROM 20201221 TO 20210115;REEL/FRAME:056885/0460

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION